Home
/
Autodesk
/
AUTOCAD 2006
/
Command Reference Manual

Autodesk AUTOCAD 2006, Command Reference Manual, Page: 176 / 1490

Share

Page: 176 / 1490

Autodesk AUTOCAD 2006 Command Reference Manual Download Page 176

Name

Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft

®

Windows

®

and the program for other purposes, if the system variable

EXTNAMES is set to 1.

The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.

NOTE

You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and

OVERHEAD as valid block names.

Base Point

Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.

Allow Exploding

Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded.

Block Unit

Specifies the insertion units for the block reference.

152 | Chapter 4

«
...
174
175
176
177
178
...
»

Summary of Contents for AUTOCAD 2006

Page 1: ...February 2005 AutoCAD 2006 Command Reference ...

Page 2: ...ing the Design Team GDX Driver gmax logo gmax ready logo Heads up Design jobnet mass ObjectDBX onscreen onair online Plasma PolarSnap Productstream Real time Roto Render Queue Visual Bridge Visual Syllabus and Where Design Connects Autodesk Canada Co Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co in the USA and or Canada and or other countries discreet fire flame flint fl...

Page 3: ...s Window 20 3DCONFIG 22 3DCORBIT 28 3DDISTANCE 28 3DDWFPUBLISH 29 3D DWF Publish Dialog Box 29 3DFACE 30 3DMESH 32 3DORBIT 33 3D Orbit Cursor Icons 34 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu 35 3DORBITCTR 38 3DPAN 38 3DPOLY 39 3DSIN 40 3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box 40 3DSOUT 43 3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box 43 3DSWIVEL 45 3DZOOM 46 Chapter 3 ABOUT 47 ACISIN 47 ACISOUT 47 ADCCLOSE 47 ADCENTER 4...

Page 4: ...RAY Command Line 86 ARX 88 ASSIST 89 Info Palette Shortcut Menu 90 ASSISTCLOSE 90 ATTACHURL 91 ATTDEF 91 Attribute Definition Dialog Box 91 ATTDEF Command Line 94 ATTDISP 96 ATTEDIT 97 Edit Attributes Dialog Box 98 ATTEDIT Command Line 99 ATTEXT 104 Attribute Extraction Dialog Box 105 ATTEXT Command Line 106 ATTREDEF 107 ATTSYNC 107 AUDIT 108 Chapter 4 BACKGROUND 109 Background Dialog Box 109 Adju...

Page 5: ...50 BLOCK 151 Block Definition Dialog Box 151 BLOCK Command Line 154 BLOCKICON 156 BLOOKUPTABLE 156 Property Lookup Table Dialog Box 157 Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box 158 BMPOUT 159 BOUNDARY 160 Boundary Creation Dialog Box 160 BOUNDARY Command Line 161 BOX 162 BPARAMETER 165 BREAK 179 BROWSER 181 BSAVE 181 BSAVEAS 182 Save Block As Dialog Box 182 BVHIDE 183 BVSHOW 183 BVSTATE 184 Visibility ...

Page 6: ...in an Intersection Point 201 Calculate a Distance 201 Obtain a Radius 203 Obtain an Angle 203 Calculate a Normal Vector 205 Use Shortcut Functions 206 CAMERA 207 CHAMFER 208 CHANGE 212 CHECKSTANDARDS 217 Check Standards Dialog Box 217 CHPROP 218 CIRCLE 221 CLEANSCREENON 223 CLEANSCREENOFF 224 CLOSE 224 CLOSEALL 224 COLOR 224 Select Color Dialog Box 225 Index Color Tab Select Color Dialog Box 225 T...

Page 7: ...ONNECT 257 dbConnect Manager 258 Data View Window 264 Query Editor 275 Quick Query Tab Query Editor 275 Range Query Tab Query Editor 277 Query Builder Tab Query Editor 278 SQL Query Tab Query Editor 281 Column Values Dialog Box 284 Configure a Data Source Dialog Box 284 Data View and Query Options Dialog Box 284 Export Links Dialog Box 287 Export Query Set Dialog Box 288 Export Template Set Dialog...

Page 8: ...oint Style Dialog Box 312 DDVPOINT 313 Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box 313 DELAY 314 DETACHURL 314 DIM and DIM1 315 DIMALIGNED 316 DIMANGULAR 319 DIMARC 323 DIMBASELINE 325 DIMCENTER 326 DIMCONTINUE 327 DIMDIAMETER 329 DIMDISASSOCIATE 330 DIMEDIT 330 DIMJOGGED 333 DIMLINEAR 335 DIMORDINATE 339 DIMOVERRIDE 341 DIMRADIUS 342 DIMREASSOCIATE 343 DIMREGEN 345 DIMSTYLE 345 Dimension Style Manager 346 Creat...

Page 9: ...ox 423 DXBIN 423 Chapter 7 EATTEDIT 425 Enhanced Attribute Editor 425 EATTEXT 427 Attribute Extraction Wizard 428 Attribute Extraction Additional Settings Dialog Box 432 Filter Dialog Box 433 EDGE 434 EDGESURF 435 ELEV 436 ELLIPSE 437 ERASE 441 ETRANSMIT 442 Create Transmittal Dialog Box 442 Transmittal Setups Dialog Box 446 Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box 447 Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog ...

Page 10: ...atch Tab Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box 497 Gradient Tab Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box 501 More Options Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box 502 Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box 506 HATCH Command Line 507 HATCHEDIT 514 Hatch Edit Dialog Box 514 HATCHEDIT Command Line 516 HELP 519 HIDE 519 HLSETTINGS 520 Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box 521 HYPERLINK 523 Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box 523 Edit Hyperlink Dialog...

Page 11: ...ies Manager 565 Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box 574 Layer Filter Examples 576 Layer States Manager 578 New Layer State to Save Dialog Box 580 Select Linetype Dialog Box 580 Lineweight Dialog Box 581 LAYER Command Line 582 LAYERP 587 LAYERPMODE 588 LAYOUT 588 LAYOUTWIZARD 590 Layout Wizard 590 LAYTRANS 591 Layer Translator 591 Settings Dialog Box 593 Edit New Layer Dialog Box 594 LEADER 594 LENG...

Page 12: ... Library Edit Dialog Box 627 LSNEW 629 Landscape New Dialog Box 629 LTSCALE 631 LWEIGHT 632 Lineweight Settings Dialog Box 632 LWEIGHT Command Line 634 Chapter 14 MARKUP 637 Markup Set Manager 637 MARKUPCLOSE 643 MASSPROP 643 MATCHCELL 646 MATCHPROP 646 Property Settings Dialog Box 647 MATLIB 649 Materials Library Dialog Box 649 Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box 651 Reconcile Exported M...

Page 13: ...und Mask Dialog Box 702 Replace Dialog Box 703 Stack Properties Dialog Box 704 AutoStack Properties Dialog Box 706 MTEXT Command Line 707 Symbols and Special Characters 711 MULTIPLE 713 MVIEW 713 MVSETUP 718 MVSETUP on the Model Tab 719 MVSETUP on a Layout Tab 719 Chapter 15 NETLOAD 727 NEW 727 Create New Drawing Dialog Box 727 Quick Setup Wizard 730 Advanced Setup Wizard 732 NEW Command Line 734 ...

Page 14: ...80 User Preferences Tab Options Dialog Box 783 Drafting Tab Options Dialog Box 786 Selection Tab Options Dialog Box 789 Profiles Tab Options Dialog Box 793 Alternate Font Dialog Box 795 Color Options Dialog Box 796 Command Line Window Font Dialog Box 798 Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box 799 Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box 800 3D Graphics System Configuration Dialog Box 802 Right Click Cu...

Page 15: ...ess Dialog Box 876 Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box 876 PLOT Command Line 878 PLOTSTAMP 882 Plot Stamp Dialog Box 882 User Defined Fields Dialog Box 884 Advanced Options Dialog Box 884 PLOTSTAMP Command Line 887 PLOTSTYLE 889 Current Plot Style Dialog Box 890 Select Plot Style Dialog Box 891 PLOTSTYLE Command Line 892 PLOTTERMANAGER 892 Add a Plotter Wizard 893 Plotter Configuration Edi...

Page 16: ...s Dialog Box Publish 930 Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box Publish 930 DWF Password Dialog Box 931 Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box 931 Publish Job Progress Dialog Box 931 PUBLISH Command Line 932 PUBLISHTOWEB 932 Publish to Web Wizard 933 PURGE 933 Purge Dialog Box 933 PURGE Command Line 935 Chapter 18 QCCLOSE 937 QDIM 937 QLEADER 938 Leader Settings Dialog Box 940 QNEW 944 QSAVE ...

Page 17: ...g Box 978 RENDSCR 980 REPLAY 980 Image Specifications Dialog Box 981 RESETBLOCK 982 RESUME 982 REVCLOUD 983 REVOLVE 984 REVSURF 986 RMAT 989 Materials Dialog Box 989 New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box 991 Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box 995 New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box 997 New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box 999 New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box 1001 Atta...

Page 18: ...ale Dialog Box 1036 SCALELISTEDIT Command Line 1037 SCALETEXT 1037 SCENE 1039 Scenes Dialog Box 1039 New Scene Dialog Box 1039 Modify Scene Dialog Box 1040 SCRIPT 1041 SECTION 1042 SECURITYOPTIONS 1045 Security Options Dialog Box 1045 Confirm Password Dialog Box 1047 Advanced Options Dialog Box 1047 SELECT 1048 SETIDROPHANDLER 1052 Set Default i drop Content Type Dialog Box 1052 i drop Options Dia...

Page 19: ... Box 1083 Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box 1083 Sheet Properties Dialog Box 1084 New Sheet Selection Dialog Box 1085 Sheet Selections Dialog Box 1086 View Category Dialog Box 1087 List of Blocks Dialog Box 1087 Select Block Dialog Box 1088 SHEETSETHIDE 1089 SHELL 1090 SHOWMAT 1090 SIGVALIDATE 1090 Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box 1091 Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box 1092 SKETCH 10...

Page 20: ...1171 Insert Table Dialog Box 1171 TABLE Command Line 1173 TABLEDIT 1175 TABLEEXPORT 1175 TABLESTYLE 1175 Table Style Dialog Box 1176 Create New Table Style Dialog Box 1177 New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes 1177 TABLET 1181 TABSURF 1185 TASKBAR 1187 TEXT 1187 Text Shortcut Menu 1193 Special Unicode Characters 1193 Control Codes and Special Characters 1194 TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable...

Page 21: ...SMAN 1232 UCS Dialog Box 1233 Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box 1238 UCS Details Dialog Box 1238 UNDEFINE 1239 UNDO 1240 UNION 1242 UNITS 1243 Drawing Units Dialog Box 1243 Direction Control Dialog Box 1245 UNITS Command Line 1247 UPDATEFIELD 1248 UPDATETHUMBSNOW 1248 Chapter 23 VBAIDE 1249 VBALOAD 1249 AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box 1249 VBAMAN 1250 VBA Manager 1251 VBARUN 1253 Macros ...

Page 22: ...d Line Model Space Viewports 1279 VPORTS Command Line Layout Viewports 1281 VSLIDE 1283 VTOPTIONS 1284 View Transitions Dialog Box 1284 Chapter 24 WBLOCK 1287 Write Block Dialog Box 1287 WBLOCK Command Line 1289 WEDGE 1290 WHOHAS 1293 WIPEOUT 1294 WMFIN 1295 WMFOPTS 1299 WMF In Options Dialog Box 1299 WMFOUT 1300 WORKSPACE 1300 WSSETTINGS 1301 Workspace Settings Dialog Box 1301 WSSAVE 1302 Save Wo...

Page 23: ...and Modifier 1332 Object Snaps Command Modifier 1333 Selection Modes Command Modifier 1333 Chapter 28 ACADLSPASDOC 1335 ACADPREFIX 1336 ACADVER 1336 ACISOUTVER 1336 ADCSTATE 1336 AFLAGS 1336 ANGBASE 1337 ANGDIR 1337 APBOX 1337 APERTURE 1337 AREA 1338 ASSISTSTATE 1338 ATTDIA 1338 ATTMODE 1338 ATTREQ 1339 AUDITCTL 1339 AUNITS 1339 AUPREC 1339 AUTOSNAP 1340 BACKGROUNDPLOT 1340 BACKZ 1341 BACTIONCOLOR...

Page 24: ......

Page 25: ...ections and additions refer to the Readme file Using This Reference The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands command options and system variables The explanations reflect the default AutoCAD system variable settings and the default prototype drawing If you change system variable settings the prompts on your screen might differ from what you see here For example the setti...

Page 26: ...Realtime Shortcut menu With no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Pan Command line pan or pan for transparent use The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of the SHORTCUTMENU system variable The instructions in the command access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu available You can exit a command at any time by pressing E...

Page 27: ...opTion3 default option or value The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command or for system variables related to the command The succeeding prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and when applicable list the available options in straight brackets and a default option or value in angle brackets In some cases AutoCAD determines default opt...

Page 28: ...and line rather than acting as ENTER This allows for the support of extended symbol names Just as default command options are often provided prompts may include default values enclosed in angle brackets when data is requested For example the POLYGON command displays the following prompt suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon Command polygon Enter number of sides 4 To accept the defau...

Page 29: ...TSCALE AutoCAD system variables DASHDOT STANDARD AutoCAD named objects such as linetypes and styles Select object to trim or Project Edge Undo Prompts Select objects Use an object selection method Instructions after prompt sequences acad exe Readme file dwg file extension File names and file name extensions Sample folder c autocad 2002 support Folder or directory names At the Command prompt enter ...

Page 30: ...6 ...

Page 31: ...Box Creates a 3D box polygon mesh Specify corner point of box Specify length of box Specify a distance Specify width of box or Cube Specify a distance or enter c width length Width Specifies the width of the box Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box height angle Specify height of box Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or Referenc...

Page 32: ...e reference angle If you enter 0 as a reference angle the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box Specify the new angle Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation specify a point relative to the base point The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box The box rotates by the angle between the reference angle and the new angle If you want to al...

Page 33: ...termines the rotation of the box Specify the new angle Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation specify a point relative to the base point The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box The box rotates the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle If you want to align the box with another object specify two points on the target obj...

Page 34: ...by its diameter A value of 0 produces a cone A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone Specify diameter for top of cone 0 Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify height of cone Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter for Base Defines the base of the cone by its diameter Specify diameter for base of cone Specif...

Page 35: ...Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Dish Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh Specify center point of dish Specify a point 1 Specify radius of dish or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dish by its radius Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surf...

Page 36: ...rface of dome 8 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter Specify diameter of dome Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome 8 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER 1 radius diameter Mesh Creates a planar mesh w...

Page 37: ...first corner point for base of pyramid Specify a point 1 Specify second corner point for base of pyramid Specify a point 2 Specify third corner point for base of pyramid Specify a point 3 Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or Tetrahedron Specify a point 4 or enter t 5 4 3 2 1 apex point Fourth Corner Point Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid Specify apex point of ...

Page 38: ...nd corner point for top of pyramid Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid Specify a point Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh Specify apex point of tetrahedron or Top Specify a point or enter t Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point apex Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a tri...

Page 39: ...r enter d 1 Radius Defines the sphere by its radius Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER radius Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter Specify diameter of sphere Specify a distance 15 ...

Page 40: ...e current UCS Specify center point of torus Specify a point 1 Specify radius of torus or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d torus radius 1 The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge not to the center of the tube Radius Defines the torus by its radius tube radius torus radius Specify radius of tube or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tu...

Page 41: ...rence 16 Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the torus by its diameter torus diameter tube diameter Specify diameter of torus Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube Radius Defines the tube by its radius Enter number of seg...

Page 42: ...e Specify a distance Specify height of wedge Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis Specify an angle The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge If you enter 0 the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane 1 width length height 3DARRAY Creates a three dimensional array Modify menu 3D Operation 3D Array Command line 3darray Select objects Us...

Page 43: ...istance between columns Specify a distance If you specify more than one level the following prompt is displayed Specify the distance between levels Specify a distance Positive values generate the array along the positive X Y and Z axes Negative values generate the array along the negative X Y and Z axes Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation Enter the number of items in the array Ent...

Page 44: ...t Clipping Planes Command line 3dclip Sets clipping planes for the display in 3D Orbit view Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar or right click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the Adjust Clipping Planes Shortcut Menu Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the window to see the effect of the clipping planes As you rotate the view different portions of t...

Page 45: ...n see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down Adjust Back Clipping Adjusts only the back clipping plane The line near the top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane If a check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down Create Slice Causes the back and front clipping planes to move togethe...

Page 46: ... image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the window Front Clipping On Turns the front clipping plane on or off A check mark indicates that the front clipping plane is on and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the front clipping plane Choose this option again to turn the front clipping plane off and remove the check mark Back Clipping On Turns t...

Page 47: ... on the display changes to the most detailed option first and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option Configure Adaptive Degradation Enter mode ON OFF ON Specify whether you want adaptive degradation turned on or off If Adaptive Degradation is turned on you can specify the type If no type is specified then no degradation will occur Current display options Wireframe Bounding Box En...

Page 48: ...tion turned on or off If Dynamic Tessellation is turned on you can specify the number of surface tessellations curve tessellations or tessellations to cache Configure Dynamic tessellation Enter option Surface tessellation Curve tessellation Tessellations to cache eXit Surface tessellations Specify the type of dynamic tessellation you want to use Configure Surface tessellation Enter tolerance 88 En...

Page 49: ...Render options Enter option Lights Materials Backgrounds eXit Lights Specify whether you want to configure lights materials or backgrounds Configure Lights Enter mode ON OFF ON Specify whether you want lights turned on or off Configure Materials Enter mode ON OFF ON Specify whether you want materials turned on or off Configure Backgrounds Enter mode ON OFF ON Specify whether you want backgrounds t...

Page 50: ...y setting blending and extra processing produce an image free of visual artifacts but at the cost of drawing speed Materials must also be turned on for transparency to be visible Geometry Determines how to display isolines in 3D and whether to display back faces in 3D Configure Geometry Enter option Isolines on top Discard backfaces Isolines on top Specify an option to configure Configure Isolines...

Page 51: ...s turned on or off If you select Hardware you can also specify whether geometry acceleration and anti alias lines are turned on or off Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration Select to use the hardware graphics card to perform most of the drawing tasks in 3D This speeds up the drawing time When you select Hardware the default driver is set to the wopengl8 hdi driver that is included with the prog...

Page 52: ...or to a sphere with two continuous lines encircling it Click in the drawing area and drag the pointing device in any direction to start the objects moving in the direction that you re dragging Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their orbit in the direction that you specified The speed of the cursor movement determines the speed at which the objects spin You can chan...

Page 53: ...torted 3DDWFPUBLISH Creates 3D DWF files of your three dimensional models Command line 3ddwfpublish The 3D DWF Publish Dialog Box on page 29 is displayed NOTE You must have the 3D DWF Publishing feature installed to access the 3DDWFPUBLISH command 3D DWF Publish Dialog Box Command line 3ddwfpublish Specifies a three dimensional model that you can publish as a Design Web Format DWF file 3D DWF Publ...

Page 54: ... Groups individual objects for viewing by object type for example by block line circle Select Model Space Objects You are prompted to create a selection set of model space objects which are published to the 3D DWF file after you click OK 3D DWF Organization Specifies how to group objects in the DWF file for viewing in Autodesk DWF Viewer Group Individual Objects By Specifies how to group individua...

Page 55: ...specification must precede any object snap modes XYZ filters or coordinate input for that edge You can create a 3D face in which all edges are invisible Such a face is a phantom it does not appear in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line drawings 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces invisible edges visible edges Specify secon...

Page 56: ...SH is designed primarily for programmers Other users should use the 3D command A polygon mesh is defined by a matrix the size of which is determined by M and N size values M times N equals the number of vertices that you must specify M N Specify location for vertex 0 0 Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n the row and column indices of the vertex...

Page 57: ...con is on a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command The 3D Orbit view displays an arcball which is a circle divided into four quadrants by smaller circles When 3DORBIT is active the target of the view stays stationary and the camera location or point of view moves around ...

Page 58: ...arcball it changes to a sphere encircled by two lines and the view moves freely If you move the cursor back outside the arcball you revert to a roll Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the left or right side of the arcball it becomes a horizontal ellipse Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y axis through...

Page 59: ...horizontally and vertically See 3DPAN Zoom Simulates the effect of a camera s zoom lens See 3DZOOM Orbit Returns the view to Orbit mode after use of the other menu commands such as Zoom Pan or Continuous Orbit More Accesses one of the following view options Adjust Clipping Planes Opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window See 3DCLIP Adjust Distance Simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to ...

Page 60: ...ts the front clipping plane See 3DCLIP Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view and smooths the edges between polygon faces This gives the objects a smoother more realistic appearance Gouraud Shaded Edges On Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options The objects are Gouraud Shaded with the wireframe showing Grid Displays a two dimensional array of lines similar to graph paper ...

Page 61: ... distorted when they are closer Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point Objects appear to recede into the distance and parts of the objects appear larger and closer to you The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object is very close This view correlates more closely to what your eye sees Swivel Camera Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and...

Page 62: ...started 3DORBIT Preset Views Displays a list of predefined views such as Top Bottom and SW Isometric Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model 3DORBITCTR Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view Command line 3dorbitctr Starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device If you specify a point outside the current view 3DORBITC...

Page 63: ...polyline of line segments in 3D space Draw menu 3D Polyline Command line 3dpoly Specify start point of polyline Specify a point 1 Specify Endpoint of Line or Undo Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or Undo Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or Close Undo Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous poi...

Page 64: ...3D Studio Command line 3dsin The 3D Studio File Import dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed After you choose a file to import the 3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box is displayed 3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box Insert menu 3D Studio Command line 3dsin Lists available and selected 3D objects saves 3D objects to layers and handles objects that use multiple mat...

Page 65: ...d to each multiple material object to the entire object See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the first assigned material is determined By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3D Studio file and places objects to which that material is attached on that layer The name of the layer is the same as the name of the material By Object Creates a layer for each object in t...

Page 66: ...s all objects from the Selected Objects list and returns them to the Available Objects list Select a Material Assigns one of the materials that was assigned to the object in the 3D Studio file to the entire object Select the material from the list below this option or choose NONE to revert to the AutoCAD default material Single Layer Creates a single layer called AVLAYER and places all objects on ...

Page 67: ...increases the complexity of the drawing geometry Assign First Material Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple material object to the entire object See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the first assigned material is determined Don t Assign a Material Assigns no material to each multiple material object This option loses all material assignment information but pres...

Page 68: ...oup AutoCAD objects into 3D Studio objects Auto Smoothing Creates 3D Studio smoothing groups If this option is cleared no smoothing is assigned to new 3D Studio objects Auto Welding Welds vertices If this option is cleared vertices remain unchanged upon export AutoCAD Color Index ACI Creates an object from the objects that share an ACI number The name of the new object is based on the color AutoCA...

Page 69: ...ed into a single vertex The default value is 0 001 You can enter any positive value up to eight characters in length The decimal point can be in any location AutoCAD Blocks Splits a block into its components and converts them to 3D Studio objects according to the mode set under Derive 3D Studio Objects From Smoothing Assigns 3D Studio smoothing groups based on the controls set in this area Welding...

Page 70: ...art the 3DORBIT command right click in the drawing area and choose Zoom Command line 3dzoom 3DZOOM simulates the effect of a camera s zoom lens It makes objects appear closer and farther away but does not change the position of the camera Zooming in magnifies the image This also exaggerates the perspective with which you view the objects if you re using perspective projection It may slightly disto...

Page 71: ...s displayed Select the file to import in the File Name list The SAT ASCII ACIS file is imported into the drawing ACISOUT Exports a body object solid or region to an ACIS file Command line acisout NOTE When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD you need to set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release For example to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14...

Page 72: ...r Command line adcenter Browses finds and previews content and inserts content which includes blocks hatches and external references xrefs Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab the following two panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content Content Area DesignCenter on page 49...

Page 73: ...Drawings Named objects contained in drawings named objects include blocks xrefs layouts layers dimension styles and text styles Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns Web based content Custom content developed by third party applications From the content area you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach external references in a drawing by dragging by double clicking or by right...

Page 74: ...ard File Selection Dialog Boxes Use Load to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web and then to select content to load in the content area Back Returns to the most recent location in the history list Forward Returns to the next later location in the history list Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container Stop DC Online tab Stops the current ...

Page 75: ...ption on the shortcut menu and then use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu NOTE The DesignCenter folder is automatically added to Favorites This folder contains drawings with discipline specific blocks that you can insert in drawings Home Returns DesignCenter to your home folder On installation the home folder is set to Sample DesignCenter Change the home folder using the shortcut menu in the...

Page 76: ...s for the content that is loaded in the content area You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button repeatedly to cycle through the display formats The default view varies for the type of content currently loaded in the content area Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon format Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format ...

Page 77: ...ierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives including My Computer and Network Neighborhood You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file name directory location or network path in the DesignCenter tree view See ADCNAVIGATE Open Drawings Displays all drawings open in the current work session including drawings that are minimized History Displays a list of the files th...

Page 78: ...ate modified This is the default setting Between Searches for files created or modified between the dates you specify Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box in which you can specify the drives and folders to search Containing Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to search for For example you can search for text contained within a block attribute such as a ...

Page 79: ...er than File Name are derived from the information entered in the Drawing Properties dialog box DWGPROPS This option is available on the Drawings tab and the Custom Content tab NOTE Custom content developed by third party applications may not provide fields for searches using the Search dialog box Look For Specifies the type of content to search for The content type you specify determines which ta...

Page 80: ... Double click an item to load it into DesignCenter Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path Size Is Specifies a minimum or maximum file size Select At Least or At Most and enter a value in KB Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results panel Search Tabs Search Dialog Box Display search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look...

Page 81: ... the Folder tab active and the path or drawing file that you specified is loaded ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D Modify menu 3D Operation Align Command line align Select objects Select the objects to align and press ENTER ALIGN Using One Pair of Points Specify ...

Page 82: ...s specified result 4 1 2 3 When you select two point pairs you can move rotate and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment 1 2 The second set of points defines the angle of rotation 3 4 After you enter the second set of points you are prompted to scale the object The distance between ...

Page 83: ...specified objects selected When you select three point pairs you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects The selected objects move from the source point 1 to the destination point 2 The selected object is rotated 1 and 3 so that it aligns with the destination object 2 and 4 The selected object is then rotated again 3 and 5 so that it aligns with the destination o...

Page 84: ...of the previous modeler and that of the new modeler Likewise updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly below the surface creating a hole through the solid leaving the original shape unaltered Also drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or chamfer APERTURE Controls the size of the object sna...

Page 85: ...OAD Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup Tools menu Load Application Command line appload The Load Unload Applications Dialog Box Load Unload Applications Dialog Box Tools menu Load Application Command line appload Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup Load Unload Applications Dialog Box 61 ...

Page 86: ...Windows Explorer If Add To History is not selected when you drag files into this list the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history list You can load and remove applications from this list but to unload applications you must use the Loaded Applications tab See the Load Unload and Remove options Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in the files list ...

Page 87: ... Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD web browser to the Startup Suite Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations Unload Remove Unloads the selected applications or removes them from the History List Unload is available only when a file is selected on the Loaded Applications ta...

Page 88: ...etical list by file name of the application files to load at startup Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite ARC Creates an arc Draw toolbar Draw menu Arc Command line arc Specify Start Point of arc or Center Specify a point enter ce or press ENTER to Tangent to Last Line Arc or Polyline Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc 64 Chapter 3 ...

Page 89: ...t 3 1 2 3 You can specify a three point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part Specify center point of arc Specify end point of arc or Angle chord Length End Point Using the center point 2 draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the t...

Page 90: ... chord Specify a length length of chord 1 2 End Specifies the endpoint of the arc Specify end point of arc Specify center point of arc or Angle Direction Radius Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point 3 through the second point specified 2 imaginary ray 1 2 3 Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from...

Page 91: ...ction for the start point of arc direction 2 1 Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to the endpoint 2 If the radius is negative the major arc is drawn Specify radius of arc radius 1 2 Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part Specify center point of arc Specify start point of arc Specify end point of arc or Angle chord Length End Point Draws...

Page 92: ...he distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint If the chord length is positive the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point If the chord length is negative the major arc is drawn counterclockwise Specify length of chord length of chord 1 2 Tangent to Last Line Arc or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line arc or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at th...

Page 93: ... files to be included in the package in a table format All files to be included in the archive package are indicated by a check mark next to the file name To remove a file from the archive package select the check box Right click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu from which you can clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files NOTE Make sure that the files to be archive...

Page 94: ...are not included in the archive package Included Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package Included Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package Save As Opens a File Save dialog box in which you can specify a location in which to save a report file Note that a report file is automatically included with all archive packages th...

Page 95: ...By default all files associated with the current drawing such as related xrefs plot styles and fonts are listed You can add files to the archive package or remove existing files Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box 71 ...

Page 96: ...ult notes to be included with all your archive packages by creating an ASCII text file called archive txt This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files Tab Options Dialog Box in the Options dialog box View Report Displays report information that is included with the archive package Includes any archive notes that you entered If you have created...

Page 97: ...y a source root folder Folder Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder Include Fonts Includes any associated font files TXT and SHX with the archive package Include Sheet Set Data and Files Includes the sheet set data DST file label block drawing files callout block drawing files and drawing template DWT files with the archive package Modify Archive Setup Dialog...

Page 98: ...pt for a File Name Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the archive package Prompt for Password Opens the Archive Set Password Dialog Box where you can specify a password for your archive package Self Extracting Executable Creates an archive package of files as a compressed self extracting executable file Double clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses ...

Page 99: ...f necessary A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets if necessary The sheet set data DST file however is placed in the root folder This option is not available if you re saving an archive package to an Internet location Zip Creates an archive package of files as a compressed ZIP file To restore the files you need a decompression utility such as the shareware applicati...

Page 100: ...d Dialog Box Command line archive Password for Compressed Archive Package Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package When others attempt to open the archive package they must provide this password to access the files Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive packages Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password...

Page 101: ...ea Command line area Specify First Corner Point or Object Add Subtract Specify a point 1 or enter an option First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total Specify a point 2 defining an area and perimeter 1 2 3 5 4...

Page 102: ...a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored open polyline selected area defined The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter or length calculations wide polyline Add Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas The Add option calculates the individu...

Page 103: ...t close the polygon the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is added Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object ADD mode Select objects AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turn...

Page 104: ...or polar arrays by choosing the appropriate option Each object in an array can be manipulated independently If you select multiple objects the objects are treated as one item to be copied and arrayed If you enter array at the Command prompt ARRAY displays ARRAY Command Line Array Dialog Box Modify menu Array Command line array Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern Use the Rectangular Arr...

Page 105: ...ne row you must specify more than one column If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array it might take a while to create the copies By default the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100 000 The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry To reset the limit to 200 000 for example enter setenv MaxArray 200000 at the Command prompt Ar...

Page 106: ...n Column Offset Specifies the distance in units between columns To add columns to the left specify a negative value To specify column spacing with the pointing device use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation This angle is normally 0 so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current ...

Page 107: ...les using UNITS The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point polar array with objects rotated polar array angle to fill 180 objects not rotated 1 2 2 1 Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array Enter coordinate values for X and Y or choose Pick Center Point to use the...

Page 108: ...ngle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array Enter a positive value The default direction value is 90 NOTE You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included a...

Page 109: ...olyline 3D polyline ray spline Insertion point Block paragraph text single line text Midpoint Construction lines Grip point Region Set to Object s Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object To manually set the base point clear this option Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify ...

Page 110: ...ield after changing a setting Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes ARRAY Command Line If you enter array at the Command prompt ARRAY displays prompts on the command line Select objects Use an object selection method Enter the type of array Rectangular Polar current Enter an option or press ...

Page 111: ...ecify a negative value for the distance between columns Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation This angle is normally 0 so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes The Rotate option of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array The SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle If you ...

Page 112: ...ms and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press ENTER the following prompt is displayed Angle between items Specify an angle If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed ENTER ARRAY prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the direction of the array Angle between items ccw cw Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integ...

Page 113: ...plication Enter ARX DBX file name to unload Commands Lists the AcEd registered commands AcEd registered commands are described in the ObjectARX Developer s Guide Options Presents developer related ObjectARX application options These options are explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developer s Guide Enter an option Group CLasses Services Enter an option or press ENTER Group Causes the speci...

Page 114: ... available through the Info Palette Shortcut Menu Info Palette Shortcut Menu Provides options for working in the Info palette and controlling the Quick Help information displayed Right click inside the Info palette Back Moves backward through the history of Help topics that you have viewed Forward Moves forward through the history of Help topics that you have viewed Home Displays information that ...

Page 115: ...move the cursor over the area in the drawing the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the area Object Attaches a URL to the selected object Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER to end selection Enter hyperlink current drawing Enter a URL When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to...

Page 116: ...ffect existing attribute definitions Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions Height Specifies the height of the attribute text Enter a value or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify If you select a text style that has fixed height anything other than 0 0 or if you select Align in the Justi...

Page 117: ... value or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device The rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list the Rotation option is not available Specify On Screen Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes Use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to...

Page 118: ...Enter coordinate values or select Specify On screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with Text Options Sets the justification style height and rotation of the attribute text Align Below Previous Attribute Definition Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute If you have not prev...

Page 119: ...ggles the modes on or off Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings The AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to set the default modes Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the block ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions Verify Prompts for verification th...

Page 120: ...er an option or press ENTER For a description of each option see TEXT Attribute Value Specifies the value for a constant attribute This prompt is displayed only if you turn on Constant mode ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string Current text style Standard Text height 0 2000 Specify start point of text or Justify Style ...

Page 121: ...l attributes invisible ATTDISP on attribute ATTDISP off ATTEDIT Changes attribute information Modify menu Object Attribute Single Command line attedit Select block reference Select a block with attributes The Edit Attributes Dialog Box is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block Modify menu Object Attribute Global Command line attedit ATTDEF Command Line 97 ...

Page 122: ...of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block Edit the attribute values If the block contains additional attributes use Previous and Next to navigate through the list You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers To use a field as the value right click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field Dialog Box Next Displays the next eight attribute v...

Page 123: ...ification Press ENTER or enter a block name or a partial block name with wild card characters or to narrow the selection to specific blocks Enter attribute tag specification Press ENTER or enter a tag or a partial tag with wild card characters or to narrow the selection to specific attributes Enter attribute value specification Press ENTER or specify a value or a value name with wild card characte...

Page 124: ... aligned text For each of the options except Next ATTEDIT prompts for a new value The X remains on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute x on first attribute x on next attribute Value Changes or replaces an attribute value Enter type of value modification Change Replace Enter c or r or press ENTER Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value Enter string to change E...

Page 125: ...n changed Specify new text insertion point Specify a point or press ENTER If the attribute is aligned ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text baseline Height Changes the text height height changed Specify new height current Enter a value specify a point or press ENTER When you specify a point the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text Angle Chan...

Page 126: ... name or press ENTER Layer Changes the layer Enter new layer name current Enter a layer name or press ENTER Color Changes the color You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index a color name or number a true color or a color from a color book Enter new color Truecolor COlorbook BYLAYER Enter a color enter t enter co or press ENTER You can enter a color name a color number between 1 and 255 or...

Page 127: ... can edit any or all of the attributes Performing global editing of attribute values Edit only attributes visible on screen Yes No Y Enter y or press ENTER to edit only visible attributes or enter n to edit all attributes Yes Edits only visible attributes Enter block name specification Press ENTER or specify a block name or a partial block name with wild card characters or to narrow the selection ...

Page 128: ...ribute tags Enter attribute value specification Enter a full attribute value or a partial value with wild card characters or or press ENTER to select all attributes Attribute values are case sensitive To select empty null attributes which normally are not visible enter a backslash The attributes that match the specified block name attribute tag and attribute value are selected Enter string to chan...

Page 129: ...ate the fields of each record Single quotation marks enclose the character fields DXF Format Extract File DXX Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference attribute and end of sequence objects DXF format extraction requires no template The file name extension dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files Space Delimited File SDF Generat...

Page 130: ...Enter the path and file name for the extracted attribute data or choose Output File to search for existing template files using a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes The txt file name extension is appended for CDF or SDF files and the dxx file name extension for DXF files ATTEXT Command Line If you enter attext at the Command prompt ATTEXT displays prompts on the command line Enter extraction typ...

Page 131: ...ut file from normal DXF files In the Create Extract File dialog box enter the name for the output file The extract file s file name extension is dxx for DXF format Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract Select object Use an object selection method Enter attribute extraction type Cdf Sdf Dxf C Enter an option or press ENTER ATTREDEF Redefines a block and updates associated att...

Page 132: ... displayed and you are prompted to specify another block AUDIT Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors File menu Drawing Utilities Audit Command line audit Fix any errors detected Yes No N Enter y or n or press ENTER For easy access AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set However editing commands affect only the objects that belong t...

Page 133: ...line background The Background Dialog Box Background Dialog Box View menu Render Background Command line background Defines the type color effects and position of the background for your drawing Solid Selects a one color background Use the color controls to specify the color Background Dialog Box 109 ...

Page 134: ...p Displays the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box AutoCAD Background Uses the current background color Available only with a solid background This option is on by default Color Controls Controls whether the red green blue RGB color system or the hue lightness saturation HLS color system are used Select RGB to adjust the individual red green and blue components of the selected color Sele...

Page 135: ... select Image Only Top is available when you select Solid Use Background Specifies that the selected objects in the current drawing reflect the background you specify If you use an image file the objects reflect that image rather than the background image You can use the following file types for environment images BMP JPG PCX TGA and TIFF The program maps the environment onto a sphere surrounding ...

Page 136: ... The Offset Scale and Tiling controls all work the same as they do in the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box except that they apply to the background image instead of a mapped material image Offset and Scale refer to X Y coordinates not U V coordinates Offset and Scale Sets the offset and scale Offset values can range from 1 to 1 on either axis X or Y Adjust a value by using the scroll ba...

Page 137: ...ap is not centered within the drawing area when you render it During tiling the offset acts as a displacement not an absolute position However if you select Crop the bitmap is rendered only where you place it as indicated by the diagram enclosed by the inner box labeled Scale in the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box If the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle the b...

Page 138: ...th a linear polar or XY parameter Specifies that the selection set of objects will array when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference Specify selection set for action Select objects Select objects for the action s selection set If you selected a linear or polar parameter the following prompts are displayed Enter the distance between columns Enter a value for the distance between the c...

Page 139: ...point to associate with action or enter sTart point Second point Second Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects Select objects for the action s selection set Specify action location or Multiplier Offset XY Specify a location in the block definition for the action Multiplier C...

Page 140: ... or Base type XY Specify a location in the block definition for the action enter base type to specify the type of base point or enter xy to specify the distance type Base Type Specifies the type of base point to use for the action Enter base point type Dependent Independent Dependent Enter the type of base point for the action or press ENTER to use a dependent base point Dependent Specifies that t...

Page 141: ...r of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects Select objects to add to or remove from the action s selection set Specify action location or Multiplier Offset Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter the following prompts are displayed Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter sTart point Second point Xcorner Ycorne...

Page 142: ...ociate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify first corner of stretch frame or CPolygon Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects Select objects to add to the acti...

Page 143: ...alues separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the current location of the parameter s base point Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about a specified base point Specify base point location XY location of associated parameter s base point Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the location of the associated parameter s base point Flip Adds a...

Page 144: ...new selection set New If you selected a move scale rotate flip or array action the following prompt is displayed Specify selection set for action Select objects Select objects for the new selection set and then press ENTER If you selected a stretch action the following prompts are displayed Specify first corner of stretch frame or CPolygon Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpo...

Page 145: ... Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects to add to action set or Remove Select objects to add to or remove from the action s selection set Specify objects to rotate only Select objects to add to action set or Remove Select objects to add to or remove from the action s selection set that will rotate only and not stretch BACTIONTOOL Adds an action t...

Page 146: ...for the action Lookup Adds a lookup action to the current dynamic block definition A lookup action can only be associated with a lookup parameter When you add a lookup action to the block definition the Property Lookup Table Dialog Box on page 157 is displayed Select parameter Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify action location Specify a location in the ...

Page 147: ...llowing prompts are displayed Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter sTart point Second point Second Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects Select objects for the action s selection set Specify action location or Multiplier Offset XY Specify a location in ...

Page 148: ...k reference rotates about the associated parameter s base point Specify base point location current Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the current location of the parameter s base point Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about a specified base point Specify base point location XY location of associated parameter s base point Enter two values ...

Page 149: ...int of the parameter with which the scale action is associated An offset can be specified for the base point which is maintained relative to the parameter Specify base point location 0 0 Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select 0 0 Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference is scaled relative to an independent base point you specify An independent base point is sh...

Page 150: ...ayed Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter sTart point Second point Xcorner Ycorner Xcorner Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the X corner Specify first corner of stretch frame or CPolygon Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify ...

Page 151: ...pe as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects Select objects to add to or remove from the action s selection set Specify objects to rotate only Select objects Select objects that will rotate only and not stretch Specify action location or Multiplier Offset Specify a location in the block definition for the...

Page 152: ...at is not associated with a parameter Select parameter to associate with action Select a parameter to associate with the action if you selected a lookup action you can select one or more lookup parameters If you selected an action and parameter combination that requires that the action be associated with a key point on the parameter prompts are displayed to select the parameter point to associate ...

Page 153: ...anges you made but leaves the dialog box open Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes Select the block whose attributes you want to modify Blocks Found in Current Space The number of instances of the selected block in the current model space or layout Blocks Found in Drawing The number of instances of the selected block in the current drawing Edit Opens the Ed...

Page 154: ...k Settings Opens the Settings Dialog Box where you can customize how attribute information is listed in the Block Attribute Manager Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block Edit Attribute Dialog Box Modify menu Object Attribute Block Attribute Manager Command line battman Al...

Page 155: ... If selected hides the attribute value in the drawing area If cleared displays the attribute value Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value You cannot change this property If a check mark is shown in the check box the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed If the check box is empty you can assign a value to the attribute Verify Turns value verifica...

Page 156: ...ault values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified Height Specifies the height of the attribute text Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down...

Page 157: ...te text Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off Settings Dialog Box Modify menu Object Attribute Block Attribute Manager Command line battman Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager Apply Changes to Existing References Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances of the block whose attributes you ar...

Page 158: ...leared duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list Select All Selects all properties BATTORDER Specifies the order of attributes for a block Command line bedit battorder Displays the Attribute Order Dialog Box which controls the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor on p...

Page 159: ...itor Block Editor toolbar Command line bedit bauthorpalette Displays the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor You can open the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor If you enter bauthorpalette on the command line while the Block Editor is closed the following message is displayed BAUTHORPALETTE command only allowed in Block Editor The Block Authoring Palettes wi...

Page 160: ...UTHORPALETTECLOSE command only allowed in Block Editor BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor Shortcut menu In the Block Editor right click in the drawing area Click Close Block Editor Command line bedit bclose Closes the Block Editor If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved you are prompted to save or discard the changes BCYCLEORDER Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynami...

Page 161: ...int for the block reference Cycling Turns cycling on or off for the selected grip A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip Grip Cycling List Lists the grips in the dynamic block definition A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip Move Down Moves the selected grip down in the cycling order for the dynamic block ...

Page 162: ...Dialog Box Standard toolbar Tools menu Block Editor Command line bedit In the Edit Block Definition dialog box you can select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor You can also enter a name for a new block definition to create in the Block Editor When you click OK the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes and the Block Editor is displayed If y...

Page 163: ...ence in a drawing Name List Unlabeled Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing When you select a block definition from the list the name is displayed in the Name box When you click OK this block definition is opened in the Block Editor When you select Current Drawing the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor OK Opens the selected or new block definition in...

Page 164: ...ditor you add parameters and actions which define custom properties and dynamic behavior The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and edit geometry as you would in the drawing area The following commands are used for creating dynamic blocks and are available only in the Block Editor BACTION BACTIONSET BACTIONTOOL BASSOCIATE BATTORDER BAUTHORPALETTE BAUTHORPALETTECLO...

Page 165: ...ab Block Authoring Palettes Window on page 143 Actions Tab Block Authoring Palettes Window on page 145 Parameter Sets Tab Block Authoring Palettes Window on page 146 Block Editor Toolbar Provides tools for working in the Block Editor creating dynamic blocks and working with visibility states Edit or Create Block Definition Displays the Edit Block Definition Dialog Box Save Block Definition Saves t...

Page 166: ...and Action Text Size Runs the REGEN command which regenerates the display in the Block Editor and updates the text arrowhead icon and grips sizes of parameters and actions When you zoom in and out in the Block Editor the text arrowhead icon and grip size changes relative to the zoom factor When you regenerate the display in the Block Editor text arrowheads icons and grips display at their specifie...

Page 167: ...ommand Point parameter option which adds a point parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference A point parameter defines an X and Y location in the drawing In the Block Editor a point parameter looks similar to an ordinate dimension Linear Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command Linear parameter option which adds a linear parameter to the dyn...

Page 168: ...ignment parameter allows the block reference to automatically rotate around a point to align with other objects in the drawing An alignment parameter affects the angle property of the block reference In the Block Editor an alignment parameter looks like an alignment line Flip Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command Flip parameter option which adds a flip parameter to the dynamic block definition and...

Page 169: ...the Block Editor Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing You associate actions with parameters Move Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command Move action option which adds a move action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a point linear polar or XY paramete...

Page 170: ...dynamic block reference about a specified axis called a reflection line Array Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command Array action which adds an array action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a linear polar or XY parameter An array action causes its associated objects to copy and array in a rectangular pattern when the associated parameter is edited through a grip or t...

Page 171: ...nd Linear parameter option with one grip specified which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition Automatically adds an array action associated with the linear parameter Linear Move Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command Linear parameter option with two grips specified which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition Automatically adds a two move action one associated with th...

Page 172: ...ameter option with two grips specified which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition Automatically adds two stretch actions one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar parameter XY Move Runs the BPARAMETER command XY parameter option with one grip specified which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition Automatically adds a move a...

Page 173: ...tion with one grip specified which adds a flip parameter to the dynamic block definition Automatically adds a flip action associated with the flip parameter Visibility Set Runs the BPARAMETER command Visibility parameter option with one grip specified which adds a visibility parameter to the dynamic block definition and allows visibility states to be defined No action is necessary with the visibil...

Page 174: ...he Block Editor on page 139 Select parameter Select a parameter in the current dynamic block definition Enter number of grip objects for parameter or reset position 0 1 2 4 Reposition Enter the number of grips to display for the parameter the number of grips available will vary depending on the type of parameter you selected or enter reposition to reposition the existing grips in the block definit...

Page 175: ...REGEN ZOOM PAN or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing BLOCK Creates a block definition from objects you select Draw toolbar Draw menu Block Make Command line block The Block Definition Dialog Box is displayed If you enter block at the Command prompt BLOCK displays BLOCK Command Line Block Definition Dialog Box Draw menu Block Make Command line block Defines and names a block Block...

Page 176: ... EXTNAMES is set to 1 The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing NOTE You cannot use DIRECT LIGHT AVE_RENDER RM_SDB SH_SPOT and OVERHEAD as valid block names Base Point Specifies an insertion base point for the block The default value is 0 0 0 Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded Block Unit Specifies the insertion units for the block refe...

Page 177: ...orarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing Quick Select Displays the Quick Select Dialog Box which defines a selection set Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non uniformly scaled Select Objects ...

Page 178: ... block The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters numbers blank spaces and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1 If you enter the name of an existing block you are prompted as follows Block NAME already exists Redefine it Yes No N Enter y or n or press ENTER By redefining a block you au...

Page 179: ...lected objects from the drawing You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command immediately after BLOCK objects selected as a block The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block s coordinate system which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block When you insert the block into a drawing its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current...

Page 180: ...se You can enter a series of comma delimited block names or wild card characters For example enter b1 2 to specify that block B1 and all two character blocks ending with 2 should be updated After you enter the block names a message is displayed describing the process as it proceeds Press ESC at any time to stop BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition Command ...

Page 181: ...based on how it is manipulated in a drawing If Reverse Lookup is selected for a lookup property the block reference displays a lookup grip When the lookup grip is clicked in a drawing a list of lookup properties is displayed Selecting an option from that list will change the display of the dynamic block reference Action Name Displays the name of the lookup action associated with the table Add Prop...

Page 182: ...r s value matches a value in its corresponding input property column in the lookup table the corresponding lookup property on the right side of the table is assigned to the block reference The drop down control at the bottom of a lookup column is used to make the lookup property read only or to allow reverse lookup If all the rows in the table are unique you can set the lookup property to allow re...

Page 183: ...s the available input property parameters that can be added to the lookup table Add Lookup Properties When selected the Parameter Properties list displays the available lookup property parameters that can be added to the lookup table BMPOUT Saves selected objects to a file in device independent bitmap format Command line bmpout The Create Raster File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Box...

Page 184: ...mpts are displayed on the command line BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area Draw menu Boundary Command line boundary The Boundary Creation Dialog Box is displayed If you enter boundary at the Command prompt BOUNDARY displays BOUNDARY Command Line Boundary Creation Dialog Box Draw menu Boundary Command line boundary Defines the object type boundary set and island detection ...

Page 185: ...electing this option discards any current boundary set New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set BOUNDARY includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline when it constructs the new boundary set For more information about the options in this dialog box see HATCH BOUNDARY Command Line If you enter boundary at the Command prompt BOUNDARY displ...

Page 186: ...land detection on the command line see the HATCH command line option Object Type Specifies the type of object that BOUNDARY creates Enter type of boundary object Region Polyline current Enter an option or press ENTER BOX Creates a three dimensional solid box Solids toolbar Draw menu Solids Box Command line box Once you create a box you cannot stretch it or change its size However you can extrude t...

Page 187: ...t UCS Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis height Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length Specify length Specify a distance Entering a positive value draws the length along the positive X Y and Z axes of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the length along the negative X Y and Z axes length BOUNDARY Command Line 163 ...

Page 188: ...rrent UCS Entering a negative value draws the length width or height along the negative X Y and Z axes width length height Center Creates the box by using a specified center point 1 Specify center of box 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER Specify corner or Cube Length Specify a point or enter an option Corner Specifies a point for the corner of the box Specify height Specify a distance Enterin...

Page 189: ...The length corresponds to the X axis the width to the Y axis and the height to the Z axis Specify length Specify a distance Specify width Specify a distance Specify height Specify a distance width length height Entering a positive value draws the length width or height along the positive X Y and Z axes of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the length width or height along the negative...

Page 190: ...ment parameter allows the block reference to automatically rotate around a point to align with other objects in the drawing An alignment parameter affects the angle property of the block reference Specify base point of alignment or Name Specify a point or enter name When you specify the base point for the alignment parameter an X is displayed in the Block Editor When the command is completed an al...

Page 191: ...c block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference You associate a move or stretch action with a point parameter Specify parameter location or Name Label Chain Description Palette Specify a location or enter an option Specify label location Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips 0 1 1 Specify the number of grips for the parameter Name Specifi...

Page 192: ...ct the parameter in the Block Editor In a drawing when you select the custom property name parameter label for the block reference in the Properties palette the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette Enter property description Enter a description for the parameter Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block re...

Page 193: ... change in the values of other parameters included in the action s selection set If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes this change triggers any actions associated with the linear parameter just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property If the Chain Actions property is set to No the linear parameter s associated actions are not triggered by th...

Page 194: ...ference is selected in a drawing Display property in Properties palette Yes No Yes Enter n or press ENTER Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set Enter distance value set type None List Increment None Specify a value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a l...

Page 195: ...fault Enter a label for the distance property or press ENTER to use the default label Enter angle property label default Enter a label for the angle property or press ENTER to use the default label Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter The polar parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter When that parameter is ed...

Page 196: ...ss ENTER to specify no value set type Enter angle value set type None List Increment None Specify an angle value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference Enter list of distance values separated by commas Enter list of angle values separated by commas Increment Specifies a value increment and minimum and ma...

Page 197: ...block reference in a drawing In the Block Editor the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter Enter horizontal distance property label default Enter a label for the horizontal distance property or press ENTER to use the default label Enter vertical distance property label default Enter a label for the vertical distance property or press ENTER to use the default label Chain Specifies the ...

Page 198: ...Properties palette Yes No Yes Enter n or press ENTER Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set Enter horizontal value set type None List Increment None Specify a value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type Enter vertical value set type None List Increment None Specify a valu...

Page 199: ... Label Specifies the parameter label which defines the custom property name added to the block The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing In the Block Editor the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter Enter rotation property label default Enter a label for the rotation property or press ENTER to use t...

Page 200: ...lue set for the parameter Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set Enter angle value set type None List Increment None Specify an angle value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference Enter list of angle values separated by commas Increment Specif...

Page 201: ...bel for the flip property or press ENTER to use the default label Specify values for items in the flip property dropdown control Enter flip property value for an unflipped state Not Flipped Enter a property value to display when the parameter is unflipped or press ENTER to use the default label Enter flipped property value for a flipped state Flipped Enter a property value to display when the para...

Page 202: ...the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing In the Block Editor the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter Enter visibility property label default Enter a label for the visibility property or press ENTER to use the default label Description Specifies the description for the custom property name parameter label This description is display...

Page 203: ...layed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing In the Block Editor the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter Enter lookup property label default Enter a label for the lookup property or press ENTER to use the default label Description Specifies the description for the custom property name parameter label This description is displa...

Page 204: ...ak point 2 or enter f First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify Specify first break point Specify second break point before break after break 1 2 Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify If the second point is not on the object the nearest point on th...

Page 205: ...toolbar Command line browser Enter Web location URL current Press ENTER or enter a new locatio n you don t need to enter http before the location Pressing ENTER displays your web browser which automatically connects to the location you specify Because BROWSER does not append http to web locations you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser NOTE BROWSER requires that you hav...

Page 206: ...definition under a new name Block Editor toolbar Command line bedit bsaveas Displays the Save Block As Dialog Box on page 182 You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 139 Save Block As Dialog Box Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing 182 Chapter 4 ...

Page 207: ...ity Hide for Current State or click Object Visibility Hide for All States Command line bedit bvhide Allows you to make objects invisible for the current visibility state You can only use the BVHIDE command in the Block Editor on page 139 Select objects to hide Select objects to hide for the current visibility state or all visibility states Hide for current state or all visibility states Current Al...

Page 208: ...ke the selected objects visible for the current visibility state or enter all to make the selected objects visible for all visibility states in the block definition BVSTATE Creates sets or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block Command line bedit bvstate Displays the Visibility States Dialog Box on page 184You can only use the BVSTATE command in the Block Editor on page 139 after a visibili...

Page 209: ... Editor Does not change the default visibility state that is displayed when the block is inserted in a drawing nor does it change the displayed visibility state for block references already inserted and edited in the drawing Visibility States Lists the available visibility states for the current dynamic block definition The order of this list is reflected in the dynamic block reference when the gr...

Page 210: ...in the current visibility state on which the new state is based OK Creates a new visibility state Show All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state Visibility Options for New States Displays options for the new visibility state Visibility State Name Specifies the name for the new visibility state BVSTATE Command Line...

Page 211: ...n in the new visibility state Show All Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state Current Visibility Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based Set Specifies the visibility state to set as current Enter visibility state name to make current...

Page 212: ...188 ...

Page 213: ...points vectors or numbers Understand Syntax of Expressions CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence Expressions in parentheses first starting with the innermost set Operators in standard order exponents first multiplication and division second and addition and subtraction last Operators of equal precedence from left to right Numeric Expressions Numeric expre...

Page 214: ...subtracts vectors points a b c x y z a x b y c z The following are examples of vector expressions A 1 2 3 provides the point positioned 1 2 3 units relative to point A The expression 2 45 45 2 45 0 1 02 3 5 2 adds two points and subtracts a third point The first two points are in spherical coordinates Format Feet and Inches Enter feet and inches using the following format feet inches or feet inche...

Page 215: ...es seconds You must enter 0d when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree minutes and seconds only You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians Enter a number followed by g to enter angles in grads The following examples show ways of entering angles 5d10 20 0d10 20 124 6r 14g Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal ...

Page 216: ...or vector coordinate values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket The following are valid points 1 2 is the same as 1 2 0 3 is the same as 0 0 3 is the same as 0 0 0 In the following example the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the WCS The distance is 1 2 3 the angles are 10 20 30 degrees and 45 degrees 20 minutes 1 2 10 20 45d20 Th...

Page 217: ...ual sign Later you can use the value of this variable for other calculations This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1 and R1 Command cal Expression P1 cen 1 0 Select entity for CEN snap Select a circle or an arc Command cal Expression R1 dist end end 3 Select entity for END snap Select an object with an endpoint This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1 C...

Page 218: ...meters cvunit 1 inch cm Use Standard Numeric Functions CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table Numeric functions Description Function Sine of the angle sin angle Cosine of the angle cos angle Tangent of the angle tang angle Arcsine of the number the number must be between 1 and 1 asin real Arccosine of the number the number must be between 1 and 1 acos real Arctangent of...

Page 219: ...ector from point p1 to point p2 vec1 p1 p2 Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2 The following example uses CAL to move selected objects 3 units in the direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected circle Command move Select objects Specify base point or displacement cal Expression 3 vec1 cen cen Select entity for CEN snap Specify a circle or an ar...

Page 220: ...oint b positioned 5 units away from point a under the angle of 20 degrees Note that 5 20 is a vector in polar coordinates a 5 20 vec a b vec1 a b L vec1 a b a v a b a b a b a b v a a 5 20 Calculate the Length of a Vector The abs function calculates the length of a vector abs v Calculates the length of vector v a nonnegative real number In spherical coordinates dist ang ang the dist is the length o...

Page 221: ... a circle or an arc Specify next point or Close Undo cal Expression 3 vec1 cen cen The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first point The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle to the center of the second selected circle Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Ex...

Page 222: ...of the selected object Using the Midpoint Snap mode in the following example CAL prompts for an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of the selected object mid 1 The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid of a triangle defined by three endpoints end end end 3 Convert Points Between UCS and WCS Normally the program assumes all coord...

Page 223: ...ents are set to 0 0 xof p1 Y component of a point X and Z components are set to 0 0 yof p1 Z component of a point X and Y components are set to 0 0 zof p1 X component of a point rxof p1 Y component of a point ryof p1 Z component of a point rzof p1 The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates zof 2 45 45 The following example provides a point whose X ...

Page 224: ...t is p1 If t 0 5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2 If t 1 the point is p2 Rotate a Point About an Axis The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point rot p AxP1 AxP2 ang Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2 as shown in the following example The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point ang...

Page 225: ...ensional ilp p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Determines the intersection point between a line p1 p2 and a plane passing through three points p3 p4 p5 Calculate a Distance dist p1 p2 Determines the distance between two points p1 and p2 This is the same as the vector expression abs p1 p2 dist p1 p2 Determines the distance between two points p1 and p2 This is the same as the vector expression abs p1 p2 Obtain an Inte...

Page 226: ...distance between the point 3 2 4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints dpp 3 2 4 end end end dpl p p1 p2 Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2 shortest distance p1 p2 p 90x dpp p p1 p2 p3 Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined by three points p1 p2 p3 202 Chapter 5 ...

Page 227: ...or polyline segment for RAD function Select the circle arc new circle center Obtain an Angle The ang function determines the angle between two lines Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis in the two dimensional case or to a user specified axis in the three dimensional case ang apex p1 p2 Determines the angle between lines apex p1 and apex p2 The points are considere...

Page 228: ...le between the X axis and vector v The vector v is considered 2D projected on the XY plane of the current UCS The following examples show how angles are measured ang v ang p1 p2 ang p1 p2 ang apex p1 p2 p apex apex p1 p2 p2 p1 p p2 p1 v Y X X Y You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function as shown in the following example Command cal 204 Chapter 5 ...

Page 229: ... selected object nor p1 p2 Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1 p2 The line is oriented from p1 to p2 The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left from the original line p1 p2 nor p1 p2 p3 Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by the three points p1 p2 and p3 The orientation of the normal vector is such that the given points go counterclockwise wit...

Page 230: ...ot distort the object by the parallel projection Command vpoint Current view direction VIEWDIR current Specify a view point or Rotate display compass and tripod cal Expression nor Select circle arc or polyline for NOR function Use Shortcut Functions The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode 206 Chapter 5 ...

Page 231: ...t t end end pltee t Vector from two endpoints vec end end vee Unit vector from two endpoints vec1 end end vee1 CAMERA Sets the camera and target location to change the view of objects View toolbar Command line camera Current camera position is current Current camera target is current Specify new camera position current Enter a value or specify a point Sets the point from which you view the objects...

Page 232: ...u Chamfer Command line chamfer TRIM mode Current chamfer Dist1 current Dist2 current Select First Line on page 208 or Undo Polyline Distance Angle Trim Method Multiple Use an object selection method or enter an option First Line Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer or the edge of a 3D solid to chamfer 208 Chapter 5 ...

Page 233: ...an edge on a 3D solid you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface Base surface selection Enter surface selection option Next OK current OK Enter n or o or press ENTER Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge Specify base surface chamfer distance...

Page 234: ...Edge Select an edge enter e or press ENTER Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface chamfered edge loop edge loop selected selecting edge loop Edge Switches to Edge mode Undo Reverses the previous action in the command Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline Select 2D polyline 210 Chapter 5 ...

Page 235: ... the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge Specify first chamfer distance current Specify second chamfer distance current equal distances unequal distances If you set both distances to zero CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line Specify chamfer length...

Page 236: ...ms them so that they do If TRIMMODE is set to 0 the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines Method Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer Enter trim method Distance Angle current Multiple Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects CHAMFER displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you pr...

Page 237: ...ult depends on the type of objects you select Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change point to the new point unless Ortho mode is on If Ortho mode is on the selected lines are modified so that they become parallel to either the X or the Y axis their endpoints are not moved to the specified coordinate 2 1 2 1 Ortho on Ortho off Circles Changes the circle radiu...

Page 238: ...repositions the text Pressing ENTER leaves the text at its original position Enter new text style current If the text has a fixed height the height prompt is not displayed Specify new height current Specify new rotation angle current Enter new tag current Enter new prompt current Enter new default value current Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block Specify new block insertion point Sp...

Page 239: ...u enter bylayer the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located If you enter byblock the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be...

Page 240: ... linetype Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects Specify new linetype scale current Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects Lineweight values are predefined values If you enter a value that is not a predefined value the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects Enter new lineweight current Thickness Changes the Z direction thickness...

Page 241: ...signated plot style Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden by other plot style assignments List Plot Styles Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing CHECKSTANDARDS Checks the current drawing for standards violations CAD Standards toolbar Tools menu CAD Standards Check Command line checkstandards The Check Standards Dialog Box is displayed Check Standards Dialog Box Tools me...

Page 242: ...ecked Next Problem Advances to the next nonstandard object in the current drawing without applying a fix Preview of Changes Indicates the properties of the nonstandard object that will be changed if the fix currently selected in the Replace With list is applied Problem Provides a description of a nonstandard object in the current drawing To fix a problem select a replacement from the Replace With ...

Page 243: ...ayer or byblock or press ENTER For example to change a color to red enter red or 1 If you enter bylayer the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located If you enter byblock the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by co...

Page 244: ...s are predefined values If you enter a value that is not a predefined value the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects Enter new lineweight current Thickness Changes the Z direction thickness of 2D objects Specify new thickness current Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline dimension or layout viewport object has no effect Plotstyle Changes the plot style of the selecte...

Page 245: ...raw menu Circle Command line circle Specify Center Point on page 221 for circle or 3P Three Points 2P Two Points TTR Tangent Tangent Radius Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius Specify radius of circle or Diameter Specify a point enter a value enter d or press ENTER Radius Defines the radius of the circle Enter a value or...

Page 246: ...le based on three points on the circumference Specify first point on circle Specify a point 1 Specify second point on circle Specify a point 2 Specify third point on circle Specify a point 3 3P 3 2 1 2P Two Points Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter Specify first endpoint of circle s diameter Specify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of circle s diameter Specify a point 2 2P 1 2 ...

Page 247: ... draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows excluding the command line View menu Clean Screen Command line cleanscreenon The screen displays only the menu bar the Model and layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing the status bar and the command line Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore d...

Page 248: ...g is closed If you modified the drawing since it was last saved you are prompted to save or discard the changes You can close a file that has been opened in read only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes To save changes to a read only file you must use the SAVEAS command CLOSEALL Closes all currently open drawings Window menu Close All Command line closeall All...

Page 249: ...ifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors AutoCAD Color Index ACI Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index If you hover over a color the number of the color and its red green blue value are displayed below the palette Click a color to select it or enter the color number or name in the Color box The large palette displays colors 10 through 249 The second palet...

Page 250: ...olor Swatch Displays the previously selected color New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color True Color Tab Select Color Dialog Box Specifies color settings using true colors 24 bit color with either the Hue Saturation and Luminance HSL color model or the Red Green and Blue RGB color model Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality The options availa...

Page 251: ...ing this value affects the RGB value Valid hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees Luminance Specifies the brightness of a color To specify color luminance use the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box Valid luminance values are from 0 to 100 A value of 0 represents the color black 100 represents white and 50 represents the optimal brightness for the color Adjusting this value also aff...

Page 252: ...Swatch Displays the previously selected color New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color Color Books Tab Select Color Dialog Box Specifies colors using third party color books such as PANTONE or user defined color books Once a color book is selected the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors The ...

Page 253: ...color from the AutoCAD Color Index a color name or number a true color or a color from a color book You can enter the color number 1 through 255 or the color name the names for the first seven colors For example you can specify the color red by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red You can also enter bylayer or byblock If you enter byblock all new objects are drawn in the default color whi...

Page 254: ...ed to enter the color name in the color book Enter color name Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as Pantone 573 COMMANDLINE Displays the command line Tools menu Command Line Command line commandline Displays the command window when it has been hidden COMMANDLINEHIDE Hides the command line Tools menu Command Line Command line commandlinehide Hides the command window ...

Page 255: ...point Solids toolbar Draw menu Solids Cone Command line cone Current wire frame density ISOLINES current Specify Center Point for Base of cone or Elliptical on page 233 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 enter e or press ENTER 1 Center Point for Base Defines the center of the circular base of the cone Specify radius for base of cone or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d Radius for Base Defines the radius...

Page 256: ...ecify apex point Diameter Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cone Specify diameter for base of cone Specify a distance Specify height of cone or Apex Specify a distance or enter a 2 diameter Height Defines the height of the cone Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis ...

Page 257: ...pecify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone Specify a point 2 Specify length of other axis for base of cone Specify a point 3 Specify height of cone or Apex Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis 2 3 he...

Page 258: ...r axis for base of cone Specify a point 3 Specify height of cone or Apex Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis 2 3 1 height Apex Specifies the apex which defines the height and orientation of the cone with respect...

Page 259: ...on preference Select All All Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing Enter object selection preference Select All All Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing One or both of the following messages are displayed number hatch objects converted number ...

Page 260: ... which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot styles The original color dependent plot style table is not affected by CONVERTCTB The default location for the new named plot style table file is in the Plot Styles folder The default name for the new named plot style table file is the same as the color dependent plot style table name CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color...

Page 261: ...onvert a drawing CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system variable to the appropriate setting 1 named 0 color dependent For example a drawing using color dependent plot styles assigns plot properties to objects and layers by color In other words all objects with the same color have the same plot properties CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects...

Page 262: ...tyles to drawing objects Converting Drawings from Named to Color Dependent Plot Styles A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached After a drawing is converted to color dependent plot styles you can assign a color dependent plot style table Plot styles will be applied by color COPY Copies o...

Page 263: ...ve commands right click in the drawing area and choose Copy with Base Point Command line copybase Specify base point Select objects The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE it is placed relative to the specified base point COPYC...

Page 264: ...rd Command line copyhist The text is copied to the Clipboard COPYLINK Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications Edit menu Copy Link Command line copylink COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object CUI Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces toolbars menus s...

Page 265: ...nsfer Tab Customize User Interface Dialog Box Transfers user interface elements to or from a main or partial customization CUI file where your interface element data is stored You open a CUI MNS or MNU file to import or export user interface data When you open MNU or MNS files they are automatically converted to a CUI file format The original MNU or MNS files are not modified Customize User Interf...

Page 266: ...ays the main CUI file in the left pane You open another CUI or MNU file in the right pane to transfer data Customize Tab Customize User Interface Dialog Box Provides an interface for customizing workspaces toolbars menus shortcut menus and other user interface elements Customizations In Pane Displays a tree structure of user interface elements that can be customized such as workspaces toolbars men...

Page 267: ... or hide in the tree view Button Image Displays the toolbar buttons of all toolbars loaded in the program You can edit the toolbar button change its properties and create a new toolbar button Categories Displays filters for the command list including All Commands ACAD Commands User Defined or Control Commands You can also filter the list to display commands within specific menu General Displays th...

Page 268: ...properties and create or edit a button Properties Displays the properties of user interface elements or items selected in the tree view Elements or items that display properties include specific menus menu commands toolbars and toolbar buttons Shortcuts Displays a list of shortcut key names and temporary override names their corresponding shortcut key combinations keyboard shortcut type shortcut k...

Page 269: ...menu Customize Interface Shortcut menu Right click any toolbar and click Customize Command line cui Modifies or creates buttons Button Image Displays the button at its actual size Editing Tools Provides tools for editing a button image Circle Creates circles using the current color Click to set the center and drag to set the radius Release to complete the circle Button Editor Dialog Box 245 ...

Page 270: ... the True Color tab in the Select Color dialog box If you select a true color it is displayed in the color swatch Editing Area Provides a close up view of the button image for editing Grid Displays a grid in the editing area Each grid square represents a single pixel Clear Clears the editing area Open Opens an existing button image for editing Button images are stored as bitmap BMP files Undo Undo...

Page 271: ...s LISP files mouse buttons and legacy user interface elements tablet menus tablet buttons image tile menus and so on that are part of a selected CUI file Find and Replace Dialog Box Tools menu Customize Interface Command line cui Locates and replaces commands or command properties command names descriptions or macros Find Tab Find and Replace Dialog Box Replace Tab Find and Replace Dialog Box Find...

Page 272: ...iew that references the selected command Find What Displays the search string you want to locate If you select a command in the Command List pane this box displays that string You can also enter a string Any previous strings entered in this box are stored in the drop down list Ignore Case Locates all commands or command properties regardless of their case for example the program would search for b...

Page 273: ...plays that string You can also enter a string Any previous strings entered in this box are stored in the drop down list Ignore Case Locates all commands or command properties regardless of their case for example the program would replace both LINE and line Replace Replaces a single instance of the search string In the Customize User Interface dialog box the location of the search string is display...

Page 274: ...r Click Apply to save the changes and view the updated CUI file CUIIMPORT Imports customized settings from an enterprise or partial CUI file to acad cui Tools menu Customize Import Customizations Command line cuiimport Opens with the Transfer Tab Customize User Interface Dialog Box on page 241 opened by default You can drag items from one CUI file to the other Click Apply to save the changes and v...

Page 275: ...for customizing tool palettes and block authoring palettes Creates modifies and organizes palettes Imports and exports palette files Current Palette Group Displays the name of the palette group currently shown Displays All Palettes when all available palettes are shown Palette Groups Displays the organization of your palettes in a tree view Click and drag a palette to move it into another group Ri...

Page 276: ...ng Standard toolbar Edit menu Cut Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Cut Command line cutclip Select objects CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard removing them from the drawing You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC CUTCLIP does not create OLE link info...

Page 277: ...cify height of cylinder or Center of other end Specify a distance or enter c Height Defines the height of the cylinder Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative Z axis Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder Specify center of other end of cylinder Spec...

Page 278: ...positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder Specify center of other end of cylinder Specify a point 2 Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the Z orientation of the cylinder 2 diameter height Elliptical C...

Page 279: ...inder or Center of other end Specify a distance or enter c Height Defines the height of the cylinder Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder Specify center of other end of cylinder Specify a distance 4 or ...

Page 280: ...cify a distance 4 or enter c 4 2 3 1 Height Defines the height of the cylinder Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder Specify center of other end of cylinder Specify a point 4 4 height 256 Chapter 5 ...

Page 281: ...og box are described first followed by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order The Column Values dialog box a sub dialog box of the Query Editor is described in the Query Editor section The section describing each dialog box contains a list of methods that you can use to access it dbConnect Manager on page 258 Data View Window on page 264 Query Editor on page 275...

Page 282: ...late Dialog Box on page 302 New Link Template Dialog Box on page 303 New Query Dialog Box on page 304 Replace Dialog Box on page 305 Select a Database Object Dialog Box on page 306 Select Data Object Dialog Box on page 306 Sort Dialog Box on page 307 Synchronize Dialog Box on page 307 dbConnect Manager Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature You can view and edit database table...

Page 283: ...and manipulate database objects View Table Opens an external database table in Read only mode This button is not available unless a single table link template or label template is selected in the tree view Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode This button is not available unless a single table link template or label template is selected in the tree view Execute Query Executes a ...

Page 284: ...ox This button is not available unless a single table link template or label template is selected If a label template is selected you can use this button to display the Label Template Dialog Box in which you can edit the label template dbConnect Manager Tree View Contains nodes for each drawing that s currently open and a Data Sources node that contains all available data sources configured on you...

Page 285: ...ons available for database objects such as link templates label templates and queries attached to the drawing nodes Different database objects have different subsets of menu options available to them For example the shortcut menu options that are displayed when you right click a query differ from the options that are available when you right click a link template The following shortcut menu option...

Page 286: ...r link templates Link Select Opens the Link Select Dialog Box Available only for link templates New Label Template Opens the New Label Template Dialog Box Available only for link templates Show Labels Displays all labels that are associated with the selected database object Available for link templates and label templates Hide Labels Hides all labels that are associated with the selected database ...

Page 287: ...nks in the current drawing that use the selected link template Available only for link templates Data Sources Node Shortcut Menu Provides options available for data sources Right click the data sources node Configure Data Source Opens the Configure a Data Source Dialog Box where you can configure a new data source or edit an existing one Data Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for da...

Page 288: ...y for database tables New Label Template Opens the New Label Template Dialog Box Available only for database tables New Query Opens the New Query Dialog Box Available only for database tables Data View Window Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database tables from within the program You can open this dialog box using the following methods dbConnect Manager buttons Sele...

Page 289: ...ter you open the Data View window the Data View menu is added to the menu bar By default the Data View is opened undocked with the Allow Docking option turned off To enable docking right click one of the Data View buttons and then choose Allow Docking from the shortcut menu The appearance of the Data View window is governed by your computer s system settings and it can be changed in the Windows Co...

Page 290: ... If the current drawing does not have a current selection set you are prompted to select objects to link to Create Freestanding Label Creates a freestanding label that isn t associated with a graphical object You are prompted to specify an insertion point for the label Create Attached Label Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and creates a corresponding label If the current drawing has...

Page 291: ...g Print Data View Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Microsoft Windows system printer Data View and Query Options Opens the Data View and Query Options Dialog Box in which you can specify a number of settings that affect the interaction and display of linked objects in the Data View window and the current drawing Query Return to Query and Return to Link Select Opens either ...

Page 292: ... applied when you create new labels in the current drawing To create a new label template select the New Label Template option from the Label Template list and choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout If there is no link template defined for the selected database table in the current drawing the New Link Template Dialog Box is displayed Data View Grid ...

Page 293: ... bar Available only if the selected columns are contiguous Unfreeze All Unfreezes all frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar Available only if you have frozen one or more columns Align Aligns the current column Standard right aligns numeric fields and left aligns all others Left left aligns the column cells Center center aligns the cells and Right right aligns th...

Page 294: ...ink creation mode You can specify whether a link a freestanding label or an attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu option is chosen Find Opens the Find Dialog Box which you can use to search for a specific value The Find shortcut menu option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell Replace Opens the Replace Dialog Box which you can use...

Page 295: ... objects The link and if desired the label from the currently selected link and label templates are created in the Data View window You can specify whether a link a freestanding label or an attached label is created by choosing the Link and Label Settings shortcut menu option Link and Label Settings Lists the currently selected link creation mode You can specify whether a link a freestanding label...

Page 296: ...ata View window Available only when a database table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values Unhide All Columns Restores any hidden columns to the Data View window display Unfreeze All Columns Unfreezes any frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar Clear All Marks Clears all record selection marks from the Data View window Print Preview Opens the Print P...

Page 297: ...rint Preview Window Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table appears when you print it When the Data View window is in Preview mode none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation buttons are removed from the bottom of the window You can open this dialog box using the following methods Data View menu Print Preview Shortcut menu Right click the ...

Page 298: ... Toggles the display between one and two preview pages If you choose Two Page the name of the button changes to One Page and vice versa Zoom In Magnifies the preview page so that you can view the details more closely Zoom Out Shrinks the preview page to display a larger region of the database table Close Closes the Data View Print Preview window and restores the default Data View window display 27...

Page 299: ...w window dbConnect menu Queries New Query on an External Table New Query on a Link Template or Edit Query Displays a dialog box in which you can select a database object to query Shortcut menu Right click a database table or link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query or right click a query and choose Edit Quick Query Tab Query Editor on page 275 Range Query Tab Query Editor on pag...

Page 300: ...to the query Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current drawing Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View Window Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values Dialog Box from which you can select the value you want 276 ...

Page 301: ...Options Dialog Box Store Saves the query with the current drawing Value Specifies a value for the field that you are using to construct your query Range Query Tab Query Editor Constructs a query that returns all records or objects that fall within a given range of values Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box Query Editor 2...

Page 302: ... Look Up Values From Through Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values Dialog Box from which you can select the value you want Options Opens the Data View and Query Options Dialog Box Store Saves the query with the current drawing Through Specifies the second value of the range The query returns all records or graphical objects that are less ...

Page 303: ... cell Logical Provides either an And or an Or operator to the query statement Click in the Logical cell to add an And value To change the value to Or click in the Logical cell again Operator Provides a space where you can select an operator to apply to the query condition of the current row Double click in the Operator cell to display a list of operators that you can use in constructing your query...

Page 304: ...lds and Sort By areas Show Fields Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View Window when the query is executed To remove a field from this list drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab Add Show Fields Adds a field to include in the Data View Window display of the returned query To add a field select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add Sort By S...

Page 305: ...and closes the dialog box Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query Store Saves the query with the current drawing Options Opens the Data View and Query Options Dialog Box SQL Query Tab Query Editor Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type a free form SQL statement and a set of tools...

Page 306: ...editor Add Operator Adds the selected operator to the SQL text editor Add Table Adds the currently selected database table to the SQL text editor Add Values Adds the value specified in the Values area to the SQL text editor Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without actually executing it This function helps you isolate syntax errors before you issue your query Close Closes the dialog bo...

Page 307: ...View Window Operator Displays a list of operators that you can apply to your query Options Opens the Data View and Query Options Dialog Box SQL Text Editor Provides a space for you to type a free form SQL query or add elements that you select using the various SQL Query tools Store Saves the query with the current drawing Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current data sourc...

Page 308: ... refer to Configure External Databases in the Driver and Peripheral Guide You can open this dialog box using the following methods dbConnect menu Data Sources Configure Shortcut menu Right click the Data Sources node and choose Configure Data Source Data Source Name Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you are configuring Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use wi...

Page 309: ...iew Window indicates a new set of records each time you select a new set of graphical objects Accumulate Selection Set in Drawing Adds additional objects to the selection set as you select additional Data View records If this option is cleared the current drawing indicates a new set of objects each time you select a new set of Data View records Automatically Pan Drawing Pans the drawing automatica...

Page 310: ...nt selection set are selected in the Data View window Show Only Indicated Records Displays in the Data View window only the record set that is associated with the current selection set Any records not linked to the current drawing selection set are not displayed Zoom Factor Specifies a zoom factor that limits the size of the extents of the indicated object set to a defined percentage of the drawin...

Page 311: ... select a link template whose links you want to export File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file Include Fields Specifies the database table fields to export The key fields for the selected link template are included automatically The handle of the object that each link is associated with is also exported Link Template Name Displays the name of the link template whose links you re expo...

Page 312: ...emplates that are associated with the current drawing You can open this dialog box using the following methods dbConnect menu Templates Export Template Set Shortcut menu In the dbConnect Manager right click the drawing node of a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export Template Set File Name Specifies a name for the template set Save as Type Specifies the file format for th...

Page 313: ...e regardless of case Format Dialog Box Controls how database table records are displayed in the Data View Window You can open this dialog box using the following methods Data View menu Format The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window Shortcut menu Right click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Format Effects Applies add...

Page 314: ...Query Set Shortcut menu Right click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and choose Import Query Set File Name Specifies the name of the query set to import Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that you re importing Query sets always have the dbq extension Look In Specifies the directory where the query set is located Import Template Set Dialog Box Imports a set of link t...

Page 315: ...e button If a label template is selected the program opens the Label Template dialog box without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box Data View buttons Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout If there is no link template defined for the selected database table in the current...

Page 316: ... are set to 1 indicating that the label text is offset 1 unit in the X and Y planes from the tip of the leader object The Leader Offset settings apply only to attached labels Start Specifies the start point for the leader object The point is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical object that the label is attached to The Start option has no effect on freestanding labels as they have n...

Page 317: ...Object dialog box is displayed from which you can select a label template You can open this dialog box using the following method dbConnect menu Templates Label Template Properties Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected label template You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the label template Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified fo...

Page 318: ...d later format You can open this dialog box using the following method dbConnect menu Link Conversion Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from AutoCAD 2000 and later the link conversion process requires that you specify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension ASE link values to the new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later For example you must identify the environ...

Page 319: ...ata sources that you can select for the converted link Database Specifies the database used by the link that you re converting DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the link that you re converting Environment Specifies the environment used by the link that you re converting Link Path Name Specifies the link path name used by the link that you re converting Link Template Lists avail...

Page 320: ...verting New Link Format Specifies the path to the database table used by the converted link OK Writes conversion mapping information to the asi ini file and closes the dialog box Apply Writes conversion mapping information to the asi ini file but keeps the dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links Cancel Closes the dialog box without converting any links Link Manager...

Page 321: ...n sets of graphical objects and database records The Link Select dialog box known as ASE Select in previous releases is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor You begin a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of graphical objects set A which can be operated on by an additional query or selection set set B The results of the returned operation become the new ru...

Page 322: ...controls Do Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set The following operators are available Intersect Returns the intersection of the existing running selection and the results of the new query or drawing selection This operation returns all records or objects that are members of set A and set B Select Creates an initial query or selection set This selection set can be r...

Page 323: ... can apply to the current selection set Use Query Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns a selection set to the Link Select operation Select in Drawing Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link Select operation Execute Select Executes the current Lin...

Page 324: ...s or both depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation Status Bar Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select operation The current drawing and table are displayed as well as the number of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link Select parameters Link Template Dialog Box Specifies the key fields that are used by a link te...

Page 325: ...y without first displaying the New Link Template dialog box Key Fields Displays all fields that are available for the current database table as well as the field type and in the case of character fields the field length You specify the link template s key fields by selecting the check box to the left of the field name Table Displays the current database table The first line lists the name of the t...

Page 326: ... catalog from this list to apply to the link template Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected link template You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the link template Keys Displays the key fields specified for the selected link template Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected link template You can select a new schema ...

Page 327: ...nnect Manager and choose New Label Template After you enter a name for the label template and choose Continue the Label Template Dialog Box opens in which you specify the fields to display in your label and how to format them New Label Template Name Specifies a name for the label template Start with Template Lists available label templates in the current drawing from which you can select one to us...

Page 328: ...arting point for the new link template New Query Dialog Box Creates a new query and opens the Query Editor You can open this dialog box using the following methods dbConnect Manager buttons Select a link template database table or existing query and choose the New Query button dbConnect menu Queries New Query on an External Table or New Query on a Link Template A dialog box is displayed in which y...

Page 329: ...ta View Window Shortcut menu Right click a single cell or column header in the Data View window and choose Replace Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you re searching for Find What Specifies the value to search for Match Case Searches for the exact value including case of what you enter in Find What If this option is cleared the program searches for the value regardless of case ...

Page 330: ...n OK Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box in which you can continue the current operation If for example you are creating a new label template the New Label Template dialog box is displayed Select Data Object Dialog Box Displays the Data Sources node of the dbConnect Manager from which you can navigate to and select a database table that the current opera...

Page 331: ...the record set Reset Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort order so that you can specify a new sort order Sort By Specifies the primary column to apply to the sort operation The data from this column is sorted first and then the data from any additional Then By columns that are specified is sorted Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort operation Synchroniz...

Page 332: ... Manager and choose Synchronize Close Closes the dialog box Delete Deletes the invalid link template and any associated links from the current drawing Description Provides a brief description of the error selected in the Errors list Errors Displays a list of errors detected You can select an error to fix Fix Fixes the currently selected error Indicate Drawing Objects Indicates all objects in the c...

Page 333: ... Editor EATTEDIT Block Displays the Edit Block Definition dialog box BEDIT Hatch Displays the Hatch Edit dialog box HATCHEDIT Leader text Displays the In place Text Editor DDEDIT Multiline Displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box MLEDIT Multiline text Displays the In place Text Editor MTEDIT Text Displays the Edit Text dialog box DDEDIT Xref Displays the Reference Edit dialog box REFEDIT NOTE ...

Page 334: ...hout the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler Right click to display Text Shortcut Menu on page 1193 Text created using MTEXT displays the In Place Text Editor Attribute definitions not part of a block definition display the Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command Undo...

Page 335: ... start the string with two backslashes To use a field as the value right click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field Dialog Box Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition If you need leading blanks in the prompt start the string with a backslash If the first character must be a backslash start the ...

Page 336: ...t display size The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE system variable Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom in or out Set Size Relative to Screen...

Page 337: ...iewpoint Presets Dialog Box is displayed Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box View menu 3D Views Viewpoint Presets Command line ddvpoint Defines 3D view settings Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system WCS or a user coordinate system UCS Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box 313 ...

Page 338: ...to the value displayed in that region If you select the inner arc or an area inside it the angle is not rounded off and the result may be a fractional number Set to Plan View Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view XY plane relative to the selected coordinate system DELAY Provides a timed pause within a script Command line delay or delay for transparent use Enter delay time in millisecond...

Page 339: ...oning command and immediately return to the Command prompt To exit Dimensioning mode enter e or exit or press ESC Dimensioning Mode Commands The following commands are available at the DIM prompt Dimensioning mode commands Description Command Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt You can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode EXIT Redraws the current viewport REDRAW Changes t...

Page 340: ...IMEDIT Home HOMETEXT DIMLINEAR Horizontal HORIZONTAL LEADER LEADER DIMEDIT New NEWTEXT DIMEDIT Oblique OBLIQUE DIMORDINATE ORDINATE DIMOVERRIDE OVERRIDE DIMRADIUS RADIUS DIMSTYLE Restore RESTORE DIMLINEAR Rotated ROTATED DIMSTYLE Save SAVE DIMSTYLE Status STATUS DIMTEDIT TEDIT DIMEDIT Rotate TROTATE DIMSTYLE Apply UPDATE DIMSTYLE Variables VARIABLES DIMLINEAR Vertical VERTICAL DIMALIGNED 316 Chapt...

Page 341: ...pecify second extension line origin Specify a point 2 Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object Select object to dimension For polylines and other explodable objects only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference If you select a line or ...

Page 342: ...a suffix to the generated measurement enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1194 To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the angle brackets enter the new dimension text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in t...

Page 343: ...tering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 before angle After you specify the angle the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed after angle DIMANGULAR Creates a...

Page 344: ...oints for a three point angular dimension The center of the arc is the angle vertex The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines angle vertex The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line Circle Selection Uses the selection point 1 as the origin of the first ext...

Page 345: ...lways less than 180 degrees angle displayed depends on cursor position Three Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify Specify angle vertex Specify a point 1 Specify first angle endpoint Specify a point 2 Specify second angle endpoint Specify a point 3 The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints If you need extension lines the endpoints are used a...

Page 346: ...rned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets For more information about formatting dimension text see Change Existing Objects in the User s Guide The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dim...

Page 347: ...etermines the direction of the extension lines Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1194 To edit or replace the ge...

Page 348: ...le of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 Partial Reduces the length of the arc length dimension Specify first point for arc length dimension Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimension should begin Specify second point for arc length dimension Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimension should end Leader Adds a leader object...

Page 349: ... ordinate the following prompt is displayed Specify Feature Location on page 326 or Undo on page 326 Select on page 326 Select To end the command press ENTER twice or press ESC The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text Second Extension Line Origin By default the first extension line of the base dimension is used as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension To ove...

Page 350: ...to use as the basis for the baseline dimension press ENTER Select base dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session Select Prompts you to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension After you select a base dim...

Page 351: ...ion you are prompted to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension Select continued dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Otherwise the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session If the base dimension is linear or angular the following prompt is displayed Specify a Second E...

Page 352: ...ate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command 1 Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension you are prompted for the next feature location When you select a feature location the continued dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC To select another...

Page 353: ...an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Contro...

Page 354: ...t Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 After you specify the angle the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions Command line dimdisassociate Select dimensions to disassociate Select one or more dimensions and then press ENTER DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensi...

Page 355: ...ts dimension style New Changes dimension text using the In Place Text Editor before New after New The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Chara...

Page 356: ... and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes See DIMSTYLE The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation Select objects Use an object selection method to select dimension objects rotated text Oblique Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for linear dimensions Linear dimensions are created with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of the dimension line The Obliqu...

Page 357: ... origin point of the dimension line can be specified at any convenient location NOTE Jogged radius dimensions are also called foreshortened radius dimensions Specify center location override Specify a point Accepts a new center point for a jogged radius dimension that takes the place of the true center point of the arc or circle Specify Dimension Line Location on page 334 or Mtext on page 334 Text...

Page 358: ... User s Guide The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text current Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets to represent th...

Page 359: ... to select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension the following prompt is displayed Specify Dimension Line Location or Mtext Text Angle Horizontal Vertical Rotated Specify a point or enter an option First Extension Line Origin Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first Speci...

Page 360: ...ete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets For more information about formatting dimension text see Change Existing Objects in the User s Guide The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line T...

Page 361: ...reates horizontal linear dimensions Specify dimension line location or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line After you specify the location the dimension is drawn Mtext Text Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands See the option descriptions provided earlier...

Page 362: ...ands See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions Specify angle of dimension line current Specify an angle or press ENTER Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object Select object to dimension For polylines and other explodable objects only the individual lin...

Page 363: ...MEXO system variable object selected dimension line location designated offset from origin DIMEXO system variable If you select a circle the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the extension line When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point a horizontal dimension is drawn When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadr...

Page 364: ...dinate Otherwise it measures the Y ordinate Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed where you can specify the endpoint Xdatum Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed where you can specify the endpoi...

Page 365: ...dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes After you...

Page 366: ...lect the dimensions The overrides are cleared and the dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style DIMRADIUS Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs Dimension toolbar Dimension menu Radius Command line dimradius Select arc or circle DIMRADIUS measures the radius of the selected arc or circle and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it Spe...

Page 367: ... to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Angle Changes the angle of the dimensi...

Page 368: ...the next dimension object if any Angular Three Point Specify angle vertex or Select arc or circle next Specify an object snap location enter s and select an arc or a circle or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify first angle endpoint next Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint next Specify an object snap location or press E...

Page 369: ...ar dimension linear factors in legacy drawings DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions Command line dimregen The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in three cases After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active update associative dimensions c...

Page 370: ...e Dimension Style Manager Format menu Dimension Style Dimension menu Style Command line dimstyle Creates new styles sets the current style modifies styles sets overrides on the current style and compares styles Current Dimstyle Displays the name of the dimension style that is current The default dimension style is STANDARD The current style is applied to dimensions you create 346 Chapter 6 ...

Page 371: ... styles based on them List Controls the display of styles in the Styles list Select All Styles if you want to see all dimension styles in a drawing Select Styles in Use if you want to see only the dimension styles currently used by dimensions in the drawing Don t List Styles in Xrefs When selected suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings in the Styles list Preview S...

Page 372: ...e properties of one dimension style Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Format menu Dimension Style Dimension menu Style Command line dimstyle Names the new dimension style sets the style on which to start the new one and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply Continue Displays the New Modify and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes in which you define the new di...

Page 373: ...y or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box although you are modifying or overriding an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option Lines Tab on page 349 Symb...

Page 374: ...ou can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors true colors and Color Book colors Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line There is no system variable for this setting Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line DIMLWD system variable Extend Beyond Ticks Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique architectural ti...

Page 375: ...n line Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables first dimension line suppressed second dimension line suppressed 1 2 1 2 Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines Color Sets the color for the extension line If you click Select Color at the bottom of the Color list the Select Color Dialog Box is displayed You can also enter a color name...

Page 376: ...stem variable Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line Ext Line 2 suppresses the second extension line DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system variables first extension line suppressed 1 2 second extension line suppressed 1 2 Extend Beyond Dim Lines Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line DIMEXE system variable extension...

Page 377: ...imum offset distance from the extension line origin points regardless of the setting for fixed length extension lines 16 17 16 22 13 fixed length extension lines Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings Symbols and Arrows Tab Sets the format and placement for arrowheads center marks arc length symbols and jogged radius dimension...

Page 378: ...The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed Select the name of a user defined arrowhead block The block must be in the drawing Second Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line DIMBLK2 system variable To specify a user defined arrowhead block select User Arrow The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed Select the name of a user defined arrowhead block The block must be i...

Page 379: ... circle or arc None Creates no center mark or centerline The value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable Mark Creates a center mark The size of the center mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable Line Creates a centerline The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable Size Displays and sets the size of the center mark or center...

Page 380: ...t is located off the page Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse line that connects the extension and dimension lines of a radius dimension R 3 0 0 45 extension line dimension line jog angle Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings Text Tab Sets the format placement and alignment of dimension text 356 Chapter 6 ...

Page 381: ...xt Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box in which you can define or modify text styles Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text If you click Select Color at the bottom of the Color list the Select Color Dialog Box is displayed You can also enter color name or number DIMCLRT system variable You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors true colors and Color Boo...

Page 382: ...elected as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab The value entered here is multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to dimension text DIMTFAC system variable Draw Frame Around Text When selected draws a frame around dimension text Selecting this option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system variable to a negative value Text Placement Controls ...

Page 383: ...the text with the first extension line along the dimension line The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line At Ext Line 2 Right justifies the text with the second extension line along the dimension line The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text g...

Page 384: ...uired for dimension line segments Text is positioned inside the extension lines only if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text gap Text above or below the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads dimension text and a margin leave enough room for the text gap DIMGAP system variable DIMGAP 0 DIMGAP 0 1 Text Alignment Controls the orientation horizontal or aligned of di...

Page 385: ...nsion lines but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings Fit Tab Controls the placement of dimension text arrowheads leader lines and the dimension line New Modify and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes 361 ...

Page 386: ... DIMTIX and DIMSOXD system variables Either Text or Arrows Best Fit Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension lines based on the best fit When enough space is available for text and arrowheads places both between the extension lines Otherwise either the text or the arrowheads are moved based on the best fit When enough space is available for text only places text between the ex...

Page 387: ...s available for arrowheads places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines Text Moves text outside the extension lines first then arrowheads When space is available for text and arrowheads places both between the extension lines When space is available for text only places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them When not enough space is available for tex...

Page 388: ...ariable Over the Dimension Line with Leader If selected dimension lines are not moved when text is moved If text is moved away from the dimension line a leader line is created connecting the text to the dimension line The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line DIMTMOVE system variable Over the Dimension Line Without Leader If selected dimension lines are not moved when...

Page 389: ...LE system variable Fine Tuning Provides additional options for placing dimension text Place Text Manually Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt DIMUPT system variable Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured ...

Page 390: ...numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text DIMDEC system variable Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions DIMFRAC system variable Decimal Separator Sets the separator for decimal formats DIMDSEP system variable 366 Chapter 6 ...

Page 391: ...olerances as well as to the main dimension For more information see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1194 Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols For example entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration When you enter a suffix it overrides any default suffixes DIMPOST s...

Page 392: ...g zeros in all decimal dimensions For example 12 5000 becomes 12 5 and 30 0000 becomes 30 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet and inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot For example 0 6 1 2 becomes 6 1 2 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet and inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet For example 1 0 becomes 1 Angular Dimensions Display...

Page 393: ... alternate measurement units to dimension text Sets the DIMALT system variable to 1 Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular Unit Format Sets the unit format for alternate units DIMALTU system variable The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC in the same way that tolerance values use this system varia...

Page 394: ... measurements are rounded to the nearest integer The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting DIMALTRND system variable Prefix Includes a prefix in the alternate dimension text You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols For example entering the control code c displays the diameter symbol DIMAPOST system variable For more informatio...

Page 395: ...6 1 2 becomes 6 1 2 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet and inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet For example 1 0 becomes 1 Placement Controls the placement of alternate units in dimension text DIMAPOST system variable After Primary Value Places alternate units after the primary units in dimension text Below Primary Value Places alternate units below the pri...

Page 396: ...s expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement A plus or minus sign appears after the dimension Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1 The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0 Deviation Adds a plus minus tolerance expression Different plus and minus values of variation are applied to the dimension measur...

Page 397: ...he dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0 The DIMLIM system variable is set to 1 Basic Creates a basic dimension which displays a box around the full extents of the dimension The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable Precision Sets the number of decimal places DIMTDEC system variable ...

Page 398: ...n you select this option the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2 Middle Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text When you select this option the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1 Bottom Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text When you select this option the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0 Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of le...

Page 399: ...splays and sets the number of decimal places DIMALTTD system variable Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero DIMALTTZ system variable Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions For example 0 5000 becomes 5000 Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions For example 12 5000 becomes 12 5...

Page 400: ...hen paste to other Microsoft Windows applications Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison Print to Clipboard button Copies the results of the comparison to the Clipboard You can then paste the results to other Windows applications such as word processors and spreadsheets Results Displays the results of the dimension style comparison If you compare two different styles the pr...

Page 401: ...nsion Styles Restore Enter an option or press ENTER Save Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension style Enter name for new dimension style or Enter a name or enter Name Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimension style using the name you enter The new dimension style becomes the current one If you enter the name of an existing di...

Page 402: ... style you enter the current dimension style To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to restore and the current style enter a tilde followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt Only settings that differ are displayed with the current setting in the first column and the setting of the compared style in the second column After the differences are d...

Page 403: ... Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing Enter dimension style s to list Enter a name list or press ENTER After the dimension styles are listed the previous prompt returns Select Dimension Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension object you select Select dimension Apply Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to sele...

Page 404: ...ension text with left and right justification dimension text positioned by cursor dimension text positioned by angle Location for Dimension Text Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it To determine whether text appears above below or in the middle of the dimension line use the Text tab in the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog box Left Left justifies the d...

Page 405: ...inear radial and diameter dimensions before Right after Right Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position before Home after Home Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text Enter text angle before Angle after Angle 90 deg DIMSTYLE Command Line 381 ...

Page 406: ...Distance calculated distance Angle in XY plane angle Angle from XY plane angle Delta X change in X Delta Y change in Y Delta Z change in Z The true 3D distance between points is reported The angle in the XY plane is relative to the current X axis The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordi...

Page 407: ...into five parts Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object Enter name of block to insert Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object Yes No Y Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to or collinear with the divided object at the dividing points No Aligns the blocks according to their no...

Page 408: ...er of donut current Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify center of donut or exit Specify a point 1 or press ENTER to end the command inside diameter outside diameter The location of the donut is set based on the center point After you specify the diameters you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts A donut is drawn at each point specified 2 How the interior of a donut is fille...

Page 409: ...l dragging requests including those embedded in menu items DRAGMODE off Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it Dragging is performed whenever it is possible Entering drag each time is not necessary DRAWINGRECOVERY Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure File menu Drawing Recovery Command line drawingrecovery Opens the Drawing Reco...

Page 410: ... DWG DWS The automatic save file also called the autosave file SV The drawing backup file BAK The original drawing file DWG DWS Once a drawing or backup file is opened and saved the corresponding top level drawing node is removed from the Backup Files area Details Provides the following information about the currently selected node in the Backup Files area When a top level drawing node is selected...

Page 411: ...pens all the drawing and backup files associated with the selected top level drawing node Properties Displays the File Properties dialog box from Windows Explorer for the selected drawing or backup file Remove Removes the selected top level drawing node DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE Closes the Drawing Recovery Manager Command line drawingrecoveryhide Closes the Drawing Recovery Manager DRAWORDER Changes the...

Page 412: ...maintained By default when you create new objects from existing ones for example FILLET or PEDIT the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original object you selected first By default while you edit an object for example MOVE or STRETCH the object is displayed on top of all objects in the drawing When you are finished editing your drawing is partially regenerated so that the object is di...

Page 413: ... aids in four categories Snap and Grid Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Polar Tracking Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Object Snap Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box and Dynamic Input Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Options Displays the Drafting tab in the Options Dialog Box You cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently Sn...

Page 414: ...Base Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid SNAPBASE system variable Y Base Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid SNAPBASE system variable Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap increment distance Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type Style If this value is 0 the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing The Pol...

Page 415: ...ontal grid points SNAPTYPE system variable Rectangular Snap Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on the cursor snaps to a rectangular snap grid SNAPSTYL system variable Isometric Snap Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on the cursor snaps to an isometric snap gri...

Page 416: ... to display polar tracking alignment paths You can enter any angle or select a common angle of 90 45 30 22 5 18 15 10 or 5 degrees from the list POLARANG system variable Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the...

Page 417: ...p tracking Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal horizontal vertical object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on POLARMODE system variable Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Applies polar tracking settings to object snap tracking When you use object snap tracking the cursor tracks along polar alignment angles from acquired object snap poi...

Page 418: ...e options Object Snap On Turns running object snaps on and off The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on OSMODE system variable Object Snap Tracking On Turns object snap tracking on and off With object snap tracking the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command To use object snap tracking ...

Page 419: ... point snap point Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline segment region solid spline or xline selection point snap point Center Snaps to the center of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc selection point snap point Node Snaps to a point object dimension definition point or dimension text origin Drafting Settings Dialog Box 395 ...

Page 420: ...lliptical arc line multiline polyline ray region spline or xline Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time 396 Chapter 6 ...

Page 421: ...e or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point an AutoSnap tooltip and marker are displayed selection point snap point Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc or spline Deferred Tangent snap m...

Page 422: ...ion do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever you are prompted for the second point of a vector After specifying the first point of a vector if you move the cursor over a straight line segment...

Page 423: ...ordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor When a command prompts for a point you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of on the command line Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input Settings Displays the Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Enable Dimension Input Turns on dimensional input Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point DYNMO...

Page 424: ...mand line Preview Area Shows an example of dynamic prompts Show Command Prompting and Command Input near the Crosshairs Displays prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips DYNPROMPT system variable Drafting Tooltip Appearance Displays the Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Tools menu Drafting Settings Shortcut menu Right click Snap Grid Polar Osnap Otrack or Dyn on the status b...

Page 425: ...e second or next point in polar coordinate format Enter a comma to change to Cartesian format DYNPIFORMAT system variable Relative Coordinates Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in relative coordinate format Enter a pound sign to change to absolute format DYNPICOORDS system variable When a Command Asks for a Point When pointer input is turned on displays tooltips whenever a command ...

Page 426: ...gth change and resulting dimensional input tooltips when you are using grip editing to stretch an object DYNDIVIS system variable Show Only 1 Dimension Input Field at a Time Displays only the length change dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object DYNDIVIS system variable Show the Following Dimension Input Fields Simultaneously When you are using grip editing t...

Page 427: ...operating system Use Settings Only for Dynamic Input Tooltips Applies the settings only to the drafting tooltips used in Dynamic Input Size Specifies a size for tooltips The default size is 0 Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips The lower the setting the less transparent the tooltip A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque Apply To Spe...

Page 428: ...ial View window the Zoom In menu option and button are unavailable If both of these conditions exist at the same time such as after using ZOOM Extents both options are unavailable All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right clicking in the Aerial View window Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple v...

Page 429: ...u zoom using the Aerial View window Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2 centered on the current view box Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2 centered on the current view box Aerial View Window 405 ...

Page 430: ...g a camera and target Command line dview Object Selection on page 407 or use DVIEWBLOCK on page 407 Enter option Camera Target Distance Points Pan Zoom on page 413 Twist Clip Hide Off on page 416 Undo Point Specification on page 408 with your pointing device or enter an option Transparent ZOOM DSVIEWER PAN and scroll bars are not available in DVIEW When you define a perspective view ZOOM PAN trans...

Page 431: ...updating DVIEWBLOCK If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt DVIEWBLOCK displays a preview image You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a 1 unit by 1 unit by 1 unit area with its origin at the lower left corner The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view Aerial View Window 407 ...

Page 432: ...R Camera Location Sets the camera s position based on the specified point Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the camera s position at an angle above or below the XY plane An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above and an angle of 90 looks up from below A camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to the XY plane of the user coordinate system UCS When you toggle the angle input mode or ...

Page 433: ...se the cursor to rotate the camera Target Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera The effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one vantage point Two angles determine the amount of rotation Specify camera location or enter angle in XY plane from X axis or Toggle angle current current Specify an XYZ point enter t enter an angle or p...

Page 434: ...ilable for that angle Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle and you can use the cursor to rotate the target Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the target s position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS This angle measures from 180 to 180 degrees A rotation angle of 0 degrees means you look down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin plan view came...

Page 435: ...arget distance Specify new camera target distance current Enter a distance or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x with 1x representing the current distance Moving the slider bar to the right increases the distance between camera and target Moving it to the left decreases that distance To turn off perspective viewing click the Off option from the mai...

Page 436: ... the preview image is redisplayed in perspective view Specify target point current Specify a point or press ENTER To help you define a new line of sight a rubber band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs You are prompted for a new camera location Specify camera point current Specify a point enter direction and magnitude angles or press ENTER A rubber band line connects ...

Page 437: ... objects in the current viewport Specify zoom scale factor current Specify a scale or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x with 1x representing the current scale Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale Moving it to the left decreases the scale If perspective viewing is on Zoom adjusts the camera lens length which changes the field of v...

Page 438: ...oving the slider bar to the right increases the lens length Moving it to the left decreases the lens length plan view lens length 25mm lens length 50mm Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight The twist angle is measured counterclockwise with 0 degrees to the right Specify view twist angle current Specify an angle or press ENTER Clip Clips the view obscuring portions of the drawing ...

Page 439: ... the slider bar to drag the clipping plane On Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance Off Turns off back clipping Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane Specify distance from target or set to Eye camera ON OFF current Specify a distance enter e or press ENTER Distance from Target Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping ...

Page 440: ...ization Circles solids traces regions wide polyline segments 3D faces polygon meshes and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness are considered to be opaque surfaces that hide objects This hidden line suppression is quicker than that performed by HIDE but it can t be plotted Off Turns off perspective viewing The Distance option turns on perspective viewing Undo Reverses the effects of...

Page 441: ...an help you identify your drawing Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field Dialog Box on page 463 General Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box on page 417 Summary Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box on page 419 Statistics Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box on page 420 Custom Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box on page 422 General Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box Displays ...

Page 442: ...he file was created and the date and time it was last modified and last accessed Attributes Shows system level file attributes These values can be modified in Windows Explorer Read Only Indicates that the file is read only it cannot be changed or deleted accidentally Archive Indicates that this file should be archived This setting is used to determine which files should be backed up 418 Chapter 6 ...

Page 443: ...r title and subject that are predefined For example you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use DesignCenter to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword Title Specifies the title you want to use when searching for this drawing The title can be different from the drawing file name Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing You can use the subject name to group drawin...

Page 444: ...the drawing You can specify an Internet location for example http www autodesk com or a path to a folder on a network drive Statistics Tab Drawing Properties Dialog Box Displays data such as the dates the drawing was created and last modified These file properties are automatically maintained for you and can help you search for drawings created or modified during a specific period NOTE If the prog...

Page 445: ...e is stored in the TDUPDATE system variable Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the file The Last Saved By name is stored in the LOGINNAME system variable Revision Number Displays the revision number Total Editing Time Displays the total amount of editing time in the drawing This value is stored in the TDINDWG system variable Drawing Properties Dialog Box 421 ...

Page 446: ...d names in the Field dialog box You also have access to the properties data using programming interfaces such as AutoLISP Custom Properties Lists names and values of custom properties for the current drawing Add Displays the Add Custom Property Dialog Box where you can enter a name and a value for the new custom property The name must be unique The value can be left blank Delete Deletes the custom...

Page 447: ... not permitted asterisk equal sign less than and greater than signs slash backslash quotation marks reverse quote pipe sign colon and semicolon Value Specifies a value for the property The value can be left blank DXBIN Imports specially coded binary files Insert menu Drawing Exchange Binary Command line dxbin The Select DXB File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Enter ...

Page 448: ...424 ...

Page 449: ...odify menu Object Attribute Single Command line eattedit Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute You can change the attribute properties and values Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you have made and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor open Block Name of the block whose attributes you are editing Select Block Temporarily c...

Page 450: ... assigned to the selected attribute To use a field as the value right click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field Dialog Box Text Options Tab Enhanced Attribute Editor Sets the properties that define the way an attribute s text is displayed in the drawing Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text D...

Page 451: ...e layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight linetype and color for the attribute text If the drawing uses plot styles you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute Color Specifies the color of the attribute Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute If the c...

Page 452: ...o an external file The Attribute Extraction wizard includes the following pages Begin on page 428 Select Drawings on page 429 Select Attributes on page 430 Finalize Output on page 431 Table Style on page 431 Finish on page 432 Begin Provides the option either to specify new settings for extracting attributes or to use settings previously saved in an attribute extraction template BLK file Create Ta...

Page 453: ...tribute information from all blocks in the current drawing Selected Drawings Sheet Sets Makes the button available to select drawing files or a sheet set DST file Attribute information is extracted from all blocks in selected drawings Button Displays the Select File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes where you can locate and select drawing files or a sheet set DST file Drawing Files...

Page 454: ... a list of blocks in the selected drawings or sheets If a selected drawing or sheet contains a block definition with no instances that block is not listed Double click the column head to reverse the sort order Select the check box next to a block name to display that block s attributes and properties in the Properties for Checked Blocks list The Display Name column provides a place to enter an opt...

Page 455: ... columns or sort the table by the values in any column You can control which values are displayed for any attribute Right click a column head and click Filter Rows to display the Filter Dialog Box on page 433 AutoCAD Table Extracts the information to a table and displays the Table Style page when you click Next External File Specifies the file name and location to which to export the information C...

Page 456: ...te extraction settings The table is recreated and overwrites the old table Any manual changes you made to the table are lost To avoid losing formatting changes make changes to the table style not to the table Preview Displays a preview of the table layout If the table style does not include a title row or header row none is displayed Finish Finishes the process of extracting attributes Save Templa...

Page 457: ...ocks in Xrefs Includes blocks in externally referenced xref files Include Nested Blocks Includes blocks nested within other blocks Include Xrefs in Block Counts Includes xrefs themselves when counting blocks Only Include Blocks in Model Space Counts only block instances in model space and does not count blocks in paper space layouts Off by default Count Settings Provides options for counting block...

Page 458: ...e to toggle visibility or Display Select an edge or enter d Edge Controls the visibility of the edges you select Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or Display The prompt is repeated until you press ENTER If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge Display Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them Ent...

Page 459: ... edge This prompt continues until you press ENTER Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and displays them Select objects If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again use the Edge option You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed indicating the apparent snap locations on each in...

Page 460: ...irst edge SURFTAB1 determines the M direction of the generated mesh which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges SURFTAB2 of the mesh M N ELEV Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects Command line elev or elev for transparent use Specify new default elevation current Specify a distance or press...

Page 461: ...set to 0 0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system WCS ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc Draw toolbar Draw menu Ellipse Command line ellipse Specify Axis Endpoint of ellipse or Arc Center on page 440 Isocircle Specify a point or enter an option The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric Axis Endpoint Defi...

Page 462: ...otation around major axis Specify a point 3 or enter an angle value between 0 and 89 4 Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click If you enter a value the higher the value the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse ellipse by rotation 3 Arc Creates an elliptical arc The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc The...

Page 463: ...rameter Specify a point 1 enter a value or enter p The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the corresponding options under Rotation 1 Rotation Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis The higher the value from 0 through 89 4 degrees the greater the ratio of minor to major axis Entering 0 defines a circle Specify...

Page 464: ... arc by using a parametric vector equation The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated Angle Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc The Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated Included Angle Defines an included angle beginning at the start angle Center Create...

Page 465: ...r of the ellipse and click If you enter a value the higher the value the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse Entering 0 defines a circle Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane NOTE The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric Specify center of isocircle Specify radius of isocircle or Diameter Specify a distance ...

Page 466: ...e objects are removed from the drawing object selected object erased ETRANSMIT Packages a set of files for Internet transmission File menu eTransmit Command line etransmit The Create Transmittal Dialog Box is displayed If you enter etransmit at the Command prompt ETRANSMIT displays ETRANSMIT Command Line Create Transmittal Dialog Box File menu eTransmit Command line etransmit Packages a set of fil...

Page 467: ...ht clicked NOTE If a sheet in the list is unavailable the sheet is referenced as an xref by another sheet in the transmittal package and the unavailable sheet is automatically included in the transmittal package Files Tree Tab Lists the files to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchical tree format By default all files associated with the current drawing such as related xrefs plot s...

Page 468: ... with the Add File option Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the transmittal package in a table format By default all files associated with the current drawing such as related xrefs plot styles and fonts are listed You can add files to the transmittal package or remove existing files Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the transmittal package 444 Chapter...

Page 469: ...es by creating an ASCII text file called etransmit txt This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files Tab Options Dialog Box in the Options dialog box Select a Transmittal Setup Lists previously saved transmittal setups The default transmittal setup is named STANDARD Click to select a different transmittal setup To create a new transmittal setup...

Page 470: ...s being installed If you have created a text file of default notes the notes are also included in the report Save As Opens a File Save dialog box in which you can specify a location in which to save a report file Note that a report file is automatically included with all transmittal packages that you generate by choosing Save As you can save an additional copy of a report file for archival purpose...

Page 471: ... Delete Removes the currently highlighted transmittal setup Import In a sheet set context opens a standard file selection dialog box in which you can navigate to a sheet set data DST file Then displays the Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box on page 447 in which you can specify the transmittal setups that you want to import Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box File menu eTransmit Command line etr...

Page 472: ... to import into the current sheet set Overwrite with Current Storage Location When checked replaces the imported sheet set storage locations with the storage location of the current sheet set Import Checked Imports the transmittal setups on the list that display check marks Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box File menu eTransmit Command line etransmit 448 Chapter 7 ...

Page 473: ...rd file selection dialog box in which you can navigate to specify a source root folder Folder Creates a transmittal package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder Include Drawing Set Data and Files Includes the sheet set data DST file callout and label block DWG files and the associated drawing template DWT file with the transmittal package Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box 449 ...

Page 474: ...ackage facilitating ease of installation on another system This option is not available if you re saving a transmittal package to an Internet location Overwrite if Necessary Uses a logical default file name If the file name already exists the existing file is automatically overwritten Place All Files in One Folder All files are installed to a single specified target folder when the transmittal pac...

Page 475: ...rchical folder tree The following considerations apply Relative paths remain unchanged Relative paths outside the source root folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them and are placed in the root folder Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths Absolute paths outside the source root folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them and ar...

Page 476: ...wing file In a sheet set context the transmittal file is created in the folder containing the sheet set data DST file Browse Opens a standard file selection dialog box in which you can navigate to a location where you create the transmittal package Transmittal File Name Specifies the method for naming the transmittal package Displays the default file name for the transmittal package This option is...

Page 477: ... enter etransmit at the Command prompt ETRANSMIT displays prompts on the command line Enter an option Create transmittal package Report only CUrrent setup CHoose setup Sheet set Report only Enter an option Choose Setup Specifies the transmittal setup to use for the transmittal package Choose Transmittal Setup or current Enter a predefined transmittal setup name enter to display a list of transmitt...

Page 478: ...ent objects Modify toolbar Modify menu Explode Command line explode Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish The color linetype and lineweight of any exploded object might change Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you re exploding See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each NOTE If you re using a sc...

Page 479: ...ymous block named with a E prefix and referenced with the nonuniform scaling If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded the selected block reference will not be exploded Body 3D Solid and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions Blocks inserted with M...

Page 480: ... Type select the format type to export objects to In File Name enter the name of the file to create The objects are exported to the specified file format using the specified file name The following output types are available WMF Microsoft Windows Metafile see WMFOUT SAT ACIS solid object file see ACISOUT STL Solid object stereolithography file see STLOUT EPS Encapsulated PostScript file DXX Attrib...

Page 481: ... selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points The selection fence does not form a closed loop Specify first fence point Specify the starting point of ...

Page 482: ...Enter a projection option None Ucs View current Enter an option or press ENTER selected boundary objects to extend None Specifies no projection Only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space are extended arc not intersecting with boundary edge in 3D space arc intersecting with boundary edge in 3D space UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system...

Page 483: ...ect to another object s implied edge or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space selected object to extend selected boundary Enter an implied edge extension mode Extend No extend current Enter an option or press ENTER Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space ETRANSMIT Command Line 459 ...

Page 484: ... recent changes made by EXTEND EXTRUDE Creates unique solid primitives by extruding existing two dimensional objects Solids toolbar Draw menu Solids Extrude Command line extrude Current wire frame density ISOLINES current Object Selection on page 460 Specify Height of Extrusion or Path Specify a distance or enter p Object Selection select object 460 Chapter 7 ...

Page 485: ...of taper for extrusion 0 Specify an angle between 90 and 90 degrees or press ENTER taper angle Positive angles taper in from the base object Negative angles taper out The default angle 0 extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane All objects and loops in the selection set are tapered to the same value Tapered extrusions are possible only with loops that are continuous at the vertices Speci...

Page 486: ...the plane of the profile at one of the endpoints of the path Otherwise the profile is rotated to be perpendicular to the spline path If one of the endpoints of the spline is on the plane of the profile the profile is rotated about the point otherwise the spline path is moved to the center of the profile and the profile rotates about its center If the path contains segments that are not tangent the...

Page 487: ...command is active and click Insert Field Command line field The Field Dialog Box is displayed Field Dialog Box Insert menu Field Shortcut menu Right click while any text command is active and click Insert Field Command line field Inserts a field in the drawing The options available in the Field dialog box change with the field category and field name Field Dialog Box 463 ...

Page 488: ...ciate Hyperlink Adds a hyperlink to the field when it is created You can use CTRL click to jump to the sheet or view This option is not available for the ViewportScale field Average Sum Count When Formula is selected in Field Names closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells The result is appended to the formula Block Name Displays the name of the current block definition...

Page 489: ...a to insert in text or in a table cell Named Object Type Object Type When NamedObject is selected in Field Names lists the types of named objects in the drawing When Object is selected displays the type of object selected Use the Select Object button to temporarily close the dialog box and select an object in the drawing Placeholder Type Displays a list of available placeholder fields Precision Sp...

Page 490: ...selected in the Placeholder Type list and Uppercase selected in the Format list Temporary Value displays SHEETTITLE When the drawing is placed in a sheet set this field displays the title of the sheet Options for Sheet Set and Sheet View Fields The following additional options are available when sheet set related fields are selected Options for BlockPlaceholder Fields BlockPlaceholder fields are o...

Page 491: ...r Specifies the conversion factor to use on the the current value The default is 1 for no conversion Additional Text Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the field value Number Separators Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet and inches field value when the distance is less than one foot For example 0 6 1 2 becomes 6 1 2 0...

Page 492: ...e filling of objects such as hatches two dimensional solids and wide polylines Command line fill or fill for transparent use Enter mode On Off current Enter on or off or press ENTER On Turns on Fill mode For the filling of a 3D object to be visible its extrusion direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction and hidden lines must not be suppressed Fill mode on Off Turns off Fill mode ...

Page 493: ...llet the edge first selected object second selected object result Select second object or shift select to apply corner Use an object selection method or hold down SHIFT and select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines arcs or polylines their lengths adjust to accommodate the fillet arc You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a...

Page 494: ...t with the fillet More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles Select the objects close to where you want the endpoints of the fillet selection points result with radius greater than 0 FILLET does not trim circles the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly 470 Chapter 8 ...

Page 495: ...R Select an edge or Chain Radius Select edge s enter c or enter r Edge Selects a single edge You can continue to select single edges until you press ENTER selecting edges single edge fillets If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii Field Format Di...

Page 496: ...a single edge selection mode Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge Enter fillet radius current Specify a distance or press ENTER The previous prompt is displayed Select an edge or Chain Radius Select one or more edges or enter c or r Undo Reverses the previous action in the command Polyline Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline wh...

Page 497: ...on Trim No trim current Enter an option or press ENTER Trim Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints No Trim Does not trim the selected edges Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects FILLET displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be...

Page 498: ...ea Select Filter Adds filter properties to the current filter Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter remain available during the current work session unless you manually delete them Current Displays saved filters Select a filter list to...

Page 499: ... Begin OR End XOR Two operands Begin XOR End NOT One operand Begin NOT For example the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to 1 0 Object Circle Begin NOT Circle Radius 1 00 End NOT Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties The filter is saved in the filter nfl file Names can contain up to 18 characters Select Displays a dialog box listin...

Page 500: ...Filter area for editing To edit a filter property select it and choose Edit Item Edit the filter property and choose Substitute The edited filter replaces the selected filter property Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter Named Filters Displays saves and deletes filters Apply Exits the dialog box and d...

Page 501: ...s surrounding context If you click Find Next the Context area is refreshed and displays the next found text string in its surrounding context Find Text String Specifies the text string you want to find Enter a text string including any wild card characters or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list Find Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String If you have ...

Page 502: ...ments that were made Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text Enter a string or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list Search In Specifies whether to search the entire drawing or only the current selection If something is already selected Current Selection is the default value If nothing is selected Entire Drawing is the default value You...

Page 503: ...to text in the current Model or layout tab When zooming to text found in a multiline text object in some cases the found text string may not be displayed in a visible area of the drawing Find and Replace Options Dialog Box Edit menu Find Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Find Command line find Defines the type of objects and words that you want to fin...

Page 504: ...nt distance of objects Render Toolbar View menu Render Fog Command line fog The Fog Depth Cue Dialog Box is displayed Fog Depth Cue Dialog Box View menu Render Fog Command line fog Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction Fog and depth cueing are actually two extremes of the same effect a white color is fog and a black color is traditional depth cueing You ca...

Page 505: ... is used Hue Lightness Saturation Adjusts the individual hue lightness and saturation components of the selected color The result is displayed in the Color Selected swatch Moving the Hue scroll box changes the color Moving the Lightness scroll box increases the luminance or brightness of the hue by adding white Moving the Saturation scroll box to the right increases the purity of the color The hig...

Page 506: ...them all the way to the right produces white Moving red and green to the right and blue to the left produces yellow Select Color Displays the Select Color Dialog BoxSelect Color dialog box To define the color you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors true colors and color book colors Near Far Distance Define where the fog starts and ends The values are percentages of the distance ...

Page 507: ...dient Opens the Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box on page 493 to the Gradient tab GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area Command line graphscr or graphscr for transparent use GRAPHSCR closes the text window You can also press F2 to open or close the text window This command is ignored on dual screen systems GRID Displays a dot grid in the current viewport that is not plotted Status...

Page 508: ...ts the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions Specify the horizontal spacing X current Enter a value or press ENTER Specify the vertical spacing Y current Enter a value or press ENTER Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units The Aspect option is no...

Page 509: ... called groups Command line group The Object Grouping Dialog Box If you enter group at the Command prompt GROUP displays GROUP Command Line Object Grouping Dialog Box Command line group Displays identifies names and changes object groups Object Grouping Dialog Box 485 ...

Page 510: ... Name list Add Adds objects to the selected group Select objects Use an object selection method The selected objects are added to the group The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed chair selected chair added to group NOTE Group names are displayed in alphabetical order Description Displays the description of the selected group if there is one Description Updates the selected group s description...

Page 511: ... Unnamed Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed When this option is cleared only named groups are displayed New Creates a new group from the selected objects using the name and description under Group Name and Description desk computer and telephone selected The group name is displayed in the Group Name list Re Order Displays the Order Group Dialog Box in which you can change the numerical or...

Page 512: ... all the group s objects the group remains defined You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option NOTE When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session they are returned to their previous position in the numerical order of the group Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Iden...

Page 513: ... in groups Description Displays the description of the selected group Enter New Position Number for the Object 0 n Specifies the position to which the object moves Group Name Displays the names of all groups Highlight Displays the members of the selected group in the drawing area one by one in the current group order Order Group Dialog Box 489 ...

Page 514: ... Enter group name s to list Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group Reordering is useful when creating tool paths For example you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern Enter a group name or Enter a name list or enter to list all groups Enter position number of the object to reord...

Page 515: ...he group into its component objects Enter a group name or Enter a name or enter to list all groups Ungroup Removes the group name and the association of objects in the group Rename Assigns a new name to an existing group Enter a group name to rename or Enter an existing group name or enter to list all groups Enter a new name for group or Enter a new name or enter to list all groups Selectable Spec...

Page 516: ...n be up to 31 characters long and can include letters numbers and special characters dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ but not spaces The name is converted to uppercase characters Enter a group description Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER Select objects 492 Chapter 9 ...

Page 517: ... 50 000 for example enter setenv MaxHatch 50000 at the Command prompt The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10 000 000 Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box Draw menu Hatch Command line hatch Defines the boundaries pattern type pattern properties and other parameters for hatch and gradient fill objects Hatch Tab Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box on page 497 Gradient Tab Hatch and Gradient Dialog...

Page 518: ...ight click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options If you turn on Island Detection objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method you select in the More Options area of the dialog box Add Select Objects Determines a boundary from se...

Page 519: ...ight click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu You can undo the last selection or all selections change the selection method change the island detection style or preview the hatch or gradient fill Remove Boundaries Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously When you click Remove Boundaries the dialog box closes temporarily and the comm...

Page 520: ...ine displays a prompt Enter type of boundary object Region Polyline current Enter r to create a region or p to create a polyline Reassociate hatch with new boundary Yes No current Enter y or n View Selections Temporarily closes the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings This option is unavailable when no boundary has been defined Options Co...

Page 521: ...click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options to create boundaries When you click Inherit Properties the dialog box closes temporarily and the command line displays a prompt Select hatch object Click within a hatched or filled area to select the hatch whose properties are to be used for the new hatch object P...

Page 522: ...redefined patterns at once to help you make a selection Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help you make a selection Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS HATCH stores the angle in the HPANG system variable 498 Chapter 10 ...

Page 523: ...tem variable ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns Origin Preview Shows the current location of the origin Pattern Lists the available predefined patterns The six most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list HATCH stores t...

Page 524: ...Dialog BoxSelect Color dialog box Type Sets the pattern type User defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path You can control the angle and scale of any pattern Predefined patterns are stored in the acad pat or acadiso pat files supplied with the product Use Current O...

Page 525: ... specified angle is relative to the current UCS This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch patterns Centered Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical If this option is not selected the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box 501 ...

Page 526: ...slider Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint the selected color mixed with white or shade the selected color mixed with black of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors When Two Color is selected HATCH displays a color swatch with a Browse button for color 1 and for color 2 Gradient Patterns Displays nine fi...

Page 527: ...the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents Selecting this option discards any current boundary set Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New If you have not created a boundary set with New the Existing Set option is not available Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them You can also set the Ignore style by a...

Page 528: ...able Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object The resulting boundary object can be a region or a polyline object This option is available only if Retain Boundaries is checked For more information about regions see Create and Combine Areas Regions in the User s Guide Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an interna...

Page 529: ... selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary By default when you use the Add Pick Point option to define a boundary HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents By redefining the boundary set you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects For large drawings redefining the boundary set ...

Page 530: ...Palette Dialog Box Draw menu Hatch Command line hatch Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns The dialog box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on each tab Click an image to select a pattern and click OK ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the product Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the search path w...

Page 531: ...cted as islands How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is specified Properties Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply Enter a pattern name or Solid User defined current Enter a predefined or custom pattern name enter s enter u enter or press ENTER Pattern Name Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad pat or acadiso pat f...

Page 532: ...ion Select objects Use an object selection method Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill Retain polyline boundary Yes No current Enter y to retain the polyline hatch boundary object or n to discard it after the area is hatched Specify start point Specify the start point of the polyline boundary Specify next point or Arc Close Length Undo Specify a point enter...

Page 533: ...et you define Select objects Use an object selection method Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport Retain Boundary Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing after hatching is completed Retain derived bo...

Page 534: ...n traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction ray casting direction X X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction ray casting direction X Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a c...

Page 535: ...the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction Specify ray casting angle Specify an angle Style Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch boundary If you have selected no internal objects a hatching style has no effect Because you can define a precise set of boundaries it s often best to use the Normal style Enter hatching styl...

Page 536: ...his option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank You can also set the Outer style by adding O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary If HATCH encounters an internal island it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island You can also se...

Page 537: ...d boundaries are specified Create separate hatches Yes No current Enter y or n or press ENTER Draw Order Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects in front of all other objects behind the hatch boundary or in front of the hatch boundary HPDRAWORDER system variable Enter draw order do Not assign send to Back bring to Front send beHind boundary ...

Page 538: ... value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill Modify II toolbar Modify menu Object Hatch Shortcut menu Select a hatch object to edit and right click in the drawing area Click Hatch Edit Command line hatchedit Select hatch object Use an object selection method The Hatch Edit Dialog Box is displayed If you enter hatchedit at the Command p...

Page 539: ...t dialog box that are available Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill For more information see the Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box on page 493 Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties For information about these options see the Gradient Tab Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties Hatch Edit Dialog Bo...

Page 540: ...has several separate boundaries into individual hatch objects and changes hatch draw order For more information see the Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box on page 493 Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the selected object with the specified properties HATCHEDIT Command Line If you enter hatchedit at the Command prompt HATCHEDIT displays prompts on the command line Select hatch ob...

Page 541: ...l island it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island You can also set the Normal style by adding N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable Properties Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch For an explanation of setting pattern properties on the command line see HATCH Draw Order Sets the draw order of the hatch The following prompt ...

Page 542: ...to return to the previous prompt Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point Associates the selected hatch with that boundary Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area Associates the selected hatch with that boundary Separate Hatches Separates a single hatch object that has seve...

Page 543: ...ectangular extents of the hatch Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center Also can store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable HELP Displays Help Standard toolbar Help menu Help Command line help or or press F1 or help for transparent use To display Help for a menu open the menu and then press F1 Pressing F1 or entering help while a command ...

Page 544: ... use HIDE on objects whose layers have been turned off In order to hide text created with DTEXT MTEXT or TEXT the HIDETEXT system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value after HIDE before HIDE When using the HIDE command if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable is on face to face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines If the DISPSILH system varia...

Page 545: ...ADEMODE command is used Obscured Lines Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines An obscured line is a hidden line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype Color Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable Color Lists the available colors to apply to intersection polylines INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable Display Intersections Specif...

Page 546: ...ge Specifies the distance to shorten a haloed line A haloed line is shortened at the point where it will be hidden The distance is specified as a percentage of 1 inch and is not affected by zoom level HALOGAP system variable Include Text in HIDE Operations Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT DTEXT or MTEXT command are included during a HIDE command HIDETEXT system variable Face Inte...

Page 547: ...nk icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object To open the hyperlink right click the selected object and choose Hyperlink The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks If you enter hyperlink at the Command prompt HYPERLINK displays HYPERLINK Command Line including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink Insert Hype...

Page 548: ... Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files from which you can select one to link to Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages from which you can select one to link to Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks from which you can select one to link to File Opens the Browse the Web Select Hyperlink dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in w...

Page 549: ...r Hyperlink Sets a relative path for hyperlinks If you select this option the full path to the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink The relative path is set to the value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable or if no value is specified for HYPERLINKBASE to the current drawing path If this option is cleared the full path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink Convert D...

Page 550: ...d views within the current drawing from which you can select one to link to E mail Address Tab Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Specifies an email address to link to When the hyperlink is executed a new email is created using the default system email program 526 Chapter 10 ...

Page 551: ... Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box with one additional option Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects Select Place in Document Dialog Box Insert menu Hyperlink Shortcut menu To edit a hyperlink select an object that contains a hyperlink right click in the drawing area and choose Hyperlink Edit Hyperlink Command line hyperlink Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing The named l...

Page 552: ...e command line Insert Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area Enter hyperlink insert option Area Object Object Select a method for attaching a hyperlink Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer called URLLAYER If this layer doesn t exist in the current drawing it is created NOTE To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding rectangles in the drawing area or in your drawing p...

Page 553: ...net file or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing Enter a named location for the hyperlink such as a view in a drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file Enter named location none Enter the named location or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Enter description none Enter a descriptive name for the hyperlink or press ENTER to create the hyperlink...

Page 554: ...530 ...

Page 555: ...ext prompt that requests a point If you snap to an object in 3D space the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object IMAGE Manages images Reference toolbar Insert menu Image Manager Shortcut menu Select an image right click in the drawing area and choose Image Image Manager Command line image The Image Manager is displayed If you enter image at the Command prompt ...

Page 556: ... the image is attached inserted You can sort the list of images by name status loaded unloaded or not found type TIFF for example date size or the saved path and file name By default the list is alphabetical by image name To select multiple images hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column click that column s heading To change ...

Page 557: ...it and then choose Attach Tree view lists the image names only not file names and lists the image name just once regardless of how many times the image is attached insert You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again or by selecting it and then pressing F2 However you cannot select more than one image at a time Attach Displays the Select Image File dialog box See IMAGEATTAC...

Page 558: ...ls resolution default size in units and a preview image Image Found At Shows the path where the selected image was found If you select multiple images this field remains blank If the image file is not found in the path in the Saved Path column several other paths are automatically searched for the image file For the list of these paths and the order in which they are searched see Set Paths to Exte...

Page 559: ...nd erases all occurrences of the image Enter list of images to detach Enter an image name or enter to detach all images Path Updates the path name including file name associated with a particular image This option is useful if you change the location of an image file rename the file or replace an old image file with a new file for instance you can update image01 pcx and save it as image02 pcx Ente...

Page 560: ... name bmp If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing the following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy Image file name has already been loaded Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition Specify insertion point 0 0 Specify an insertion point Base image size Width current width Height current height current unit Specify scale factor Enter a value or press ...

Page 561: ... contrast and fade values of images Reference toolbar Modify menu Object Image Adjust Shortcut menu Select an image to adjust right click in the drawing area and choose Image Adjust Command line imageadjust Select image s Select one or more images The Image Adjust Dialog Box is displayed If you enter imageadjust at the Command prompt IMAGEADJUST displays IMAGEADJUST Command Line Image Adjust Dialo...

Page 562: ...ng the slider to the right increases the value Fade Controls the fading effect of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the more the image blends with the current background color A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color In plotting the background color for fade is white M...

Page 563: ...m 0 through 100 The greater the value the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color Enter contrast value 0 100 50 Enter a value Fade Controls the fading effect of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the more the image blends with the current background color A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background Changing the screen background c...

Page 564: ...s the parameters and details of attached images Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach either from the Select Image File dialog box an unattached image or from the list of previously attached images To add another instance of an image file that is already attached select the image name from the list and click OK Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box a Standard File Selection...

Page 565: ...mage size is automatically converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height No Path Specifies only the image file name The image file should be located in the folder with the current drawing file Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the image file Resolution Displays information about the vertical and horizontal resolution of the selected image Saved Path Displays ...

Page 566: ...mes the image width in AutoCAD units If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters centimeters inches or feet and the image has resolution information the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image If Specify On Screen is selected you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object w...

Page 567: ...the image while clipping is turned off clipping is automatically turned back on You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal and consists only of stra...

Page 568: ...press ENTER If you choose Yes the entire image is redrawn and the command continues if you choose No the command ends Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners The rectangle is always drawn parallel to the edges of the image Specify first corner point Specify a point Specify opposite corner point Specify a point IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and ...

Page 569: ...performance high quality images take longer to display Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing NOTE Images are always plotted using a high quality setting Draft Produces a lower quality display of the image High Produces a high quality display of the image IMPORT Imports files in various formats Insert toolbar Command line import The Impor...

Page 570: ...s the WMF In Options Dialog Box You can display this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS If FILEDIA 0 the following prompt is displayed Enter import file name Enter path and file name INSERT Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing Insert toolbar Insert menu Block Command line insert The Insert Dialog Box is displayed If you enter insert at the Command prompt INSERT displays INSER...

Page 571: ...Select Drawing File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box where you can select a block or drawing file to insert Factor Displays the unit scale factor which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units Path Specifies the path to the block Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert A lightning bolt icon in the lower right corner of the prev...

Page 572: ... the INSUNITS value for the inserted block X Sets the X coordinate value X Sets the X scale factor Y Sets the Y coordinate value Y Sets the Y scale factor Z Sets the Z coordinate value Z Sets the Z scale factor Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the block Scale Specifies the scale for the inserted block Specifying negative values for the X Y and Z scale factors inserts a mirror imag...

Page 573: ...nt editing session the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in the prompt Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups You can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Grouping Dialog Box Entering a tilde displays the Select Drawing File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes You can control block insertion behavior i...

Page 574: ... applied to all existing insertions of the block definition Press ESC when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a new block into the drawing List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing Insertion Point Specifies a location for the block or drawing Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER...

Page 575: ...ify a point Enter Z scale factor use X scale factor Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Specify rotation angle 0 Specify an angle or press ENTER Basepoint Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is dragged into position This does not affect the actual base point defined for the block refere...

Page 576: ...nsertion Point PScale Sets the scale factor for the X Y and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options under PSca...

Page 577: ... of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview Z scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options under PZ match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point PRotate Sets the rotation a...

Page 578: ...r you select Create New or Create from File Create New Opens the application that s highlighted in the Object Type list so that you can create a new object to insert Browse Displays the Browse dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you select a file to link or embed Display as Icon Displays the source application s icon in the drawing Double clicking the icon displays the embedde...

Page 579: ...t Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding To create an object to embed double click an application to open it On the application s File menu the Save option is replaced with a new Update option Choosing Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it Create from File Specifies a file to link or embed INTERFERE Creates a composite 3D solid from the commo...

Page 580: ...h selection sets INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set Select the second set of solids Use an object selection method or press ENTER second solid selected Pressing ENTER begins the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of interfering 3D solids and interf...

Page 581: ...tside of the intersection Solids Editing toolbar Modify menu Solids Editing Intersect Command line intersect Select objects Use an object selection method You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions and the common volume of two or more existing solids solid after INTERSECT solids before INTERSECT The select...

Page 582: ...ight Top Enter an option or press ENTER The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric If the snap style is Isometric Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressin...

Page 583: ...ts the top face of the cube called the top plane defined by the 30 degree and 150 degree axis pair Right Selects the right hand plane defined by the 90 degree and 30 degree axis pair Insert Object Dialog Box 559 ...

Page 584: ...560 ...

Page 585: ...must lie on the same plane parallel to the UCS XY plane Arc Select arcs to join to source or cLose Select one or more arcs and press ENTER or enter L The arc objects must lie on the same imaginary circle but can have gaps between them The Close option converts the source arc into a circle NOTE When joining two or more arcs the arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object Ellip...

Page 586: ...ains the objects you select Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 Off prompts are displayed on the command line JUSTIFYTEXT Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations Text toolbar Modify menu Justify Text Modify menu Object Text Justify Command line justifytext Select o...

Page 587: ...re described in the TEXT command The justification point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align Fit and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left BL multiline text attachment point 563 ...

Page 588: ...564 ...

Page 589: ...annotations objects sample layers dimensions Layer Properties Manager Format menu Layer Command line layer or layer for transparent use Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties You can add delete and rename layers change their properties or add descriptions Layer filters control which layers are displayed in the list and can also be used to make changes to more than one la...

Page 590: ...lected layers for deletion Layers are deleted when you click Apply or OK You can delete only unreferenced layers Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS layers containing objects including objects in block definitions the current layer and xref dependent layers Layers in a partially opened drawing are also considered referenced and cannot be deleted NOTE Be careful about deleting layers i...

Page 591: ...roup Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter New Layer Creates a new layer The list displays a layer named LAYER1 The name is selected so that you can enter a new layer name immediately The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list color on or off state and so on New Property Filter Displays the Layer Filter...

Page 592: ... open the Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box and view the definition of the filter If there are xrefs attached to the drawing an XREF node displays the names of all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref Layer filters defined in xref files are not displayed Tree View Shortcut Menu Provides commands for items selected in the tree view Visibility Changes the visibility state of all the...

Page 593: ...s on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer Thaw Clears Current VP Freeze for layers in the filter In the current viewport objects on the layer are displayed and plotted and hide other objects when you use HIDE This option does not thaw layers that are set to Off or Frozen in the drawing Isolate Gro...

Page 594: ...yer group filter Changing the properties of the layers in a layer group filter has no effect on the filter Rename Renames the selected filter Enter a new name Delete Deletes the selected layer filter You cannot delete the All All Used Layers or Xref filters This option deletes the layer filter but not the layers in the filter Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box where you can...

Page 595: ...2 to enter a new name On Turns the selected layers on and off When a layer is on it is visible and available for plotting When a layer is off it is invisible and not plotted even if Plot is on Freeze Freezes the selected layers in all viewports You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM PAN and many other operations improve object selection performance and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings...

Page 596: ...ayout viewport You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports Current VP Freeze is an override to the Thaw setting in the drawing That is you can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it s thawed in the drawing but you can t thaw a layer in the current viewport if it s frozen or off in the drawing A layer is not visible when it is se...

Page 597: ...new layer The list displays a layer named LAYER1 You can edit this layer name immediately The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list color on or off state and so on Delete Layer Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition You can delete only unreferenced layers Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS layers containing objects inclu...

Page 598: ...ck a filter to apply it to the list view Save Layer States Displays the New Layer State to Save Dialog Box in which you save the layer state and layer property settings of all layers in a drawing Restore Layer State Displays the Layer States Manager in which you can select a named layer state to restore settings of all layers in the drawing Restores only those layer state and property settings tha...

Page 599: ...ine and select a different setting Color Click the button to display the Select Color Dialog Box Freeze Click the Freeze or the Thaw icon Linetype Click the button to display the Select Linetype Dialog Box Lineweight Click the button to display the Lineweight Dialog Box Lock Click the Lock or the Unlock icon Name Use wild card characters to filter layer names For example enter mech to include all ...

Page 600: ...ows which layers will be displayed in the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager when you select this filter Layer Filter Examples Each example shows a layer filter definition that is set up in the Layer Filter Properties dialog box Example 1 The filter named In use Wall layers displays layers that meet all of the following criteria Are in use Have a name that contains the letters wall Are on ...

Page 601: ...Example 2 The filter named Red Yellow White displays layers that meet all of the following criteria Are on Are thawed Are red or yellow or white Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box 577 ...

Page 602: ...Layer States Manager Format menu Layer Command line layer or layer for transparent use Saves restores and manages named layer states 578 Chapter 13 ...

Page 603: ...rd file selection dialog box where you can load a previously exported layer state LAS file into the current drawing Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file Layer Settings to Restore Specifies the layer state settings and layer properties that are to be restored when the selected named layer state is restored When you save a named layer state on the Model tab th...

Page 604: ... settings Turn Off Layers Not Found in Layer State When you restore a named layer state turns off new layers for which settings were not saved so that the drawing looks the same way it did when the named layer state was saved New Layer State to Save Dialog Box Format menu Layer Command line layer or layer for transparent use Specifies a name and a description for the layer state defined in the Lay...

Page 605: ...types Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing Lineweight Dialog Box Format menu Layer Command line layer or layer for transparent use Displays the lineweight values available You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the User s Guide Lineweight Dialog Box 581 ...

Page 606: ...fault lineweight assigned when a layer is created is DEFAULT which plots to a default value of 0 01 inches or 0 25 mm LWDEFAULT system variable LAYER Command Line If you enter layer at the Command prompt LAYER displays prompts on the command line Current layer current Enter an option List Layers Make Set on page 583 New On Off Color Ltype Lweight Plot Pstyle Freeze Thaw Lock Unlock State NOTE The ...

Page 607: ...ype and a lineweight of DEFAULT If the layer exists but is turned off it is turned on Set Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already exist If the layer exists but is turned off it is turned on and made current A frozen layer cannot be made current Enter a layer name to make current or select object Enter a name or press ENTER and select an object New Creates...

Page 608: ...s for color current current Enter a name or a list of names separated by commas or press ENTER The color is assigned to the layer or layers and the layers are turned on To assign a color but turn off the layer precede the color with a minus sign Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer Enter a loaded linetype name or CONTINUOUS Enter a currently loaded linetype name enter or press ENTER ...

Page 609: ... name list or press ENTER The plot setting is assigned to the layer or layers Pstyle Sets the plot style assigned to a layer This option is not available if you are using color dependent plot styles in the current drawing the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1 See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects in the User s Guide Enter plot style or Normal Enter a name enter to list existing plo...

Page 610: ... and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified layer state name When saving a layer state you specify which layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored Enter new layer state name Enter a name and press ENTER Enter states to change On Frozen Lock Plot Newvpfreeze Color lineType lineWeight plotStyle Enter the settings that you want to save and then press...

Page 611: ...er state name or enter to see a list of saved layer state names Import Loads a previously exported layer state LAS file into the current drawing Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file Enter file name to import current Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state LAS file Enter name of layer state to export or Enter the layer state name or enter t...

Page 612: ...nter on or off or press ENTER When Layer Previous mode is on changes made to layers are tracked When Layer Previous mode is off changes made to layers are no longer tracked LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs Layouts toolbar Insert Menu Layout Command line layout Enter layout option Copy Delete New Template Rename Saveas Set on page 590 List Layouts set NOTE Many of these options are a...

Page 613: ...is displayed for selecting a DWT DWG or DXF file After you select a file the Insert Layouts dialog box is displayed which lists the layouts saved in the selected file After you select a layout the layout and all objects from the specified template or drawing file are inserted into the current drawing Rename Renames a layout The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to rename En...

Page 614: ...ut Wizard Tools menu Wizards Create Layout Command line layoutwizard The Layout Wizard is displayed Layout Wizard Command line layoutwizard The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout You can choose to create a new layout from scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout Depending on which plotting device is...

Page 615: ...ers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection filter The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the layer is referenced in the drawing A dark icon indicates that the layer is referenced a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced Unreferenced layers can be deleted from the drawing by right clicking in the Translate From list and ch...

Page 616: ... the new layer You cannot create a new layer with the same name as an existing layer Remove Removes the selected translation mapping from the Layer Translation Mappings list Save Saves the current layer translation mappings to a file for later use Layer mappings are saved in the DWG or DWS file format You can replace an existing file or create a new file The Layer Translator creates the referenced...

Page 617: ...x Tools menu CAD Standards Layer Translator Command line laytrans Controls the process of layer translation Force Object Color to BYLAYER Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the color assigned to its layer If this option is selected every object takes on the color of its layer If this option is cleared every object retains its original color Force Object Linetype to BYLAYER S...

Page 618: ...og file is created in the same folder as the translated drawing The log file is assigned the same name as the translated drawing with a log file name extension If the Write Transaction Log option is cleared no log file is created Edit New Layer Dialog Box Tools menu CAD Standards Layer Translator Command line laytrans Sets or modifies layer properties Color Specifies the layer color Linetype Speci...

Page 619: ...ines of text a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances or a block Enter first line of annotation text or options Enter text or press ENTER If you enter text at the Annotation prompt the text is inserted at the end of the leader line You are prompted for additional lines of text until you end the command by pressing ENTER twice If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without enter...

Page 620: ... and is associated to the leader line meaning that if the block moves the end of the leader line moves with it No hook line is displayed Enter block name or Enter a block name or enter to list all blocks in the drawing None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line Mtext Creates text using the In Place Text Editor when you specify an insertion point and a second point for t...

Page 621: ...ow None Exit Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt After each option the Specify Next Point prompt is redisplayed spline leader line straight leader line sample arrowheads no arrowhead Spline Draws the leader line as a spline The vertices of the leader line are the control points each of equal unit weight Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments A...

Page 622: ...urrent included angle current Select an object or DElta Percent Total DYnamic Select one object enter an option or press ENTER to end the command Delta Changes the length of an object by a specified increment measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection p...

Page 623: ...es the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total included angle of the arc Enter percentage length current Enter a positive nonzero value or press ENTER Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint Tot...

Page 624: ...selected arc Specify total angle current Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command object selected total angle Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints The other end remains fixed Select an object to change or Un...

Page 625: ...Lights option must be set to ON for lights to appear in your drawing Lights Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Manages lighting and controls the location color and intensity of lighting effects To display these lights you must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded Gouraud Shaded Flat Shaded Edges On or Gouraud Shaded Edges On Lights Lists all lights in the current drawing Lights Dialog Bo...

Page 626: ...otlight Dialog Box depending on the type of light you select Distant Light Emits parallel light beams in one direction Distant lights have no attenuation Emitted light remains at constant intensity no matter how far it travels Point Light Emits radiating light beams You can specify no attenuation or attenuation that is inverse linear or inverse square See Overview of Lights in Rendering in the Use...

Page 627: ...ur model Keep ambient light low to avoid saturating or dulling your image Intensity Adjusts the intensity of ambient light from no ambient light 0 to full brightness 1 Color Uses RGB values to control the color of ambient light The color swatch shows the current color New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Creates a new point light or modifies the selected p...

Page 628: ...mum lower left coordinate to the maximum upper right coordinate The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity If attenuation is inverse square maximum intensity is twice the square of the extents distance Position Modifies or displays the X Y Z coordinate location of the light and its target Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the poin...

Page 629: ...ays the Select Color Dialog Box True Color tab Select Indexed Displays the Select Color Dialog Box Index tab Shadow On Makes the point light cast shadows The type of shadow depends on the current renderer type and on the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options Dialog Box Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box which displays the X Y Z coordinat...

Page 630: ...ng New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Creates a new distant light or modifies the selected distant light Light Name Specifies the name of the light The name must be no more than eight characters long Intensity Sets the intensity or brightness of the light The intensity value can range from 0 off to 1 full intensity 606 Chapter 13 ...

Page 631: ...Sun Angle Calculator Displays the Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box in which you can specify a time and place so the renderer can calculate the position of the sun Azimuth Specifies the position of the distant light by using site based coordinates The Azimuth scroll bar ranges from 180 to 180 Values you enter are converted to this range For example if you enter 315 the scroll bar correctly displays ...

Page 632: ...om the light position you set using Azimuth and Altitude You can also enter values directly in X Y and Z When you use the light source vector to specify the distant light s direction the Azimuth and Altitude controls are updated to show the new position New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Creates a new spotlight or modifies the selected spotlight Light Name...

Page 633: ... spotlight at a distance of 4 units light is one quarter as strong The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the spotlight For example at a distance of 2 units from a spotlight light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight at a distance of 4 units light is one sixteenth as strong Modi...

Page 634: ...ecifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees The default is 44 degrees Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light which is also known as the field angle This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees The default is 45 degrees Attenuation Controls how light diminishes ove...

Page 635: ...pecify north in a user coordinate system UCS if there are any named in your drawing Select from the Use UCS list The Y axis in that UCS is used as the north direction Shadow Options Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Specifies the type of shadow Shadow Bounding Objects Prompts you to modify a selection set of objects whose bounding box is used to clip the shadow maps Shadow Optio...

Page 636: ...10 but usually values from 2 to 4 give the best results Shadow Volumes Ray Traced Shadows Produces volumetric shadows Photo Real renderer and raytraced shadows Raytrace renderer for this light Shadow maps are not available but the shadow map size and softness settings are retained Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box View menu Render Light Command line light Specifies a time and place so that the rende...

Page 637: ...graphic Location Dialog Box in which you can specify the sun s latitude and longitude indirectly by naming a city or pointing to a map Latitude Specifies the latitude You can enter a value or use the scroll bar Zero degrees indicates the equator 90 degrees indicates the pole in the current hemisphere north or south Longitude Specifies the longitude You can enter a value or use the scroll bar Zero ...

Page 638: ... currently selected city is displayed below the list If you select a map location while the Nearest Big City option is cleared no city name is displayed below the list Current Map Specifies the current map To change the map select another option from the list Latitude and Longitude Displays the location of the currently selected city or your most recent map selection You can also enter these value...

Page 639: ...Corner Specifies the lower left corner for the grid limits Specify upper right corner current Specify a point or press ENTER upper right lower left On Turns on limits checking When limits checking is on you cannot enter points outside the grid limits Because limits checking tests only points that you enter portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits Off Turns off limits ...

Page 640: ... line before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER If the most recently drawn line is an arc its endpoint defines the starting point of the line and the line is drawn tangent to the arc before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment which forms a closed loop of line segments You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two...

Page 641: ...nts in the order you created them LINETYPE Loads sets and modifies linetypes Format menu Linetype Command line linetype or linetype for transparent use The Linetype Manager is displayed If you enter linetype at the Command prompt LINETYPE displays LINETYPE Command Line Linetype Manager Format menu Linetype Command line linetype or linetype for transparent use Linetype Manager 617 ...

Page 642: ...bjects Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object s scale factor CELTSCALE system variable Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes which can be edited in the Details area Description Displays the description of the selected linetype which can...

Page 643: ...derscore _ Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma colon equal sign question mark asterisk less than and greater than symbols forward and back slashes vertical bar quote or back quote Name Displays the selected linetype name which can be edited The linetype name can include up to 255 characters Linetype names can contain letters digits blank spaces and the special characters dol...

Page 644: ...in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad lin or acadiso lin file and can be reloaded Show Details or Hide Details Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed Current Linetype Displays the current linetype name List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specif...

Page 645: ...ter the name of another LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File dialog box LINETYPE Command Line If you enter linetype at the Command prompt LINETYPE displays prompts on the command line Enter an option List Linetypes Create Load Set List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes After you select an LIN fi...

Page 646: ...al lines circles and arcs Only A type alignment is supported With A type alignment lines and arcs are guaranteed to start and end with a dash The A is automatically included in the definition If you use a text editor to create a linetype you must enter a at the beginning of the definition After creating a linetype you must load it to make it accessible You cannot create complex linetypes with LINE...

Page 647: ...enever you insert that block the objects inherit the linetype of the block LIST Displays database information for selected objects Inquiry toolbar Tools menu Inquiry List Command line list Select objects Use an object selection method The text window displays the object type object layer and X Y Z position relative to the current user coordinate system UCS and whether the object is in model space ...

Page 648: ...ab Options Dialog Box on page 762 to change the location of the log file Each drawing saves a log file with the extension log that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file Command line logfileon The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF command You ...

Page 649: ...e objects The object type is selected in the library list if the list is unavailable you cannot change the object type For a description of the available options see LSNEW In order to view changes made with the LSNEW LSEDIT and LSIB commands the view must be a non plan view use VPOINT or DDVPOINT and you must run the RENDER command You can also use SHADEMODE instead of RENDER but you must turn on ...

Page 650: ... changes made with the LSNEW LSEDIT and LSLIB commands the view must be a non plan view use VPOINT or DDVPOINT and you must run the RENDER command You can also use SHADEMODE instead of RENDER but you must turn on all the render options in the 3D Graphics System Configuration Dialog Box on page 802 Render Options area Delete Deletes the selected object from the library This does not delete the file...

Page 651: ... Enter an object name an image file name and an opacity map file name for your new object Open Displays a standard file selection dialog box Locate and select an LLI file to open a new library file The contents of the file appear in the Library Contents list Save Saves the current library file A standard file selection dialog box is displayed so that you can save the library under another name if ...

Page 652: ...w aligned they face the camera at 45 degree angles and you can t change their rotation When the object is fixed you can change its rotation Single Face Crossing Faces Specifies a single face object or a crossing face object A single face object is faster to render but not quite as realistic as a crossing face object especially for animation and raytraced shadows View Aligned Makes the object alway...

Page 653: ...xes on page 745 in which you can locate the file you want LSNEW Adds realistic landscape items such as trees and bushes to your drawings Render toolbar View menu Render Landscape New Command line lsnew The Landscape New Dialog Box is displayed Landscape New Dialog Box View menu Render Landscape New Command line lsnew Previews landscape objects defines the geometry and height of new objects and ins...

Page 654: ...g landscape objects With two related commands LSEDIT and LSLIB you can modify landscape objects and maintain landscape object libraries In order to view changes made with the LSNEW LSEDIT and LSIB commands the view must be a non plan view use VPOINT or DDVPOINT and you must run the RENDER command You can also use SHADEMODE instead of RENDER but you must turn on all the render options in the 3D Gra...

Page 655: ...s generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar objects When the View Aligned option is cleared the object maintains a fixed orientation This can be effective with planar objects like road signs that you don t want to view straight on Height Specifies the height of the landscape object in current drawing units The default is 20 and the height is always in the positive Z direction of the cu...

Page 656: ...nter lweight at the Command prompt LWEIGHT displays LWEIGHT Command Line Lineweight Settings Dialog Box Format menu Lineweight Shortcut menu Right click the Lwtbutton on the status bar and choose Settings Command line lweight or lweight for transparent use Sets the current lineweight sets the lineweight units controls the display and display scale of lineweights in the Model tab and sets the DEFAU...

Page 657: ...ts for Listing Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable Inches in Specifies lineweight values in inches Millimeters mm Specifies lineweight values in millimeters Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing If this option is selected lineweights are displayed ...

Page 658: ...nt lineweight current Enter Default Lineweight for new objects or List Lineweights Enter a valid lineweight or enter The current lineweight value is displayed if the value is not BYLAYER BYBLOCK or DEFAULT the value is displayed in millimeters or inches Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight Lineweight values consist of fixed settings including BYLAYER BYBLOCK and DEFAULT Values ar...

Page 659: ...lues in the current lineweight units NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier format the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights LWEIGHT Command Line 635 ...

Page 660: ...636 ...

Page 661: ...nts to them Markup Set List Control The Markup Set List control displays the name of the markup set or if no markup sets are open the Open option The Markup Set List control provides the following options None Indicates an individual markup that does not yet have an assigned status This is the default status for new markups Close Markup DWF Closes the selected marked up DWF and removes it from the...

Page 662: ...t node to open the originating drawing file for that drawing sheet For Review Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of For Review When you implement a markup you can change the status to For Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the changes to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup Markup Set Node Indicates the currently loaded markup set Markup Stat...

Page 663: ... are loaded into the Markup Set Manager Open Markup Opens the originating drawing file for the drawing sheet associated with the selected markup and makes that layout the active layout in the drawing area The associated markup DWF file is also opened as a read only reference in the drawing area Open Markup DWF Opens the Open Markup DWF dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you c...

Page 664: ...F file is created that contains any changes you made to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups Republish Markup DWF Opens the Select DWF File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select the previously published DWF to overwrite or enter a new name for the DWF file When you click Select a new DWF file is created that contains any changes you made to the ...

Page 665: ...arked up DWF file Republish Markup DWF Provides options for republishing the marked up DWF file If any sheets were added to the DWF file in Autodesk DWF Composer those sheets will not be included in the republished DWF file View Redline Geometry Displays or hides redline markup geometry in the drawing area When this button is displayed as selected redline markup geometry is displayed in the drawin...

Page 666: ...he following shortcut menu options Markup Shortcut Menu Options Drawing Sheet Node Right clicking a drawing sheet node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options Markup Shortcut Menu Options Markup Node Right clicking an individual markup node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options Show All Sheets Hide Non Markup Sheets Displays all sheets in the mar...

Page 667: ...le regions only those that are coplanar with the first selected region are accepted MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window and then asks if you want to write the mass properties to a text file Write analysis to a file N Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter y MASSPROP prompts you to enter a file name The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected objects ...

Page 668: ...rent UCS this coordinate is a 3D point If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS the additional properties shown in the following table are displayed Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Description Mass property A value used when computing the distributed loads such as fluid pressure on a plate or when calculating the forces inside a bending or twisting beam The ...

Page 669: ...d Centroid The mass moments of inertia which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis such as a wheel rotating about an axle The formula for mass moments of inertia is Moments of inertia mass_moments_of_inertia object_mass radius axis 2 Mass moments of inertia unit is mass grams or slugs times the distance squared Property used to determine the forces causin...

Page 670: ... surface area of solids LENGTH LENGTH Bounding box radii of gyration centroid and perimeter LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH Moments of inertia products of inertia and principal moments DENSITY LENGTH LENGTH MATCHCELL Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells Shortcut menu With a table selected and a cell selected right click and click Match Cell Command line matchcell Select source...

Page 671: ... the command Settings Displays the Property Settings Dialog Box in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects By default in the Property Settings dialog box all object properties are selected for copying Property Settings Dialog Box Modify menu Match Properties Command line matchprop or painter or matchprop for transparent use Specifies which basic properties ...

Page 672: ...ewports Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object Available for all objects Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object If you are working in color dependent plot style mode PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 this option is unavailable Available for all objects Polyline In addition to basic object properties changes ...

Page 673: ...er space viewport to match those of the source viewport on off display locking standard or custom scale shade plot snap grid and UCS icon visibility and location The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze thaw state of the layers are not transferred to the destination object MATLIB Imports and exports materials to and from a library of materials Render toolbar View menu Rend...

Page 674: ...aterials in the Current Library list removes selection from all items selected in the Current Drawing list and vice versa Open Displays the Library File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box which lists MLI files Purge Deletes all unattached materials from the Current Drawing list Save Saves the changes to the MLI file in the current folder Save As Displays the Library File dialog box a ...

Page 675: ...o the Current Drawing list If you try to import a material already in the Current Drawing list the Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box is displayed Export Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Drawing list to the Current Library list If you try to export a material already in the Current Library list the Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box is displayed Delete Deletes...

Page 676: ...eared and you enter different names for the materials under Old Material in List and New Material from Library the library material is added to the Current Drawing list Transfer Attachments Attaches the object to the material being imported from the library If this option is cleared the object remains attached to the material in the Current Drawing list Material Names Modifies the names of the old...

Page 677: ...g list If this option is cleared and you enter different names under Old Material in Library and New Material from List the material is added to the Current Library list Material Names Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being exported OK Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box OK to All Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box MEASU...

Page 678: ... Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex the first one drawn Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle If the snap rotation angle is 0 then the measuremen...

Page 679: ...attributes these attributes are not included MENU Loads a customization file Command line menu The Select Customization File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Enter or select a customization file name When you press ENTER or choose Open the named file is loaded A customization file is an XML based file containing the menus toolbars tool palettes and other interface ele...

Page 680: ...d Unloads the customization group selected in the Customization Groups list MENULOAD Command Line When FILEDIA is set to 0 off MENULOAD displays the following prompt on the command line Enter name of customization file to load Enter a file name MENUUNLOAD Unloads partial customizaiton files Command line cuiunload The Load Unload Customizations Dialog Box is displayed which has the same options as ...

Page 681: ... inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded Insertion Point Specifies a location for the blocks Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors Enter Y scale factor use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle 0 The rotation angle sets the angle ...

Page 682: ...ter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor If you enter c you specify a corner point The specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors Specify Y scale factor or use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter Z scale factor use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotatio...

Page 683: ...layed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance X Sets the X scale factor Specify X scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Specify rotation angle 0 The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows 1 Enter a positive value Enter number of columns 1 Enter a positive value ...

Page 684: ... the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows 1 Enter a positive value Enter number of columns 1 Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and ...

Page 685: ...re than one column and no unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance XYZ Specify X scale factor or Corner 1 Specify a nonzero value enter c or press ENTER You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point If you specify a corner point the specified point and the block in...

Page 686: ...1 Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate PY Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview Y scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corne...

Page 687: ...irror image copy of objects Modify toolbar Modify menu Mirror Command line mirror Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror line Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line Specify a point objects selected 1 2 The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored For mirroring in 3D ...

Page 688: ...red just like any other object When MIRRTEXT is off 0 text is not reversed before mirroring after mirroring MIRRTEXT 1 after mirroring MIRRTEXT 0 MIRROR3D Creates a mirror image of objects about a plane Modify menu 3D Operation Mirror 3D Command line mirror3d Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror plane 3 points or Object Last Z Axis V...

Page 689: ... n or press ENTER If you enter y the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted If you enter n or press ENTER the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane Specify point on mirror plane Specify a point 1 Specify point on Z axis no...

Page 690: ... XY YZ ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes XY YZ or ZX through a specified point Specify point on XY YZ ZX plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER 1 1 1 xy yz zx Delete source objects Yes No N Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter y the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted If you enter n or press ENTER the reflected obje...

Page 691: ... 3 2 1 MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections breaks and vertices Modify menu Object Multiline Command line mledit The Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Boxis displayed If you enter mledit at the Command prompt MLEDIT displays MLEDIT Command Line Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box Modify menu Object Multiline Command line mledit Modifies multiline objects The dialog box displays tools with sample images in f...

Page 692: ...round multiline Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The closed cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed 668 Chapter 14 ...

Page 693: ...her multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box 669 ...

Page 694: ...yed first mline selected second mline selected result First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed 670 Chapter 14 ...

Page 695: ...t Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again mline selected result Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box 671 ...

Page 696: ...r multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again first mline selected second point selected result Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again first mline selected second point selected result Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again 672 Chapter 14 ...

Page 697: ...played Undo Undoes the closed tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Undo Undoes the open tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Undo Undoes the merged tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Undo Undoes the corner joint The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Undo Removes the added vertex The Select Mline prompt is displayed Undo Re...

Page 698: ...intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Merged Cross Creates a merged cross intersection between two multilines The order in which you select the multilines is not important Select first mline Select a multiline Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The merged cross intersection is completed and ...

Page 699: ...llowing prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Merged Tee Creates a merged tee intersection between two multilines The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline Select first mline Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The merged tee intersection is completed and th...

Page 700: ...line The vertex nearest to the selected point is deleted and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Cut Single Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline Select mline Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point and the following prompt is displayed Select second point Specify the second ...

Page 701: ...e weld and the following prompt is displayed Select second point Specify the end of the weld on the multiline The multiline is welded and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u MLEDIT Command Line If you enter mledit at the Command prompt MLEDIT displays prompts on the command line For more information about these command line options see the Mul...

Page 702: ...its intersection with the second multiline MT Creates a merged tee intersection between two multilines The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline CJ Creates a corner joint between multilines The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection AV Adds a vertex to a multiline DV Deletes a vertex from a multiline CS Creates a visual break in a selected ...

Page 703: ...ify a point or enter u If you create a multiline with two or more segments the prompt includes the Close option Specify next point or Close Undo Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline The previous prompt is displayed Close C...

Page 704: ...fied points zero Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points bottom Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline This scale does not affect linetype scale Enter mline scale current Enter a scale or press ENTER The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition A scale factor of 2 produc...

Page 705: ...at has already been loaded or that s defined in a multiline library MLN file you ve created List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles MLSTYLE Creates modifies and manages multiline styles Format menu Multiline Style Command line mlstyle Displays the Multiline Style Dialog Box Multiline Style Dialog Box Format menu Multiline Style Command line mlstyle Creates modifies saves and loads multiline ...

Page 706: ...e the STANDARD multiline style the current multiline style or a multiline style that is in use Description Displays the description of the selected multiline style Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file Modify Displays the New Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes in which you can modify a selected multiline style You canno...

Page 707: ...style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased The default file name is acad mln Set Current Sets the current multiline style for subsequently created multilines Select a name from the Styles list and choose Set Current NOTE You cannot make a multiline style from an xref the current style Styles Displays a list of multiline styles that are loaded in the drawing The l...

Page 708: ...s are unavailable until you enter a new name and click Continue Start With Determines the multiline style from which to start the new one To save time choose a multiline style that is similar to the one that you want to create New Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes Format menu Multiline Style Command line mlstyle Sets the properties and elements for a new multiline style or changes them for an ex...

Page 709: ...e other than STANDARD Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps without Angle with Angle Color Displays and sets the color for elements in the multiline style When you choose Select Color the Select Color Dialog Box is displayed Delete Deletes an element from the multiline style New Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes 685 ...

Page 710: ...ys an arc between pairs of inner elements If there s an odd number of elements the center line is unconnected For example if there are six elements inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4 If there are seven elements inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5 Element 4 is left unconnected without Inner Arc with Inner Arc Line Displays a line segment across each end of...

Page 711: ...element in the multiline style 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 45 a four element multiline each element offset from 0 0 Offset Color Ltype Displays all the elements in the current multiline style Each element in the style is defined by its offset from the middle of the multiline its color and its linetype Elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets Outer Arc Displays an arc between the ou...

Page 712: ...isplay Joints off Display Joints on Elements Sets element properties such as the offset color and linetype of new and existing multiline elements Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box Format menu Multiline Style Command line mlstyle Loads a multiline style from an MLN file The default file name is acad mln If acad mln does not exist or if it exists but cannot be found click File to specify another file...

Page 713: ...pace The Model tab automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1 and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing Once you ve completed your drawing you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or between the Model tab and a layout tab use the LAYOUTREGENCT...

Page 714: ...interpreted as a relative X Y Z displacement For example if you specify 2 3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position Displacement Specify displacement last value Enter coordinates to represent a vector The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction MRE...

Page 715: ... resolution than was used for creating the slide black lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image To avoid this situation use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when creating slides MSPACE Switches from paper space to a model space viewport Command line mspace Commands operate in either model space or paper space You use model space the Model tab to do draft...

Page 716: ...ner Specify opposite corner or Height Justify Line spacing Rotation Style Width After you specify the point for the opposite corner the In Place Text Editor is displayed If you specify one of the other options or if you enter mtext at the Command prompt MTEXT bypasses the in place text editor and displays additional MTEXT Command Line In Place Text Editor Draw menu Text Multiline Text Command line...

Page 717: ...rmatting for selected text Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object The current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system variable Character formatting for font height and bold or italic attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an existing multiline text object Stacking underlining and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new style is applied Styles that h...

Page 718: ... height of selected text If the current text style has no fixed height the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts Italic Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text...

Page 719: ... the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings The characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom right aligned the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top left aligned Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of ...

Page 720: ...lt setting Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line See MTEXT Command Line on page 707 for an illustration of the nine justification options Top Middle Bottom Sets justification and alignment for the top and bottom text boundaries Top Left is the default setting See MTEXT Command Line on page 707 for an illustration of the nine j...

Page 721: ...Displays the Field Dialog Box where you can select a field to insert in the text When the dialog box closes the current value of the field is displayed in the text Uppercase Changes the selected text to uppercase Lowercase Changes the selected text to lowercase Overline Places a line over selected text Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position Symbols can also be insert...

Page 722: ...displayed as c and the nonbreaking space is displayed as a hollow rectangle Both are displayed correctly in the drawing The nonbreaking space is unavailable in double byte operating systems Oblique Angle Determines the forward or backward slant of the text The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees Entering a value between 85 and 85 makes the text oblique A positive obliquing angle slants tex...

Page 723: ...matting and style properties but you can edit and format the imported text in the editor After you select a text file to import you can replace either selected text or all text or append the inserted text to text selected within the text boundary The file size for imported text is limited to 32 KB The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER When black characters are inserted and the ba...

Page 724: ...t formatting as you type The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets period comma close parenthesis close angle bracket close square bracket and close curly bracket Use Tab Delimiter Only Limits the Allow Auto list and Allow Bullets and Lists options List formatting is applied to text only when the space after the letter number or bul...

Page 725: ... to the top and bottom text boundaries See MTEXT Command Line on page 707 for an illustration of the nine justification options Find and Replace Displays the Replace Dialog Box Select All Selects all the text in the multiline text object Change Case Changes the case of selected text Options are Uppercase and Lowercase AutoCAPS Converts all new and imported text to uppercase AutoCAPS does not affec...

Page 726: ... first line of the current paragraph or selected paragraphs Paragraph Sets indentation for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs Tab Stop Position Sets tab positions for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs The list below the text box shows the current tab stops Set Copies the value in the Tab Stop Position box to the list below the box Clear Removes the selected tab stop from the l...

Page 727: ... Dialog Box Draw menu Text Multiline Text Command line mtext Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text Find Next Starts a search for the text string in Find What To continue the search click Find Next again Find What Defines the text string to search for Match Case Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text string is identical to the case of the text in Fin...

Page 728: ...Edits the text stack type alignment and size of stacked text To open the Stack Properties dialog box select the stacked text right click and click Properties on the shortcut menu You can edit the upper and lower text separately The Appearance options control the stack style position and text size of the stacked text Text Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction Bottom Aligns the b...

Page 729: ... AutoCAD 2000 or a later release Fraction Horizontal Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a horizontal line Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number There is no line between the numbers Top Aligns the top of the fraction with t...

Page 730: ...meric characters immediately before and after the carat slash and pound characters To stack nonnumeric characters or text that includes spaces select the text and choose the Stack button AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Draw menu Text Multiline Text Command line mtext Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction Converts the slash character to a diagonal...

Page 731: ... Remove Leading Blank Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction This option is available only when AutoStacking is turned on NOTE To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have suppressed automatic display select stacked text right click and click Properties on the shortcut menu In the Stack Properties dialog box click AutoStack MTEXT Command Line If you enter mtext at the...

Page 732: ...fication points on the rectangle The justification point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle Text is center left or right justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the middle the top or the bottom of t...

Page 733: ...right justified spills up and down bottom left left justified spills up Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom or baseline of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to e...

Page 734: ...ght of the object or text style Enter line spacing factor or distance current Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single line spacing Single spacing is 1 66 times the height of the text characters You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing For example specify single spacing by entering 1x or specify double spacing by entering...

Page 735: ...y a width of 0 word wrap is turned off and the width of the multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text You can end a line of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER To end the command press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt Symbols and Special Characters You can enter the following special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string Or in ...

Page 736: ... Angle U E100 Boundary line U 2104 Centerline U 0394 Delta U 0278 Electrical phase U E101 Flow line U 2261 Identity U E200 Initial length U E102 Monument line U 2260 Not equal U 2126 Ohm U 03A9 Omega U 214A Plate property line U 2082 Subscript 2 U 00B2 Squared U 00B3 Cubed 712 Chapter 14 ...

Page 737: ...ext command until canceled Command line multiple Enter command name to repeat The command that you enter is repeated until you press ESC Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name any parameters must be specified each time MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes NOTE You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command function MVIEW Creates and controls layout vi...

Page 738: ... of a rectangular viewport Specify opposite corner On Makes a selected viewport active An active viewport displays objects in model space The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP you must turn one off to make another one active Select objects Select one or more ...

Page 739: ...r in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space Viewport View Locking ON OFF Enter on or off Select objects Select one or more viewports Object Specifies a closed polyline ellipse spline region or circle to convert into a viewport The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices It can be self intersecting and it can contain an arc as well as li...

Page 740: ...f the previous segment is an arc the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport Restore Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command Enter viewport configuration name or ACTIVE Enter enter a name or press ENTER Specify first corner or Fit Fit Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Pos...

Page 741: ...tical Above Below Left Right Enter an option or press ENTER The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds The other options split the area into three viewports one large viewport and two smaller ones The Above Below Left and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed Specify first corner or Fit Fit Specify a point or press ENTER 3 right First Corner Positi...

Page 742: ...ne the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the MVSETUP on the Model Tab or on a MVSETUP on a Layout Tab On the Model tab you set the units type drawing scale factor and paper size from the command line using MVSETUP Using the settings you provide a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits On a layout tab you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and cr...

Page 743: ... Enter the scale factor Enter a value Enter the paper width Enter a value Enter the paper height Enter a value A bounding box is drawn and the command ends MVSETUP on a Layout Tab When the TILEMODE system variable is off or when you enter y or press ENTER at the Enable Paper Space prompt the following prompt is displayed Enter an option Align Create Scale Viewports Options Title Block Undo on page...

Page 744: ...fy a point in the viewport to be panned Vertical Alignment Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically with a base point in another viewport This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented vertically Otherwise the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport Specify base point Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned Specify a point in the vi...

Page 745: ...cify a point for the first corner Opposite corner Specify a point for the opposite corner Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants You are prompted for the area to be divided and the distance between the viewports Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport s Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner Specify a point for the opposite corner Spe...

Page 746: ...ach direction the following prompts are displayed Specify distance between viewports in X direction 0 0 Specify a distance Specify distance between viewports in Y direction 0 0 Specify a distance The array of viewports is inserted into the defined area Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session Scale Viewports Adjusts ...

Page 747: ...ts Xref exit Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block Enter layer name for title block or for current layer Enter an existing or a new layer name enter a period for the current layer or press ENTER Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted Set drawi...

Page 748: ...this sheet Specify new origin point for this sheet Specify a point Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session Insert Displays title block options Available title blocks 0 None 1 ISO A4 Size mm 2 ISO A3 Size mm 3 ISO A2 Size mm 4 ISO A1 Size mm 5 ISO A0 Size mm 6 ANSI V Size in 7 ANSI A Size in 8 ANSI B Size in 9 ANSI C Size in 10 ANSI D Size in 11 ANSI E Size in 12 Arch Engi...

Page 749: ...rompts Specify lower left corner Specify a point Specify upper right corner Specify a point A line similar to the following example is added after the last entry in the mvsetup dfs default file A E 24 x 18in arch b dwg 1 12 0 99 0 00 18 63 17 02 0 00 in The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in inches or in millimeters The units field allows title blocks crea...

Page 750: ...726 ...

Page 751: ...ion Dialog Boxes If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1 a NEW Command Line If you set FILEDIA to 0 this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting Create New Drawing Dialog Box File menu New Command line new Defines the settings for a new drawing Start from Scratch creates a new drawing using either imperial or metric default settings Use a Template creates a new drawin...

Page 752: ...e direction and area for your new drawing The Advanced Setup wizard also changes settings such as text height and snap spacing to an appropriate scale Browse Displays the Select a Template File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes where you can access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the imperial measurement sys...

Page 753: ...e Description dialog box to specify the text that you want to display here See the SAVEAS command Tip Displays a description of the selected measurement setting Wizard Description Displays a description of the selected wizard Use a Template Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file Template drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers dimension style...

Page 754: ...Use a Wizard Sets up a drawing using a step by step guide You can choose from two wizards Quick Setup and Advanced Setup Quick Setup Wizard File menu New Command line new 730 Chapter 15 ...

Page 755: ...vailable Two of them Engineering and Architectural have a specific base unit inches assigned to them You can select from other measurement styles that can represent any convenient unit of measurement NOTE You control the precision the number of decimal places displayed in all measurements by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command The default precision used by Quick Setup is four 0 00...

Page 756: ...y grid dots when the grid is turned on When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off with the LIMITS command Advanced Setup Wizard File menu New Command line new Defines the units angle angle measure angle direction and area of you...

Page 757: ...See Units on page 5 on page 731 for more information The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional size for displaying linear measurements Angle Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which the program displays angles Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals Deg Min Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds East Specifies the compa...

Page 758: ...or clockwise Area Indicates the width and length in full scale units of what you plan to draw This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off...

Page 759: ...Command line newsheetset The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new sheet set You can choose to create a new sheet set from existing drawings or use an existing sheet set as a template on which to base your new sheet set NEW Command Line 735 ...

Page 760: ...736 ...

Page 761: ...NTER polyline with offset polyline The OFFSET command repeats for convenience To exit the command press ENTER Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object Select object to offset or Exit Undo exit Select one object enter an option or press ENTER to end the command Specify point on side to offset or Exit Multiple Undo exit or next object Specify a point 1 on the...

Page 762: ...command Specify through point or Exit Multiple Undo exit or next object Specify a point 1 through which you want the offset object to pass or enter a distance object selected through point object offset 1 Exit Exits the OFFSET command Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode which repeats the offset operation and accepts additional through points Undo Reverses the previous offset Erase Erases the ...

Page 763: ...ialog Box is displayed If there is no existing OLE link in the drawing OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is not displayed To specify a different source application for an embedded object right click the embedded object and click Convert on the shortcut menu to display the Convert Dialog Box See Link and Embed Data OLE in the User s Guide Links Dialog Box Edit men...

Page 764: ...n about linked objects The information listed depends on the type of link To change information for a linked object select the object Open Source Opens the source file and highlights the portion linked to the AutoCAD drawing Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type of object Type Displays the format type Update Now Updates the selected links Update Automatic Updates the link a...

Page 765: ... the type of object you are converting or activating Display as Icon Displays the source application s icon in the drawing Double clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information Object Type Displays a list of available object types If you select AutoCAD Entities text is converted to a multiline text mtext object a spreadsheet is converted to a table object and a bitmap file is conver...

Page 766: ...cation From File Specifies an icon from a file valid types include EXE DLL and ICO Label Specifies a caption for the icon The file type is displayed unless you specify otherwise Browse Displays the Browse dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select an icon from a file OLESCALE Controls the size scale and other properties of a selected OLE object Shortcut menu With an OL...

Page 767: ...of the fonts in an OLE object to a text height in the drawing The OLE object is scaled automatically to accommodate the size of the text OLE Font Displays a list of the fonts used in the OLE object OLE Point Size Displays a list of the point sizes available for the selected font Reset Restores the OLE object to its size when it was inserted in the drawing Text Height Sets a text height for the fon...

Page 768: ...h the PURGE command OPEN Opens an existing drawing file Standard toolbar File menu Open Command line open The Select File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed You can open and load a portion of a drawing including geometry on a specific view or layer In the Select File dialog box click the arrow next to Open and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read Only to display the...

Page 769: ...g them to a new position To add a new icon to Places drag a folder from the list Right click in Places to display a shortcut menu with options for adding removing and modifying icons or restoring default icons that have been removed You cannot remove the Autodesk Buzzsaw icon Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes Add Current Folder to Places Adds an icon for the selecte...

Page 770: ...ialog box where you can add a Buzzsaw location shortcut Double clicking Add a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut opens the Log In To Buzzsaw dialog box where you can register for a free 30 day trial subscription to the service Also the first time you access Buzzsaw your default web browser opens with the project hosting page displayed If you already have a project hosting account clicking Buzzsaw shows all...

Page 771: ...ile using the original file name Options Provides additional options for certain standard file selection dialog boxes Partial Open Displays the Partial Open Dialog Box You can open and load a portion of a drawing including geometry on a specific view or layer PARTIALOPEN cannot be used with a drawing that is not in the latest drawing file format Partial Open Read Only Opens the specified drawing p...

Page 772: ...hether the last used paths in each particular standard file selection dialog box are stored across sessions use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable Back Returns to the previous file location Up One Level Navigates one level up in the current path tree Search the Web Displays the Browse the Web dialog box from which you can access and store files on the Internet Delete Deletes the selected file or ...

Page 773: ...iles of Type Filters the list of files by file type When you are saving files Files of Type specifies the format in which the file is saved Select Initial View Displays the specified view when you open the drawing if the drawing contains more than one named view Update Sheet and View Thumbnails Now Reflects the current setting of the UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable This option temporarily override...

Page 774: ...aw Site dialog box where you can change settings for the selected shortcut New Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box Rename Renames the shortcuts you select Log In to Buzzsaw Dialog Box Logs in to the Buzzsaw site in order to browse to a specific location Buzzsaw Site Specifies the location of the most recently used Buzzsaw site Enter any existing address or site name 750 Chapter 16 ...

Page 775: ...en drawings or save drawings at this location If a sheet set is open the Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your current sheet set The only Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated with the current sheet set Browse Displays the Select a Buzzsaw Project or Folder dialog box which you can use to find and select a project or folder Buzzsaw Site Displays the name of the current Buzzs...

Page 776: ...nt Buzzsaw site Enter a Name for this Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Specifies the name of the shortcut Select a Buzzsaw Site Project or Folder Lists the most recently opened projects and folders in the site Select a Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box Specifies a Buzzsaw project or folder to save with a Buzzsaw location shortcut List of Buzzsaw Projects and Folders Specifies Buzzsaw projects or folders that c...

Page 777: ...ample BC matches ABC 3BC and so on The type of files to include in the search is determined by Type so you don t need to enter a file extension in Named For example to find house102 dwg enter house and set Type to Drawing dwg Type Specifies the type of files to include in the search Available file types are limited to those supported by the specific standard file selection dialog box Look In Speci...

Page 778: ... click the arrows to choose dates from a calendar To navigate the calendar use the left and right arrows or click the month and year During the Previous N Months Searches for files created or modified within a specified number of months During the Previous N Days Searches for files created or modified within a specified number of days Find Now Searches for files using the criteria specified in bot...

Page 779: ... Box Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection dialog boxes To browse the sites that you add select FTP from the Places list in the standard file selection dialog box Name of FTP Site Specifies the site name for the FTP location for example ftp autodesk com Log On As Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific user name Anonymous Logs y...

Page 780: ...sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file selection dialog boxes URL Displays the URL for the selected FTP site Partial Open Dialog Box File menu Open Command line open Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry to load into the selected drawing When working with large drawing files you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to...

Page 781: ... view You can right click and use the shortcut menu to load no geometry into the drawing Layer Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a list of the objects that are on each layer A layer index can be used to locate what portion of the drawing is read this minimizes the time required to open the drawing Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing Load All Loads ge...

Page 782: ...eometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing NOTE When a drawing is partially open named objects are still loaded into the file along with the specified geometry from the selected view All views are still available in the partially open drawing but only geometry from the view specified to load is displayed in the drawing Layer Geometry to Load Displays...

Page 783: ...ss If you partially open a drawing that contains a bound xref only the portion of the xref that is loaded defined by the selected view is bound to the partially open drawing Open Opens the drawing file loading only combined geometry from the selected view and layers OPEN Command Line When FILEDIA is set to 0 zero OPEN displays the following prompt on the command line Enter name of drawing to open ...

Page 784: ...ata DST file to load sheet set information into the Sheet Set Manager OPTIONS Customizes the program settings Tools menu Options Shortcut menu Right click in the command window or with no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Options Command line options The Options Dialog Box is displayed Options Dialog Box Tools menu Options Shortcut menu Right click ...

Page 785: ...g An option saved with the drawing affects only the current drawing An option saved in the registry and not displayed with a drawing file icon affects all drawings in a work session Options that are saved in the registry are saved in the current profile The Options dialog box includes the following tabs Files Tab Options Dialog Box on page 762 Display Tab Options Dialog Box on page 767 Open and Sa...

Page 786: ...lso lists optional user defined settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes in which you can specify a new location for the folder or file selected in the list Support File Search Path Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts customization files p...

Page 787: ...ifies the names and locations of various types of files Alternate Font File Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file If you click Browse the Alternate Font Dialog Box is displayed from which you can choose an available font FONTALT system variable Configuration File Specifies the location o...

Page 788: ...location of the main customization file acad cui Main Dictionary Specifies the dictionary to use for checking spelling DCTMAIN system variable Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier The default name is the drawing name plus the plt file extension The default name used wit...

Page 789: ...nsion or printer description files Sheet Set Template File Location Specifies the path to locate sheet set template files used by the Create Sheet Set wizard Text Editor Application Specifies the text editor application to use for editing multiline text objects MTEXTED system variable Help and Miscellaneous File Names Specifies the names and locations of various types of files Text Editor Dictiona...

Page 790: ... creating dynamic blocks Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File on the Open and Save tab LOGFILEPATH system variable Plot and Publish Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish Tab Options Dialog Box Temporary Drawing File Lo...

Page 791: ...ted with i drop content When the location is not specified the location of the current drawing file is used Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box depending on what you selected in the List of Folders and Files Add Adds a search path for the selected folder Remove Removes the selected search path or file Move Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search p...

Page 792: ...smoothness of circles arcs and ellipses A higher number produces smoother objects but more time is required to regenerate pan and zoom the objects You can improve performance by setting this option to a low value such as 100 for drawing and increasing the value for rendering The valid range is 1 to 20 000 The default setting is 1000 This setting is saved in the drawing To change the default for ne...

Page 793: ...dashed line and is determined by the selected output device Objects drawn outside of the printable area are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted Display Screen Menu Displays the screen menu on the right side of the drawing area The screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings If you use the screen menu you should set the Windows system font setting to a font and fon...

Page 794: ...drawing FACETRES system variable Segments in a Polyline Curve Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each polyline curve The higher the number the greater the performance impact Set this option to a low value such as 4 to optimize performance for drawing Values range from 32767 to 32767 The default setting is 8 This setting is saved in the drawing SPLINESEGS system variable Show Page...

Page 795: ...the crosshairs are visible when situated at the edge of the drawing area The default size is 5 percent CURSORSIZE system variable Display Resolution Controls the quality of the display of objects If you set high values to improve display quality the impact on performance is significant Display Performance Controls display settings that affect performance Reference Edit Fading Intensity Specifies t...

Page 796: ...pecify You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable SAVEFILE read only stores the name of the Autosave file NOTE Automatic save is disabled when the Block Editor on page 139 is open Minutes Between Saves When Automatic Save is on specifies how often the drawing is saved SAVETIME system variable Create Backup Copy with Each Save pecifies whether a bac...

Page 797: ...custom objects or when you invoke one of the application s commands Demand Load Xrefs Controls demand loading of xrefs Demand loading improves performance by loading only the parts of the referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current drawing XLOADCTL system variable Disabled Turns off demand loading Enabled Turns on demand loading and improves performance Select the Enabled setting to enhanc...

Page 798: ...f you set the value to 20 or less performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows significantly ISAVEPERCENT system variable Maintain a Log File Writes the contents of the text window to a log file To specify the location and name of the log file use the Files tab in the Options dialog box You can also set the log file location by using the LOGFILEMODE system variable The LOGFILENAME system vari...

Page 799: ...tions Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file Show Proxy Information Dialog Box Specifies whether a warning is displayed when you open a drawing that contains custom objects PROXYNOTICE system variable Thumbnail Preview Settings Displays the Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box which controls whether thumbnail previews are updated when the drawi...

Page 800: ...hat have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format Add or Configure Plotters Displays the PLOTTERMANAGER a Windows system window You can add or configure a plotter with the Plotter Manager Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log Specifies that a log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved Edge of Paper Specifies that the plot offset is relative ...

Page 801: ... If Possible Uses the paper size specified in the Page Setup Dialog Box as long as the selected output device can plot to this paper size If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size the program displays a warning message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file PC3 or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer You can ...

Page 802: ...r earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format The list displays any plotter configuration files PC3 found in the plotter configuration search path and any system printers that are configured in the system Use Last Successful Plot Settings Sets the plotting settings to match those of the last successful plot Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects Launches the applicati...

Page 803: ...ame at the Windows Command Prompt NOTE When PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are used in a script SCR file the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored and PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground Plot and Publish Log File Controls options for saving a plot and publish log file as a comma separated value CSV file that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program This log file co...

Page 804: ...plot area is from the lower left corner of the printable area or from the edge of the paper PLOTOFFSET system variable Plot Stamp Settings Opens the Plot Stamp Dialog Box Plot Style Table Settings Opens the Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box System Tab Options Dialog Box Controls system settings Current 3D Graphics Display Controls settings that relate to system properties and configuration of t...

Page 805: ...tes the drawing the first time you switch to each tab For the remainder of the drawing session the display list is saved to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch to those tabs Cache Model Tab and Last Layout For the Model tab and the last layout made current saves the display list to memory and suppresses regenerations when you switch between the two tabs For all other layouts re...

Page 806: ... In the 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box you set options that affect the way objects are displayed and system resources are used in the 3D Orbit view The options you set also affect the way objects are shaded with SHADEMODE Regen When Switching Layouts Regenerates the drawing each time you switch tabs Show All Warning Messages Displays all dialog boxes that include a Don t Display This ...

Page 807: ...dified objects when you switch to that tab Changing these settings can improve performance LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable NOTE The effectiveness of changing these settings depends on several factors See LAYOUTREGENCTL for more information dbConnect Options Controls options that relate to database connectivity General Options Controls general options that relate to system settings Live Enabler Opti...

Page 808: ...ursor and tooltip whenever the pointing device pauses over an object that contains a hyperlink The shortcut menu provides additional hyperlink options when you select an object that contains a hyperlink and then right click in the drawing area If this option is cleared hyperlinks in the drawing are ignored Field Update Settings Displays the Field Update Settings Dialog Box FIELDEVAL system variabl...

Page 809: ...option SHORTCUTMENU system variable Running Object Snap Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times You can also select this option by setting OSNAPCOORD to 0 Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area Displays a shortcut menu in the drawing area when you right click the pointing device If this option is cleared right click is interpreted as ENTER Source Content Units Sets the u...

Page 810: ...Redo for Zoom and Pan Hidden Line Settings Displays the Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box where you can change the display properties of hidden lines Lineweight Settings Displays the Lineweight Settings Dialog Box Use this dialog box to set lineweight options such as display properties and defaults and also to set the current lineweight Edit Scale List Displays the Edit Scale Dialog Box Use this dia...

Page 811: ...king vectors automatically when the aperture moves over an object snap AutoSnap Marker Color Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker Display AutoSnap Aperture Box Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box The aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object APBOX system variable Display AutoSnap Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip The ...

Page 812: ...ong angles Polar angles are 90 degree divisors such as 45 30 and 15 degrees You can disable Display Polar Tracking Vector by setting TRACKPATH to 2 Ignore Hatch Objects Specifies that object snaps ignore hatch patterns when object snapping is turned on OSNAPHATCH system variable Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off The magnet is an automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the crosshai...

Page 813: ... the method of displaying alignment vectors in a drawing Aperture Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap aperture When Display AutoSnap Aperture Box is selected or when APBOX is set to 1 the aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object The aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap ...

Page 814: ...ou select an associative hatch If this option is selected boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative hatch You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 2 Enable Grip Tips Displays grip specific tips when the cursor hovers over a grip on a custom object that supports grip tips This option has no effect on standard objects GRIPTIPS system variable E...

Page 815: ...color a grip displays when the cursor rolls over the grip If you choose Select Color from the color list the Select Color Dialog Box is displayed GRIPHOVER system variable Implied Windowing Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects that are entirely inside the window s boundaries Drawing fro...

Page 816: ... Press and Drag Draws a selection window when you select a point and dragging the pointing device to a second point If this option is cleared you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points with the pointing device PICKDRAG system variable Selected Grip Color Determines the color of a selected grip If you choose Select Color from the color list the Select Color Dialog Box is displ...

Page 817: ... and the Select Objects prompt is displayed SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable When No Command Is Active Displays selection previewing when no commands are active SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable Selection Modes Controls settings that relate to object selection methods Grip Size Controls the display size of grips GRIPSIZE system variable grip sizes Grips Controls the settings that relate to grips Gr...

Page 818: ...ile select a profile and choose Set Current Delete Deletes the selected profile unless it is the current profile Export Exports a profile as a file with an arg extension so the file can be shared with other users You can import the file on the same computer or a different computer Import Imports a profile a file with an arg extension created by using the Export option 794 Chapter 16 ...

Page 819: ...w or with no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Options Command line options Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT system variable If you do not specify an alternate ...

Page 820: ... Options Options dialog box Display tab Shortcut menu Right click in the command window or with no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Options Command line options Sets the display color of the main program window elements Model Tab Displays the current settings for window elements in model space To change the color of a Model tab window element click...

Page 821: ... setting is RGB 255 252 229 Command Line Background Specifies the background color of the command window The default color setting is the Windows standard window color Command Line Text Specifies the text color of the command window The default setting is the Windows standard window text color Layout Tabs Background Paper Specifies the window color in all layouts This option depends on the Display...

Page 822: ... book colors If you select a new color for a window element the new setting is displayed in the Model Tab or Layout Tabs preview image Default All Sets all window elements back to the default color settings Default One Element Sets the selected window element back to the default color setting Command Line Window Font Dialog Box Tools menu Options Options dialog box Display tab Shortcut menu Right ...

Page 823: ...lected right click in the drawing area and choose Options Command line options Controls whether thumbnail previews are updated when the drawing is saved Generate Sheet Sheet View and Model View Thumbnails Updates preview images in the Sheet Set Manager Sheet thumbnails are displayed on the Sheet List tab sheet view thumbnails on the View List tab and model space view thumbnails on the Resource Dra...

Page 824: ...pplied when the drawing is plotted Changing the default plot style setting by using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing it affects only new drawings or drawings created in an earlier release of AutoCAD that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format The default plot style setting is Use Color Dependent Plot Styles The Plot Style Control on the Properties toolbar i...

Page 825: ...nt property settings in the plotted drawing If this option is selected a plot style is created for each color setting You can also select this option by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 1 This setting is saved with the drawing Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles as the default you can convert it to Use Named Plot Styles using the CONVERTCTB and CONVERTPSTYLES co...

Page 826: ...ct one or all of the available options If you select more than one option the display mode changes first to the most detailed option and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option or the option that requires the least amount of system resources Specifies whether the tessellations remain static or dynamic Dynamic tessellation draws multiple tessellation lines and enables the tessellat...

Page 827: ...m this dialog box You can also control shortcut menus by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable Turn on Time Sensitive Right Click Controls right click behavior A quick click is the same as pressing ENTER A longer click displays a shortcut menu You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds Default Mode Determines what happens when you right click in the drawing area when no objects ...

Page 828: ... menu Shortcut Menu Enabled When Command Options Are Present Enables the Command shortcut menu only when options are currently available on the command line On the command line options are enclosed in square brackets If no options are available right clicking is the same as pressing ENTER Edit Mode Determines what happens when you right click in the drawing area when one or more objects are select...

Page 829: ...ive and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and click Options Command line options Controls the appearance of selection previewing Selection Preview Effect Controls the appearance of objects during selection preview PREVIEWEFFECT system variable Advanced Options Displays the Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box Both Displays thickened dashed lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over ...

Page 830: ...dow selection areas SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system variable Thicken Displays thickened lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over an object This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked PREVIEWEFFECT system variable Window Selection Color Controls the background for window selection areas WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable Selection Area Effect Controls the appearanc...

Page 831: ...his option is off by default PREVIEWFILTER system variable Tables Excludes tables from selection previewing This option is on by default PREVIEWFILTER system variable Xrefs Excludes objects in xrefs from selection previewing This option is on by default PREVIEWFILTER system variable Add Profile Dialog Box Tools menu Options Options dialog box Profiles tab Shortcut menu Right click in the command w...

Page 832: ...dated description for the selected profile Profile Name Assigns a new profile name to the selected profile Transparency Dialog Box Shortcut menu Right click the title bar on the dockable window and click Transparency Controls transparency for dockable windows Less More Sets the degree of transparency for the window With the slider at Less the window is opaque with the slider at More the window has...

Page 833: ...ion relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle Ortho mode is ignored in perspective views Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis ORTHO adjusts to the current snap rotation regardless of the UCS OSNAP Sets running object snap modes Object Snap toolbar Tools Menu Drafting Settings Shortcut menu Press SHIFT while righ...

Page 834: ...er ENDpoint NEArest NODe MIDpoint PARallel QUAdrant INTersection INSertion EXTension PERpendicular APParent Intersection For a description of each of these object snap modes see the Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings Dialog Box The OSNAP command also presents the following additional options QUIck Snaps to the first snap point found Quick must be used in conjunction with other object snap m...

Page 835: ...ommand line pagesetup The Page Setup Manager is displayed Page Setup Manager Layouts toolbar File menu Page Setup Manager Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager Command line pagesetup Specifies the page setup for the current layout or drawing sheet You can also create named page setups modify existing ones or import page setups from other drawings Page...

Page 836: ...rent layout Current Page Setup Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout Displays Not applicable if the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager because you cannot apply a page setup to an entire sheet set after it has been created Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup Device Name Displays the...

Page 837: ...e setups that are available to apply to the current layout or when you publish a sheet set If the Page Setup Manager is opened from a layout the current page setup is selected by default The list includes the named page setups and layouts that are available in the drawing Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are enclosed in asterisks with the named page setup in parentheses for exa...

Page 838: ...plays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup Page Setups Displays the current page setup sets a different page setup as current creates a new page setup modifies an existing page setup and imports page setups from other drawings Selected Page Setup Details Displays information about the selected page setup Display When Creating a New Layout Specif...

Page 839: ...ou click OK the Page Setup Dialog Box is displayed with the settings of the selected page setup which you can modify as necessary If you open the New Page Setup dialog box from the Sheet Set Manager only the named page setups in the page setup overrides file are listed Default Output Device Specifies that the default output device specified in the Plot and Publish Tab Options Dialog Box is set as ...

Page 840: ...yout and plotting device settings The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings The title of the Page Setup dialog...

Page 841: ...es of plot styles assigned to objects are displayed on the screen DPI Specifies the dots per inch for shaded and rendered views up to the maximum resolution of the current plotting device This option is available if you select Custom in the Quality box Edit Displays the Plot Style Table Editor in which you can view or modify plot styles for the currently assigned plot style table Extents Plots the...

Page 842: ...e number of inches millimeters or pixels equal to the specified number of units Inch mm pixel Specifies inches or mm for display of units in the Plot dialog box The default is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected Pixel is available only when a raster output is selected Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the to...

Page 843: ...tly available plot style tables If you select New the Add Plot Style Table wizard is displayed which you can use to create a new plot style table The wizard that is displayed is determined by whether the current drawing is in color dependent or named mode Partial Preview Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area The tooltip displays t...

Page 844: ...otter Configuration Editor the Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box Page Setup is displayed Quality Specifies the resolution at which shaded and rendered viewports are plotted You can select from the following options Draft Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe Preview Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the curre...

Page 845: ...port and then on the Tools menu click Properties From the Model tab you can select from the following options As Displayed Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen Wireframe Plots objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen Hidden Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen Rendered Plots objects as re...

Page 846: ...he full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection If the selected plotter doesn t support the layout s selected paper size a warning is displayed and you can select the plotter s default paper size or a custom paper size A default paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add a Plotter wizard For information about this wizard see Set Up P...

Page 847: ...relative size of drawing units to plotted units The default scale setting is 1 1 when plotting a layout The default setting is Fit to Paper when plotting from the Model tab NOTE If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area the layout is plotted at 1 1 regardless of the setting specified in Scale NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Sets the p...

Page 848: ...write the PC3 file or specify a new file name for the modified PC3 file Save Changes to the Following File Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed To preserve the original PC3 file specify a new file name Import Page Setups Dialog Box File menu Page Setup Manager Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Page Setup Manager Command line pagesetup Displays t...

Page 849: ...or layout of the page setup in the drawing from which you are importing the page setup Name Specifies the name of the page setup available to import Plot Size Displays the plot size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup Plotter Displays the type of plot device specified in the currently selected page setup Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified...

Page 850: ...transparent use The cursor changes to a hand cursor By holding down the pick button on the pointing device you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor When you reach a logical extent edge of the drawing space a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge Depending on whether the logical...

Page 851: ...mount to move the drawing or the location in the drawing to be moved depending on how you respond to the next prompt Specify second point Press ENTER or specify a point 2 before PAN after PAN If you press ENTER the drawing is moved by the amount you specified in the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt For example if you specify 2 2 at the first prompt and press ENTER at the second prompt the...

Page 852: ...n Dialog Boxes Any information that is loaded into the file using PARTIALOAD cannot be unloaded not even with UNDO If you enter partiaload at the Command prompt PARTIALOAD displays PARTIALOAD Command Line Partial Load Dialog Box File Menu Partial Load Command line partiaload Displays the views and layers available for specifying additional geometry to load into a partially open drawing You can sel...

Page 853: ... geometry from at least one layer into the drawing If you do not select any layers to load no geometry is loaded at all including geometry from the selected view A warning is issued if you do not select any layers to load into the drawing You can also right click and choose Clear All from the shortcut menu to specify that no geometry is loaded from any layer Layer Name Displays the layer names in ...

Page 854: ...Any information currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded View Name Displays the currently selected view Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing Layer Geometry to Load Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file The geometry on selected layers is loaded into the drawing including both model space and paper space geometr...

Page 855: ...rom multiple layers into the drawing use a comma between layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No Yes Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing List Layers Displays a list of...

Page 856: ...oaded into the drawing List Layers Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing Enter one or more layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No Yes Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter yes no external references are loaded into the drawing If you ente...

Page 857: ...N and choosing Partial Open in the Select File dialog box to display the Partial Open Dialog Box When you are running a script and using PARTIALOPEN FILEDIA can be set to 0 or 1 When FILEDIA is set to 0 and you enter partialopen or partialopen at the Command prompt PARTIALOPEN displays prompts on the command line Enter name of drawing to open Enter a drawing name and press ENTER Enter tilde at the...

Page 858: ...e the layer names with a comma Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No N Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing List Views Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing Enter a view name Enter layers to load or none Enter a layer name enter or press ENTER Layers to Load Loads geometry...

Page 859: ...awing PASTEASHYPERLINK Inserts data from the Clipboard as a hyperlink Edit menu Paste as Hyperlink Command line pasteashyperlink Select objects The selected objects are inserted in the drawing as hyperlinks PASTEBLOCK Pastes copied objects as a block Edit menu Paste as Block Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Paste as Block Command line pasteblock Spec...

Page 860: ...lso use CTRL V to run PASTECLIP If the cursor is in the drawing area PASTECLIP behaves as described If the cursor is on the command line text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt PASTEORIG Pastes a copied object in a new drawing using the coordinates from the original drawing Edit menu Paste to Original Coordinates Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area...

Page 861: ...he metafile graphics in the Clipboard are converted to AutoCAD objects If the metafile graphics are not converted the metafile is displayed as an OLE object Display as Icon Inserts a picture of the application icon instead of the data To view or edit the data double click the icon Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing as an embedded object Paste Link Pastes the conten...

Page 862: ... configuration file from which you want to import settings You can view and modify the plot settings prior to importing them The imported settings can be applied to the current Model tab or layout tab PEDIT Edits polylines and three dimensional polygon meshes Modify II toolbar Modify menu Object Polyline Shortcut menu Select a polyline to edit right click in the drawing area and choose Polyline Ed...

Page 863: ...Creates the closing segment of the polyline connecting the last segment with the first The polyline is considered open unless you close it using the Close option before Close after Close Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option Join Adds lines arcs or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fi...

Page 864: ...s selected open polyline other objects selected polyline and objects joined Width Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline Specify new width for all segments You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a segment varying width uniform width Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen If you have...

Page 865: ...x Enter an option Next Previous Go eXit current Enter an option or press ENTER If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline the result is one truncated polyline If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint you cannot use Break Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from t...

Page 866: ...s to Edit Vertex mode Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex Specify location for new vertex Specify a point 1 before Insert after Insert marked vertex 1 Move Moves the marked vertex Specify new location for marked vertex Specify a point 1 marked vertex before Move after Move 1 Regen Regenerates the polyline 842 Chapter 17 ...

Page 867: ...o eXit current Enter an option or press ENTER before Straighten after Straighten Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select replaces them with single straight line segments and returns to Edit Vertex mode If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X mark...

Page 868: ...th for next segment current Specify a point enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width for next segment starting width Specify a point enter a value or press ENTER You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width marked vertex segment width changed Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode Fit Creates an arc fit polyline a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices The curve p...

Page 869: ... resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex All intermediate width information is ignored Once spline fit the frame if displayed is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on spline fitting When a spline fit curve is fit to a polyline the spline fit curve s frame is stored...

Page 870: ...iscards the spline information of the original and any added polylines Once the Join operation is complete you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the frame of the spline whether visible or not The Break option discards the spline The Insert Move Straighten and Wi...

Page 871: ...ve can take longer to generate SPLINESEGS set to 1 SPLINESEGS set to 10 To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline change SPLINESEGS and respline the curve You do not have to decurve it first Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subs...

Page 872: ...with the first The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline The polyline is considered closed unless you open it with Open Edit Vertex Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments that follow it Enter a vertex editing option Next Previous Break Insert Move Regen Straighten eXit current Enter an option o...

Page 873: ...does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline the polyline is truncated If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline or ...

Page 874: ... entering go without moving the X marker the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0 Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode Spline Curve Fits a 3D B...

Page 875: ...pt is displayed Enter an option Edit vertex Smooth surface Desmooth Mclose Nclose Undo Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command Mclose and Nclose are replaced by Mopen and Nopen if the polygon mesh is currently closed in the M or N direction Edit Vertex Edits individual vertices of a polygon mesh that can be seen as a rectangular M by N array where M and N are the dimensions specified in ...

Page 876: ...start to the end of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Right Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the N direction The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M direction The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Down Moves the X marker to ...

Page 877: ...ne and Bezier Bezier cubic B spline quadratic B spline original polygon Desmooth Restores the original control point polygon mesh Mclose Closes the M direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M direction closed M direction Mopen Opens the M direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M direction Nclose Closes the N direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N ...

Page 878: ...mpt is repeated until you press ENTER If you press ENTER on a blank line you are prompted for the vertices to be assigned to each face Define Faces Enter a vertex number or Color Layer Enter a vertex number or enter an option Vertex Number You define each face by entering vertex numbers for all the vertices of that face Pressing ENTER after the prompt causes the program to prompt for the vertex nu...

Page 879: ...an be created with layer and color properties different from their parent object New color Truecolor COlorbook BYLAYER Enter a standard color name or a color number from 1 through 255 enter t enter co or press ENTER You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index a color name or number a true color or a color from a color book You return to the previous prompt Layer Faces created with PFACE ado...

Page 880: ...hat the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS current UCS UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display Enter name of UCS or Enter a name or enter to list all UCSs in the drawing If you enter at the prompt the following prompt is displayed Enter UCS name s to list Enter a name or enter to list all UCSs in the drawing UCS 856 Chapter 17 ...

Page 881: ...ose on page 862 Halfwidth Length Undo on page 863 Width on page 863 Specify a point 2 or enter an option 1 2 The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polylin...

Page 882: ... ce for the Center object snap enter cen or center 2 Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment The arc segment starts at the last point tangent to the previous segment of the polyline The previous prompt is repeated Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point Specify included angle angle Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments Entering a negative ...

Page 883: ...gment Specify center point of arc Specify a point 2 Specify endpoint of arc or Angle Length Specify a point 3 or enter an option 3 2 Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point Specify included angle Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment If the previous segment is an arc the new arc segme...

Page 884: ...th Enter a value or press ENTER The starting half width becomes the default ending half width The ending half width becomes the uniform half width for all subsequent segments until you change the half width again The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line half width Typically the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled No beveling is per...

Page 885: ...cify direction of chord for arc current Specify an angle or press ENTER Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three point arc Specify second point on arc Specify a point 2 Specify end point of arc Specify a point 3 3 2 Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment Specify starting width current Enter a value or pre...

Page 886: ...ose Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the polyline creating a closed polyline Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its edges Specify starting half width current Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half width current Enter a value or press ENTER The starting half width becomes the default ending half wi...

Page 887: ...ed to the polyline Width Specifies the width of the next line segment Specify starting width current Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width starting width Enter a value or press ENTER width The starting width becomes the default ending width The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again The starting and ending points of wide line...

Page 888: ...yed Click OK to begin plotting with the current settings If you enter plot at the Command prompt PLOT displays PLOT Command Line Plot Dialog Box File menu Plot Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot Command line plot Specifies device and media settings and plots your drawing The title of the Plot dialog box indicates the name of the current layout 864 Chapter 17 ...

Page 889: ...You can display more options in the Plot dialog box by clicking the More Options button Plot Dialog Box 865 ...

Page 890: ...t settings in the Plot dialog box by clicking Add Add Displays the Add Page Setup Dialog Box in which you can save the current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup You can modify this page setup through the Page Setup Manager Center the Plot Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper This option is not available when Plot Area is set to Layo...

Page 891: ...rently assigned plot style table Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects All geometry in the current space is plotted The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale Inch and Units boxes Hide Paperspace Objects Sp...

Page 892: ...odel tab plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits If the current viewport does not display a plan view this option has the same effect as the Extents option Name Displays the name of the current page setup Name Lists the available PC3 files or system printers from which you can select to plot the current layout An icon in front of the device name identifies it as a PC3 file...

Page 893: ...lot Stamp On Turns on plot stamping Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and or logs it to a file Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp Dialog Box in which you can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp such as drawing name date and time plot scale and so on To open the Plot Stamp dialog box select the Plot Stamp On option and then click ...

Page 894: ...t Object Lineweights is automatically selected also Plotter Displays the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page Properties Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor PC3 editor in which you can view or modify the current plotter configuration ports device and media settings ...

Page 895: ...exact scale for the plot Custom defines a user defined scale You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches or millimeters equal to the number of drawing units Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale Shade Plot Specifies how...

Page 896: ...the drawing that you specify When you select Window the Window button becomes available Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted or enter coordinate values Specify first corner Specify a point Specify other corner Specify a point X Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option...

Page 897: ... BMP or TIFF file the size of the plot is specified in pixels not in inches or millimeters Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies to plot This option is not available when you plot to file Plot Area Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted Under What to Plot you can select an area of the drawing to be plotted Plot Offset Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower...

Page 898: ...lick Exit on the shortcut menu Apply to Layout Saves the current Plot dialog box settings to the current layout More Options Controls display of additional options in the Plot dialog box Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Shaded Viewport Options Plot Options Drawing Orientation Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Sets the plot style table edits the plot style table or creates a new plot style table Sha...

Page 899: ...signments Shaded Viewport Options Plot Options Drawing Orientation Add Page Setup Dialog Box File menu Plot Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot Command line plot Saves the current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup You can modify this page setup through the Page Setup Manager New Page Setup Name Specifies a name for the new page setup You can m...

Page 900: ...t Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Plot Command line plot The Plot Job Progress dialog box provides information about the status and progress of your plot job Cancel Job Cancels the plot job Cancel Sheet Cancels the plot of the sheet currently being processed Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box Displays the device driver name that is stored in the PC3 file...

Page 901: ...C3 file to be substituted for the missing printer specified in your PC3 file Select None if you don t want to make any substitution If you select None the other settings for the current layout remain unchanged If you select a plotter or printer that uses a different driver than the one specified in the original PC3 file the following configuration information may change when the PC3 file is saved ...

Page 902: ...ot to a file Yes No current Enter file name dwgname layoutname plt Save changes to layout Yes No No Proceed with Plot Yes No Y For information about these prompts see the description for Yes Yes Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are plotting Enter a layout name or current Specify the name of the layout tab you want to plot Enter an output device name or current S...

Page 903: ...lots the view in the current viewport on the Model tab or the current view in the layout depending on which tab you select to plot Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport except objects on frozen layers From a layout tab plots all the geometry in paper space The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting If you plot the drawing s extents with a perspecti...

Page 904: ...etting is Fit when plotting a Model tab Enter plot offset x y or Center current Specify the plot offset in either the X or Y direction or enter c to center the plot on the paper Plot with plot styles Yes No current Specify whether to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles the following prompt is displayed Enter ...

Page 905: ...ompt is displayed Enter file name dwgname layoutname plt Enter a file name Save changes to page setup Or set shade plot quality Yes No Quality No If you enter y the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved If you enter q you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given the option of providing a custom dpi Then you are prompted to save the page setup with the added qual...

Page 906: ...ster device color 7 is always used for plot stamping If you enter plotstamp at the Command prompt PLOTSTAMP displays PLOTSTAMP Command Line Plot Stamp Dialog Box Command line plotstamp Specifies the information for the plot stamp Plot Stamp Fields Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp The selected fields are separated by commas and a space Add Edit Displays the User ...

Page 907: ... Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp information Path Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file Preview Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and rotation val...

Page 908: ...ngs of the operating system when the program is installed Advanced Displays the Advanced Options Dialog Box in which you can set the location text properties and units of the plot stamp You can also create a log file and set its location User Defined Fields Dialog Box Command line plotstamp User defined fields are created and edited using the User Defined Fields dialog box which is displayed when ...

Page 909: ... stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing is added to this file Each drawing s plot stamp information is a single line of text The plot stamp log file can be placed on a network drive and shared by multiple users Plot stamp information from each user is appended to the plot log file Font Specifies the TrueType font you want to apply to the text used for the plot stamp information Heigh...

Page 910: ... Rotates the plot stamp upside down X Offset Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area depending on which setting you specify If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper size If the offset value positions the plot stamp...

Page 911: ...tamp units from metric to imperial caused the plot stamp to be plotted 25 4 times larger and if you changed to raster the plot stamp was reduced to a small dot Now when you change the unit of measurement the underlying value stays the same how the size and location coordinates are displayed changes Log File Location Writes the plot stamp information to a log file instead of or in addition to stamp...

Page 912: ...tamp information to a log file rather than applying this information to the current plotted drawing The default log file is plot log unless you specify another file path Write plot stamp to log file Yes No Yes Enter log file path plot log Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page based on offset orientation and relationship to either the printable area or the border of the pap...

Page 913: ...ine or to wrap the text to two lines The placement and offset values you specify for this plot stamp must accommodate the text wrapping and the text height Enter font name Enter a font name Enter text height 0 1500 Enter a value Place plot stamp on single line Yes No No Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset Y offset and height You can define units using inches millimeters or pixels En...

Page 914: ...ommand line plotstyle Specifies the plot style for new objects Active Plot Style Table Sets the plot style table attached to the current layout A plot style table is a collection of plot style definitions Attached To Displays the tab Model tab or layout tab that the plot style table is attached to Current Plot Style Displays the current plot style Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Editor in whi...

Page 915: ... lineweight end styles join styles and fill styles Select Plot Style Dialog Box Command line plotstyle Specifies the plot style to be assigned Active Plot Style Table Sets the plot style table attached to the current drawing A plot style table defines plot styles Attached To Displays the tab Model tab or layout tab that the plot style table is attached to Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Edito...

Page 916: ...le Current plot style is current Enter an option Current List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table Current Specifies the plot style to use for new objects PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager where you can add or edit a plotter configuration File menu Plotter Manager Command line plottermanager The Plotter Manager is displayed where you can perform the followin...

Page 917: ...iguration custom properties initialization strings calibration and user defined paper sizes You can drag these configuration options from one PC3 file to another You can start the Plotter Configuration Editor with any of the following methods Double click a PC3 file in Microsoft Windows Explorer or right click the PC3 file and click Open By default PC3 files are stored in the Plotters folder To fi...

Page 918: ...al options may be available on the Device and Document Settings tab For example when you configure a nonsystem plotter you can modify the pen characteristics General Tab Plotter Configuration Editor Ports Tab Plotter Configuration Editor on page 896 Device and Document Settings Tab Plotter Configuration Editor on page 897 General Tab Plotter Configuration Editor Contains basic information about th...

Page 919: ...n HDI driver file version number AutoCAD specialized driver files UNC name of the network server if the plotter is connected to a network server I O port if the plotter is connected locally Name of the system printer if the configured plotter is the system printer PMP Plot Model Parameters file name and location if a PMP file is attached to the PC3 file Plotter Configuration Editor 895 ...

Page 920: ...hether you want to plot through a port plot to a file or use AutoSpool See Use AutoSpool in the Driver and Peripheral Guide If you plot through a parallel port you can specify the timeout value If you plot through a serial port you can change the baud rate protocol flow control and input and output timeout values AutoSpool Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing AutoSpool is specified on th...

Page 921: ...n of available ports both local and network If the port is a network port the name of the network printer is also displayed Show All Ports Shows all available ports on the computer regardless of the ports available on the plotter Device and Document Settings Tab Plotter Configuration Editor Controls many of the settings in the PC3 file Click the icon for any of the nodes to view and change the spe...

Page 922: ...ia settings using the Custom Properties node Custom Paper Sizes Nonsystem Printers Only Creates a customized paper size or changes the printable area of a standard or nonstandard paper size With the Custom Paper Size wizard you can create a new paper size or select from a list of available paper sizes from a PMP file if the plotter is not a Windows system printer If the plotter is a Windows system...

Page 923: ...short side of the paper Long Side Places the binding margin on the long side of the paper Filter Paper Sizes Filters the list of paper sizes displayed for the plotting device selected in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes The list of paper sizes is displayed on the Plot Settings tab in the Plot dialog box and on the Layout Settings tab in the Page Setup dialog box Select the paper sizes you want...

Page 924: ...ar as an option for system printers that do not actually support the feature Please check your printer s documentation to determine if merge control is supported Modify Standard Paper Sizes Adjusts the printable area for standard paper sizes to match the printer s capabilities You can t create custom paper sizes for Windows system printers using the Plotter Configuration Editor List of Standard Pa...

Page 925: ...cify a color and width To optimize pen performance you can specify a speed NOTE This information is required the physical pen information cannot be detected automatically Color Specifies the colors of the pens in your plotter The pen color that closely matches the object s color is selected You can assign colors to your pens that correspond to each object s color Use the Color list to select one o...

Page 926: ...P file from the PC3 file you are editing Use the Detach button to break the association between the PMP file and the PC3 file Attach Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file You can reuse calibration and custom paper size data stored in the PMP file Save PMP Saves a PMP file to a new file in the AutoCAD 2006 drv folder Detach Detaches the PMP file associated with the PC3 file you are editing Post Initi...

Page 927: ...ition on the slider that balances output quality with memory use and plotting speed when plotting OLE objects Position the slider at None to disable OLE object printing Degrading the image quality lets you plot in less time Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory and plotting speed Trade off Specifies where to compromise quality if you can t output at the highest q...

Page 928: ...n of the configured plotter Changing the DPI resolution changes the options available in the Dithering list A higher resolution setting uses more memory and takes longer to plot than a lower resolution setting Dithering Specifies a dithering choice for non pen based plotters Some dithering choices cause slower plotting Physical Pen Configuration Node for Pen Plotters Only Controls the specific pen...

Page 929: ...Defined Paper Sizes Calibration Node Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file calibrates the plotter and adds deletes revises or filters custom paper sizes You can also modify standard paper sizes This node accesses the Plotter Calibration and Custom Paper Size wizards If the plotter you are using has been calibrated a Plotter Model Parameter PMP file contains that calibration information If the PMP fi...

Page 930: ...ry slow set the timeout value higher than the default 30 seconds If you begin to receive numerous timeout prompts your timeout setting is probably too low Timeout Specifies an amount of time to wait before retrying Transmission Retry Specifies the timeout value in milliseconds Settings for COM Port Dialog Box File menu Plotter Manager Command line plottermanager Specifies the baud rate protocol fl...

Page 931: ...ports CTS Enables Clear To Send handshaking This monitors pin 5 of a 25 pin serial port or pin 8 of a 9 pin serial port CTS is an input bit monitored for an output from the plotter or printer DSR Enables Data Set Ready handshaking This monitors pin 6 of a 25 pin serial port or pin 6 of a 9 pin serial port DSR is an input bit monitored for an output from the printer or plotter RLSD Enables Received...

Page 932: ...ata Terminal Ready output pin This sends a signal to the printer or plotter on pin 20 of a 25 pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9 pin serial port PNGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format Command line pngout The Create Raster File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Enter the file name in the dialog box Select objects or all objects and...

Page 933: ...trol the appearance of point objects PDMODE values 0 2 3 and 4 specify a figure to draw through the point A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed 2 3 4 1 0 Specifying the value 32 64 or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point in addition to the figure drawn through it 32 33 34 35 36 68 67 66 65 64 96 97 98 99 100 PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures except for PDMODE values 0...

Page 934: ...s an equilateral closed polyline Draw toolbar Draw menu Polygon Command line polygon Enter number of sides current Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press ENTER Specify Center of Polygon or Edge Specify a point 1 or enter e polygons Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon Enter an option Inscribed in circle Circumscribed about circle current Enter i or c or press ENTER Inscribed in C...

Page 935: ...points of the edges of the polygon Specify radius of circle Specify a distance radius 1 2 Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle Edge Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge Specify first endpoint of edge Specify...

Page 936: ...enu on page 913 which offers additional preview options The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus and minus signs Dragging the cursor toward the top of the screen while holding down the pick button enlarges the preview image Dragging toward the bottom of the screen reduces the preview image The Preview window toolbar provides the following buttons Close Preview Window Closes the Preview w...

Page 937: ...en To reduce the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the screen Zoom Original Restores the initial full sheet preview Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor Zoom Window Zooms to display a specified window Zoom Window works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor Preview Shortcut Menu Controls Plot Preview options To access this me...

Page 938: ...the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the top of the screen To reduce the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the screen Zoom Window Zooms to display a specified window Zoom Window works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor Zoom Original Restores the initial full sheet preview Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and th...

Page 939: ...t are based on AutoCAD application programming interface API standards There are eight General Properties of Objects common to all objects All other object properties are specific to the type of object Properties Palette Tools menu Properties Shortcut menu Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify right click in the drawing area and click Properties Pointing device Double clic...

Page 940: ... pointing device to change a coordinate value Click the QuickCalc calculator button to calculate a new value Click the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the value Click the button and change the property value in a dialog box Allow Docking Controls whether the Properties palette docks when you drag it over a docking area at the side of the drawing Auto hide Controls display of the Proper...

Page 941: ...rner to make the palette smaller or larger Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar Turns the PICKADD system variable on 1 and off 0 When PICKADD is on each object selected either individually or by windowing is added to the current selection set When PICKADD is off selected objects replace the current selection set The following shortcut menu options are available when you right click the title bar General...

Page 942: ...type of the object The list shows all linetypes in the current drawing see LINETYPE linetype samples Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object see LTSCALE Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object The list shows all available lineweights in the current drawing see LWEIGHT Plot Style Lists NORMAL BYLAYER BYBLOCK plus any plot styles contained in the current plot style...

Page 943: ... that are displayed You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color Dialog Box Inside Applies the border properties settings to the inside borders of the selected table cells Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed If you use a heavy lineweight you may have to change the cell margins No Applies the border properties settings to none of the borders of the se...

Page 944: ...es or Angles List Unlabeled Lists the distances or angles defined for the value set PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette Command line propertiesclose The Properties palette is closed PSETUPIN Imports a user defined page setup into a new drawing layout Command line psetupin The Select Page Setup From File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed in which you can selec...

Page 945: ...e model space On the layout tab use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing As part of designing your layout you create layout viewports which are windows containing different views of the model By switching from paper space to model space see MSPACE you can edit the model and views within the current layout viewport You can make a viewport current by double clicking insi...

Page 946: ... you enter publish on the command line you can select an existing Drawing Set Descriptions DSD file from the Select List of Sheets dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes on page 745 The Publish dialog box opens and displays the drawing set saved in the DSD file under Sheets to Publish With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0 if you enter publish at the Command prompt PUBLISH displays P...

Page 947: ...odel Tab Specifies whether the model is included when drawing sheets are added Page Setup Displays the named page setup for the sheet You can change the page setup by clicking the page setup name and selecting another page setup from the list Only Model tab page setups can be applied to Model tab sheets and only paper space page setups can be applied to paper space layouts Select Import to import ...

Page 948: ...que within a single DWF file The shortcut menu also provides an option for removing all the sheets from the list Status Displays the status of the sheet when it is loaded to the list of sheets Preview Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by executing the PREVIEW command To exit the print preview and return to the Plot dialog box press ESC press ENTER or right click and then...

Page 949: ...s are used to describe lists of drawing files and selected lists of layouts within those drawing files Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Dialog Box in which you can specify the information such as drawing name and plot scale that you want applied to the plot stamp Include Plot Stamp Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file The plot stamp data is spe...

Page 950: ... device or file depending on the option selected in the Publish To area and the options selected in the Publish Options Dialog Box To display information about the published drawing set including any errors or warnings click the Plotting Details Report Available icon in the status tray on the right side of the status bar Clicking this icon displays the Plot and Publish Details Dialog Box which pro...

Page 951: ...ate file or use the settings of a previously created block template file Create opens the Publish Block Template Dialog Box Publish on page 929 in which you can create a new block template Edit opens the Select Block Template dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes on page 745 in which you can select an existing block template to modify Disabled Specifies that no password is required DWF...

Page 952: ...tion is included in the published DWF file Specify Name Prompts you for a name and location for published multisheet DWF files Specify Password Specifies that the Password in the password box is applied to the DWF file When you select this option the Password box becomes available and you must enter a password NOTE If you lose or forget the password it cannot be recovered Keep a list of passwords ...

Page 953: ... Removes selected drawings from the list of block source drawings Scan for Blocks Scans block source drawings for unique definitions of blocks and their properties and attributes Block Data to Publish Displays block data to publish Check Blocks to Publish Displays all scanned blocks found in block source drawings Check Properties to Publish Displays the union of properties of the current selection...

Page 954: ...efs in the published DWF file Include Blocks in Xrefs Includes blocks within xrefs in the published DWF file Include Nested Blocks Includes blocks within blocks in the published DWF file Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box Publish File menu Publish Command line publish Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration PC3 file You can cancel your changes c...

Page 955: ...en you enter a password and click OK the Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box is displayed Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box File menu Publish Command line publish Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the DWF Password Dialog Box If the two passwords do not match you must click Publish again to reenter the correct password Publish Job Progress Dialog Box File menu Publish Command l...

Page 956: ...FILEDEA setting The file name is validated and the list of sheets is loaded When PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are used in a script SCR file the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored and PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground Once the publish job starts each drawing sheet name is listed along with an appropriate message Drawing sheets not found or not initialized a...

Page 957: ...odify existing HTML pages that were created using the PUBLISHTOWEB command You can customize the template you use for your web page For information about customizing templates see Customize a Publish to Web Template in the Customization Guide PURGE Removes unused named items such as block definitions and layers from the drawing File menu Drawing Utilities Purge Command line purge The Purge Dialog ...

Page 958: ...wing Most of these objects are currently used in the drawing or are default items that cannot be removed When you select individual named objects information about why you can t purge the item is displayed below the tree view Items Not Used in Drawing Lists the named objects that are not used in the current drawing and that can be purged You can list the items for any object type by clicking the p...

Page 959: ...ed items Purge All Purges all unused items PURGE Command Line If you enter purge at the Command prompt PURGE displays prompts on the command line Enter type of unused objects to purge Blocks Dimstyles LAyers LTypes Plotstyles SHapes textSTyles Mlinestyles Tablestyles Regapps All Enter an object type enter r to purge unused applications or enter a to purge all named object types but not application...

Page 960: ...936 ...

Page 961: ...series of circles and arcs Select geometry to dimension Select the objects you want to dimension or the dimensions you want to edit and press ENTER Specify dimension line position or Continuous Staggered Baseline Ordinate Radius Diameter Datum Point Edit Settings current Enter an option or press ENTER Continuous Creates a series of continued dimensions Staggered Creates a series of staggered dimen...

Page 962: ... for specifying extension line origins The following prompt is displayed Associative dimension priority Endpoint Intersection The program returns to the previous prompt QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation Dimension toolbar Dimension menu Leader Command line qleader Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader annotation You can use the Leader Settings Dialog Box to customize the com...

Page 963: ...ttings selected on the Annotation tab in the Leader Settings dialog box If Mtext and Prompt for Width are selected on the Annotation tab the following prompts are displayed Specify the width current Specify the multiline text width by creating a text boundary or entering a value If you set the text width value to 0 00 the width of the multiline text is unlimited Enter first line of annotation text...

Page 964: ...nd Line on page 549 If None is selected on the Annotation tab no annotation prompts are displayed Settings Displays the Leader Settings Dialog Box Leader Settings Dialog Box Dimension menu Leader Command line qleader Customizes the QLEADER command and sets properties for leaders and leader annotations Annotation Tab Leader Settings Dialog Box Sets the leader annotation type specifies multiline tex...

Page 965: ...can use to create a feature control frame to attach to the leader Block Reference Prompts you to insert a block reference The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line meaning that if the block moves the end of the leader line moves with it No hook line is displayed None Creates a leader with no annotation MText Options Sets multi...

Page 966: ... annotation This option is automatically selected when you reuse annotation after selecting Reuse Next Leader Line Arrow Tab Leader Settings Dialog Box Sets the leader line and arrowhead format Leader Line Sets the leader line format Straight Creates straight line segments between the points you specify Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points 942 Chapte...

Page 967: ...utomatically prompts you to specify the annotation after you specify two leader points Set the number to one more than the number of leader segments you want to create If you set the option to No Limit QLEADER prompts for leader points until you press ENTER Angle Constraints Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines First Segment Sets the angle of the first leader segment Second...

Page 968: ...ine QNEW Starts a new drawing with the option of using a default drawing template file Standard toolbar Command line qnew QNEW starts a new drawing from the current default drawing template file and folder path specified in the Options dialog box on the Files tab You can set the default drawing template file to any drawing template file or to None When a default drawing template file is set to Non...

Page 969: ...nt to clicking Save on the File menu If the drawing is named the program saves the drawing using the file format specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog box and does not request a file name If the drawing is unnamed the Save Drawing As dialog box see SAVEAS is displayed and the drawing is saved with the file name and format you specify If the drawing is read only use the SAVEAS co...

Page 970: ...ent Selection Set Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended to the current selection set Apply To Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection set if one exists To select a group of objects to which you want to apply the filtering criteria use the Select Objects button When you have finished selecting objects press ENTER to r...

Page 971: ...e filter Depending on the selected property options may include Equals Not Equal To Greater Than Less Than and Wildcard Match Greater Than and Less Than are not available for some properties Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be edited For information about the available wild card characters see the table in Filter and Sort the List of Layers in the User s Guide Properties S...

Page 972: ... the properties to be available to QSELECT QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects Command line qtext or qtext for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF current Enter on or off or press ENTER When QTEXT Quick Text is on each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw...

Page 973: ...950 Input Box on page 950 More Less Button on page 951 Number Pad on page 951 Scientific Area on page 952 Units Conversion Area on page 953 Variables Area on page 954 Toolbar Performs quick calculations of common functions Clear Clears the Input box Clear History Clears the history area Paste Value to Command Line Pastes the value in the Input box to the command line When QuickCalc is used transpa...

Page 974: ...ct Two Lines Defined by Four Points Calculates the intersection of four point locations that you have clicked on an object Help Displays Help for QuickCalc History Area Displays a running list of previously evaluated expressions The History area shortcut menu provides several options including copying a selected expression to the Clipboard Input Box Provides a box where you enter and retrieve expr...

Page 975: ... Obtains the square root of a value sqt Square Root Inverts any number or expression entered in the Input box 1 X Inverse Squares a value x 2 X to the Power of 2 Raises any number or expression entered in the Input box to the power of 3 x 3 X to the Power of 3 Raises a number or expression entered in the Input box to a specified power x y X to the Power of Y Enters pi to 14 decimal places in the I...

Page 976: ...es the cosine of the angle in the Input box cos Cosine Specifies the tangent of the angle in the Input box tang Tangent Specifies the log of the value in the Input box Log Base 10 Log Specifies the base 10 exponent of the value in the Input box 10 x Base 10 Exponent Specifies the arcsine of the number in the Input box The number must be between 1 and 1 asin Arcsine Specifies the arccosine of the n...

Page 977: ...rns the integer portion of the number in the Input box trunc Truncate Units Conversion Area Converts units of measurement from one unit type to another unit type The units conversion area accepts only decimal values without units Units Type Select length area volume and angular values from a list Convert From Lists the units of measurement from which to convert Convert To Lists the units of measur...

Page 978: ...d end dee Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints ill end end end end ille Midpoint between two endpoints end end 2 mee Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two endpoints nor end end nee Radius of a selected circle arc or polyline arc rad rad Vector from two endpoints vec end end vee Unit vector from two endpoints vec1 end end vee1 New Variable Button Opens the Variable Definition...

Page 979: ...function Group With Stores the named variable in the selected category If New is selected the Category Definition Dialog Box on page 956 opens where you can define a new category for the variable Help Displays Help Name Stores the name of the variable Names of constants cannot include spaces OK Closes the dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable Value or Expression Stores the va...

Page 980: ...e dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable QUIT Exits the prgram File menu Exit Command line quit Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved If the drawing has been modified you are prompted to save or discard the changes before quitting You can quit a file that has been opened in read only mode if you have made no modifications or if you ar...

Page 981: ...epairs a damaged drawing File menu Drawing Utilities Recover Command line recover In the Select File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file Results are displayed in the text window When FILEDIA is set to 0 zero RECOVER displays the following prompt on the command line Enter name of drawing file to recover Enter tilde at the ...

Page 982: ... enter an option Other Corner Point 1 2 Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width If the Chamfer or Fillet option is active the area includes the effect of the chamfers or fillets on the corners of the rectangle Enter area of rectangle in current units 100 Enter a positive value Calculate rec...

Page 983: ...int or entering p and specifying two points Specify other corner point or Area Dimensions Rotation Move the cursor to display one of four possible locations for the rectangle and click the one that you want Chamfer Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles current Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles curre...

Page 984: ...or press ENTER The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG commands REDEFINE Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE Command line redefine Enter command name Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by the UNDEFINE command If a command has been undefined you can still use it if you precede the command name with a period REDO Reverses the effects of ...

Page 985: ... for transparent use When BLIPMODE is on marker blips left by editing commands are removed from the current viewport before REDRAW after REDRAW REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports View menu Redraw Command line redrawall or redrawall for transparent use When BLIPMODE is on marker blips left by editing commands are removed from all viewports before REDRAWALL after REDRAWALL 961 ...

Page 986: ...ck Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing changes Discard Reference Changes Discards the working set the source drawing or block definition is returned to its original state Any changes you make to objects in the current drawing not in the xref or block are not discarded If you delete any object that is not in the working set the object is not rest...

Page 987: ...the Command prompt REFEDIT displays REFEDIT Command Line Reference Edit Dialog Box Tools menu Xref and Block In place Editing Edit Reference In Place Command line refedit Specifies the reference to edit To select a reference to edit select an object in the reference If you select an object that is part of one or more nested references the nested references are displayed in the dialog box Identify ...

Page 988: ...t are inserted into a drawing using MINSERT cannot be selected for in place reference editing Dynamic blocks are not displayed in the list and are not available for editing through this dialog box Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference The preview image displays the reference as it was last saved in the drawing The reference preview image is not updated when changes a...

Page 989: ...med objects in xrefs are altered names are prefixed with similar to the way they are altered when you bind xrefs If cleared the names of layers and other named objects remain the same as in the reference drawing Named objects that are not altered to make them unique assume the properties of those in the current host drawing that share the same name Display Attribute Definitions for Editing Control...

Page 990: ...reference editing session If you enter n after you close the Reference Edit dialog box and enter the reference edit state you are prompted to select the specific objects in the reference that you want to edit Select nested objects Select objects within the reference that you want to edit Display attribute definitions Yes No No Enter y enter n or press ENTER when editing a block reference Use REFCL...

Page 991: ...n the reference file NOTE Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless SHADEMODE is set to a value of 2D Wireframe during in place reference editing REFSET Adds or removes objects from a working set during in place editing of a reference an xref or a block Tools menu Xref and Block In place Editing Add to Working Set or Xref and Block In Place Editing Remove from Working Set Command lin...

Page 992: ...efedit toolbar prompts you to remove objects from the working set without using REFCLOSE REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport View menu Regen Command line regen REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in the current viewport It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance before...

Page 993: ...y suppressed regenerations exist in the queue and continues to regenerate automatically whenever you perform an action that requires regeneration Off Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the REGEN or REGENALL command or set REGENAUTO to on If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is irrevocable such as thawing layers the following message is displayed If ...

Page 994: ...itrary The boundary of the region consists of end connected curves where each point shares only two edges All intersections and self intersecting curves are rejected If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline The polyline is not converted to a spline object REGION deletes the o...

Page 995: ...I O port for the digitizer RENAME Changes the names of named objects Format menu Rename Command line rename The Rename Dialog Box is displayed If you enter rename at the Command prompt RENAME displays RENAME Command Line Rename Dialog Box Format menu Rename Command line rename Renames named objects Rename Dialog Box 971 ...

Page 996: ...me from the Items list You can use the wild card characters and to rename groups of objects You can t rename some standard objects such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype Rename To Specifies the new name you want to assign to the object Enter a name and choose Rename To to apply the name change RENAME Command Line If you enter rename at the Command prompt RENAME displays prompts on the command...

Page 997: ...splayed and the Render Window is opened minimized Render Dialog Box View menu Render Render Command line render Defines the scene procedure options destination sampling and other settings for rendering If no scene or selection set is specified RENDER uses the current view and all the lights in the drawing If there are no lights RENDER assumes a default over the shoulder distant light source with a...

Page 998: ... or AutoCAD Color Index ACI in the drawing If Apply Materials is not selected all objects in the drawing assume the color ambient diffuse reflection roughness transparency refraction and bump map attribute values defined for the GLOBAL material For more information see RMAT Crop Window Creates a render area at render time When you click the Render button with Crop Window selected you are prompted ...

Page 999: ...che Specifies that rendering information be written to a cache file on the hard disk A display list of renderable objects is cached in a temporary file during the first rendering The cached file is used for subsequent renderings significantly improving rendering time Render Window Renders to the Render Window Shadows Generates shadows This option applies only to Photo Real and Photo Raytrace rende...

Page 1000: ...degrees are considered edges Angles less than 45 degrees are smoothed Rendering Options Controls rendering display Destination Controls the setting for image output that the display driver uses for the rendering Sub Sampling Reduces rendering time and image quality without dropping effects such as shadows by rendering a fraction of all pixels From the list select one of the ratios from 1 1 best qu...

Page 1001: ...s Copy Copies an image from the active Render window to the Clipboard See Copy Rendered Images to the Clipboard in the User s Guide Open Opens a saved rendered bitmap BMP file Displays the Open File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box Select Preview if you want a preview image of the file to be displayed every time you select a file Clearing the Preview option speeds file loading Rende...

Page 1002: ... in the User s Guide Reuse Window Reuses the current image window instead of creating a new image window for each new rendering Save Saves an image to a bitmap file For more information see Save and Redisplay a Rendered Image in the User s Guide You cannot use the SAVEIMG command when rendering to the Render window This command applies only when you are rendering to a viewport Edit Menu Copies ren...

Page 1003: ... There are three preset sizes from which you can choose You can also enter values to set the horizontal and vertical resolution of the image in pixels 1024 x 768 Sets the number of pixels to that of a high resolution screen 24 bit Sets the 24 bits per pixel color option 16 million colors that is 8 bits for each of the three primary RGB colors red green and blue that make up each pixel 640 x 480 Se...

Page 1004: ...t color information If you then display the image on a system capable of displaying 24 bit color you get the full 24 bit color image Fit in Window Scales the bitmap image to fit the size of the display window while maintaining the aspect ratio of the model When this option is selected the Size in Pixels bitmap options are available Fit In Window resizes already rendered images in all open Render d...

Page 1005: ...command tif Indicates a compressed 32 bit RGBA tagged image file format for special effects such as transparency creation Texture maps typically come from TIFF files Choosing Open in the Replay dialog box opens the Image Specifications Dialog Box Image Specifications Dialog Box Tools menu Display Image View Command line replay Defines the offset and size of the image and screen Image Displays a pr...

Page 1006: ...um size in pixels of the image that can be displayed on the screen RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition Shortcut menu Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing Right click in the drawing area Click Reset Block Command line resetblock Select object Select one or more dynamic block references and press ENTER RESUME Continues an inte...

Page 1007: ...ge is displayed on the command line Revision cloud finished The resulting object is a polyline NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors Arc Length Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud Specify minimum length of arc 0 5000 Sp...

Page 1008: ...nt wire frame density ISOLINES current Select objects Use an object selection method You can revolve closed polylines polygons circles ellipses closed splines donuts and regions You cannot revolve objects contained within a block Polylines that have crossing or self intersecting segments cannot be revolved REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the path of the poly...

Page 1009: ... polyline that defines the axis about which to revolve the object The positive axis direction is from the closest to the farthest endpoint of this line Select an object Use an object selection method Specify angle of revolution 360 Specify an angle or press ENTER specified angle full circle selected axis X Uses the positive X axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction Specify angle of ...

Page 1010: ...angle full circle Y axis REVSURF Creates a revolved surface about a selected axis Surfaces toolbar Draw menu Surfaces Revolved Surface Command line revsurf Current wire frame density SURFTAB1 current SURFTAB2 current Select object to revolve Select a line arc circle or 2D or 3D polyline Select object that defines axis of revolution Select a line or open 2D or 3D polyline 986 Chapter 19 ...

Page 1011: ...on of the mesh Specify start angle 0 Enter a value or press ENTER Specify included angle ccw cw 360 Enter a value or press ENTER Included Angle Specifies how far about the axis of revolution the surface extends Start Angle If set to a nonzero value begins the surface of revolution at an offset from the generating path curve Specifying a start angle begins the surface of revolution at an offset fro...

Page 1012: ...AB2 system variables SURFTAB1 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn in the direction of revolution If the path curve is a line arc circle or spline fit polyline SURFTAB2 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn to divide it into equal sized intervals If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit tabulation lines are drawn at the ends of straight segm...

Page 1013: ...s displayed Materials Dialog Box View menu Render Materials Command line rmat Manages the materials used for rendering Attach Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select an object and attach the current material to it This option is not available when GLOBAL is the selected material Materials Dialog Box 989 ...

Page 1014: ...ials Lists the available materials Use MATLIB to add other materials The default for objects with no other material attached is GLOBAL Materials Library Displays the Materials Library dialog box in which you select a material See MATLIB Modify Displays one of four dialog boxes depending on which material type is selected in the list under the New button Standard Marble Granite or Wood Use the dial...

Page 1015: ...box temporarily so that you can select an object with the pointing device and display the attached material After you select the object the Materials dialog box is redisplayed with the method of attachment specified at the bottom of the dialog box New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box View menu Render Materials Command line rmat Creates a new material or modifies an existing material Material...

Page 1016: ...ocked Color Swatch Displays the Windows Color dialog box in which you can adjust a color by HLS or RGB components Color System Specifies the color system to use You can specify RGB Red Green Blue or HLS Hue Lightness Saturation Color Pattern Adjusts the main diffuse color of the material You can adjust the color using Value and the controls in the Color area Hue Lightness Saturation Adjusts the co...

Page 1017: ... Roughness Adjusts the roughness or shininess of the material Adjusting Roughness changes the size of the material s reflective highlight The lower the level of roughness the smaller the highlight Transparency Adjusts the transparency of the object You can use Value to specify how transparent the object is To use an opacity map with this material enter a file name in Bitmap Blend NOTE With the Pho...

Page 1018: ...map is specified If the bitmap is not tiled fixed scale materials lock all bitmap placement settings together for Pattern Transparency and Bump Map The bitmap placement setting for Pattern takes precedence if it is available If no pattern map is present the settings for Transparency are used If neither Pattern nor Transparency is present the settings for Bump Map are used NOTE The blend of an opac...

Page 1019: ...s the bitmap as another rectangle its top and left edges are drawn in white and its right and bottom edges are drawn in magenta When you first see this dialog box the two squares are the same size As this implies the default mapping scale is 1 1 NOTE The bitmap adjustment scaling and offset and tiling switch can differ for each individual bitmap specified for a material Also the bitmap adjustments...

Page 1020: ... by the inner box labeled Scale or by entering a value in Scale U or Scale V The dimensions of the bitmap rectangle change to reflect the new scaling Maintain Aspect Ratio Locks the U and V scaling dimensions together Moving one scroll bar moves the other and a value you enter in Scale U or Scale V changes the other Object Size Adjusts the size of the preview cube You can use this option to previe...

Page 1021: ...ed to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself against the key color and then set the material main diffuse and ambient colors to match the bitmap key color Map Style Specifies a scale Use Auto Axis Maps materials on XY YZ and XZ oriented surfaces If this option is not selected only XY oriented surfaces are mapped for fixed scale mapping Auto axis does not use polygon normals when calculating...

Page 1022: ... Makes the Bitmap Blend area available to specify the file name of a bump map First Second Third Fourth Color Adjusts the four colors that can be present The options in the Color area are the same as for standard materials except that Lock is not present By ACI is available only when Reflection is selected To use fewer than four colors set a color value equal to one of the other colors or set its ...

Page 1023: ... Defines the sharpness of the stone Set Sharpness by specifying a value A sharpness of 0 is completely blurred that is the four colors are averaged With a sharpness of 1 0 the four colors are discrete New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box View menu Render Materials Command line rmat Creates or modifies a material that simulates marble The dialog box provides attribute options that are specific ...

Page 1024: ...el of roughness the smaller the highlight Scale Defines the scale of the material relative to objects you attach it to Set Scale by specifying a value Larger Scale values result in more veins Sharpness Defines the sharpness of the veins that is the blending of color at the edges of the veins Set Sharpness by specifying a value Stone Color Vein Color Adjusts the marble matrix and vein colors The op...

Page 1025: ...rial attribute to change The Value and Color settings affect the selected attribute If a setting does not apply to an attribute it is not available while that attribute is selected Bump Map Makes the Bitmap Blend area available to specify the file name of a bump map Light Color Dark Color Adjusts the two colors of the wood grain The options in the Color area are the same as for standard materials ...

Page 1026: ...e rings is Set Ring Shape by specifying a value A ring shape of 0 gives completely circular rings a shape of 1 0 gives the most irregular rings Ring Width Controls how much the width of the rings varies Set Ring Width by specifying a value A ring width of 0 gives completely uniform rings a width of 1 0 gives the greatest variation Roughness Adjusts the roughness or shininess of the material Adjust...

Page 1027: ... Displays the selected material as either a sphere or a cube Select a Material Specifies the material to be attached or detached Select ACI Selects an ACI color by choosing Attach or Detach Attach by Layer Dialog Box View menu Render Materials Command line rmat Associates materials with layers All new objects on the layer have the specified material attached Attach by Layer Dialog Box 1003 ...

Page 1028: ... material attached to the selected layer Preview Displays the selected material as either a sphere or a cube Select a Material Specifies the material to attach to the selected layer Select Layer Specifies the layer to which to attach the selected material ROTATE Revolves objects around a base point Modify toolbar Modify menu Rotate 1004 Chapter 19 ...

Page 1029: ...ects for rotation Reference Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new absolute angle Specify the reference angle last reference angle Specify an angle by entering a value or by specifying two points Specify the new angle or Points last new angle Specify the new absolute angle by entering a value or by specifying two points When you rotate a viewport object the borders of the viewport remain ...

Page 1030: ...ngle Specify the new angle Specify the ending angle The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle Circle Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orient...

Page 1031: ... 0 Specify the starting angle Specify the new angle Specify the ending angle The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle 2D Polyline Segment Aligns the axis of rotation with a segment of the polyline Treats a straight segment as a line segment Treats an arc segment as an arc Specify rotation angle or Reference Specify an angle or enter r Rotation A...

Page 1032: ...e The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle View Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport that passes through the selected point Specify a point on the view direction axis 0 0 0 Specify rotation angle or Reference Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specif...

Page 1033: ...fy the reference angle 0 Specify the starting angle Specify the new angle Specify the ending angle The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle 1 1 1 Z axis Y axis X axis 2 Points Uses two points to define the axis of rotation Pressing ENTER at the main ROTATE3D prompt displays the following prompts Specifying a point at the main prompt skips the pr...

Page 1034: ...ify the starting angle Specify the new angle Specify the ending angle The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle RPREF Sets rendering preferences Render toolbar View menu Render Preferences Command line rpref The Rendering Preferences Dialog Box is displayed Rendering Preferences Dialog Box View menu Render Preferences Command line rpref 1010 Chap...

Page 1035: ... the drawing If Apply Materials is not selected all objects in the drawing assume the color ambient diffuse reflection roughness transparency refraction and bump map attribute values defined for the GLOBAL material For more information see RMAT Crop Window Creates a render area at render time When you click the Render button with Crop Window selected you are prompted to specify an area in the draw...

Page 1036: ...ndering information be written to a cache file As long as the drawing geometry or view is unchanged the cached file is used for subsequent renderings eliminating the need to retessellate This saves time especially when rendering solids Render Window Renders to the Render Window Shadows Generates shadows Applies only to Photo Real and Photo Raytrace rendering Skip Render Dialog Renders the current ...

Page 1037: ...e drawing Enter a real number to rescale the blocks The scale factor affects the following blocks OVERHEAD DIRECT and SH_SPOT Smoothing Angle Sets the angle to be considered an edge The default is 45 degrees Angles greater than 45 degrees are considered edges Angles less than 45 degrees are smoothed Rendering Options Controls rendering display Rendering Preferences Dialog Box 1013 ...

Page 1038: ...tions Dialog Box View menu Render Preferences Command line rpref Controls rendering options This dialog box is displayed when Render is selected as the Rendering Type and you choose More Options under Rendering Options in the Rendering Preferences dialog box Render Quality Controls the type of shading used when you select Smooth Shade in the Rendering Preferences dialog box Back Face Normal Is Neg...

Page 1039: ...kes them invisible and speeds up the rendering process Gouraud Calculates light intensity at each vertex and interpolates intermediate intensities Phong Uses more sophisticated interpolation than Gouraud to generate shading with more realistic highlights Phong calculates light intensity at each pixel Face Controls Controls how RENDER treats the faces of 3D solid objects Photo Real Render Options D...

Page 1040: ... Clearing this option reverses which faces are considered back faces If Discard Back Faces is selected faces with negative normal vectors are considered back faces and discarded Discard Back Faces Prevents the program from reading the back faces of a 3D solid object when performing calculations for a rendering for hidden faces only This setting does not eliminate back faces it only makes them invi...

Page 1041: ...pixel the more time it takes to render the image Minimal Renders with analytical horizontal anti aliasing only Minimum Bias Sets the lowest value in the range The default is 2 0 The valid range of values depends on the scene to render but it should usually be between 2 0 and 20 0 Mip Map Sample Averages bitmap pixels using the mip method a pyramidal average based on square sample areas Point Sampl...

Page 1042: ...ti Aliasing Controls the level of anti aliasing used in rendering Back Face Normal Is Negative Controls which faces are considered back faces in a drawing When you draw a 3D face and enter the vertices in a counterclockwise direction a positive normal vector points outward toward the viewer and identifies the face as a front face The back face is identified by a negative normal vector that points ...

Page 1043: ...n speed and image quality Discard Back Faces Prevents the program from reading the back faces of a 3D solid object when performing calculations for a rendering for hidden faces only This setting does not eliminate back faces it only makes them invisible and speeds up the rendering process Enable Turns on adaptive sampling High Renders with analytical horizontal anti aliasing and 16 multiple shadin...

Page 1044: ...e of values depends on the scene to render but it should usually be between 2 0 and 20 0 Mip Map Sample Averages bitmap pixels using the mip method a pyramidal average based on square sample areas Point Sample Selects the nearest pixel within the bitmap Adaptive Sampling Accelerates the anti aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix size Given a contrast threshold that you supply the...

Page 1045: ...Type Specifies the output file type and rendering resolution The BMP TGA PCX SUN FITS PostScript TIFF FAX G III and IFF file formats are supported Screen resolution is a function of the number of pixels displayed The resolution is inversely related to the displayed pixel size that is the greater the screen resolution the smaller the pixels given the same screen size You can select a resolution fro...

Page 1046: ... turn on line interlacing Landscape Portrait Specifies the orientation of the file Colors Sets colors in the output file TGA Options Controls the file compression scan line direction and interlacing PostScript Options Controls options for PostScript files RSCRIPT Repeats a script file RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script for example a script that must run over and over during ...

Page 1047: ...he boundary curves can be a point The 0 0 vertex is the endpoint of each curve nearest the point you used to select that curve For closed curves the selection does not matter If the curve is a circle the ruled surface begins at the 0 degree quadrant point as determined by the current X axis plus the current value of the SNAPANG system variable For closed polylines the ruled surface starts at the l...

Page 1048: ...oundary curves If both boundaries are closed or if one is closed and the other is a point the resulting polygon mesh is closed in the N direction and N equals SURFTAB1 If both boundaries are open N equals SURFTAB1 1 because division of a curve into n parts requires n 1 tabulations Selecting objects at the same ends creates a polygon mesh Selecting objects at opposite ends creates a self intersecti...

Page 1049: ...menu Save As Command line saveas The Save Drawing As Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Enter a file name and type Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004 Drawing to optimize performance while saving NOTE AutoCAD 2004 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD 2004 AutoCAD 2005 and AutoCAD 2006 releases See Save to Earlier Ve...

Page 1050: ...ypes OLE objects and preview images are not displayed Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it in Release 2000 LT 2000 or later Multiple layouts and layout names are lost Only the Model tab and the current layout tab are saved Spaces in the names of layers and other objects are converted to underscores and their maximum length is 32 characters The status of external re...

Page 1051: ...for saving drawings Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects If you save to an earlier drawing file type or the drawing contains custom objects from another application you can select Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects to save images of the custom objects in the drawing file If you do not choose this option a frame is saved for each custom object in the drawing file PROXYGRAPHICS system variable Index...

Page 1052: ... the default file format that drawings are saved to If you change the specified value all subsequent uses of SAVE and QSAVE save the drawing to the new file format You can also set this option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box see OPTIONS Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004 Drawing to optimize performance while saving DXF Options Tab Saveas Options Dialog Box Sets drawing inter...

Page 1053: ...em variable Decimal Places of Accuracy Saves the file using the specified number of bits of precision The default precision is adequate in most cases however you might need to increase this value for certain drawings and for certain applications If you encounter problems loading a DXF file you create try increasing the precision The only disadvantage of higher precision is increased file size Lowe...

Page 1054: ... Image files are saved as either 8 or 32 bits per pixel bpp depending on the operating system OS video color depth setting Offset Defines the lower left XY position of the image selection area The default is 0 0 When you specify a nonzero offset the number of pixels in Size can change to reflect the remaining number of pixels to the upper right corner of the display area Options Displays the TGA O...

Page 1055: ...on the operating system OS video color depth setting TIFF Saves in compressed and uncompressed 32 bit RGBA tagged image file format Image files are saved as either 8 or 32 bits per pixel bpp depending on the operating system OS video color depth setting Portion Specifies the portion of the image to be rendered Specify lower left and upper right points to define the image selection area If you use ...

Page 1056: ...et and Size values to the full screen defaults When configured for rendering to a viewport resets the Offset and Size values to the size that corresponds to the option selected under Portion TGA Options Dialog Box Tools menu Display Image Save Command line saveimg Specifies one of the following TGA image compression options None Uses no image compression RLE Uses run length encoded image compressi...

Page 1057: ...nter c or enter r Scale Factor Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects You can also drag the cursor to make the object larger or smaller Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for scaling Reference Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a ...

Page 1058: ...ts on the command line Edit Scale List Dialog Box Format menu Scale List Command line scalelistedit or scalelistedit for transparent use Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports page layouts and plottting Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales Add Displays the Add Scale Dialog Box on page 1035 Edit Displays the Edit Scale Dialog Box Move Up Moves the currently s...

Page 1059: ...st Command line scalelistedit or scalelistedit for transparent use Adds a new scale to the scale list Scale Name Specifies the name to appear in the scale list Drawing Units When combined with the value of the paper units determines the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting Name Appearing in Scale List Enter a descriptive or numeric name For example in an architectural drawing that ...

Page 1060: ...List area Scale Name Lists the name of the currently selected scale in the Scale List area Drawing Units When combined with the value of the paper units determines the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting Name Appearing in Scale List Cannot be edited To change the name cancel the Edit Scale dialog box and on the Edit Scale List dialog box delete the current scale and then add a new...

Page 1061: ...or numeric name such as 1 4 or 1 48 Enter scale ratio Enter a ratio in the format n m where n is the number of paper units and m is the number of drawing units Delete Removes a specified scale Enter scale name to delete Enter the name of a scale that you want to delete Reset Deletes all custom scales as a result and restores the default list of scales Reset scale list to defaults Yes No Enter y or...

Page 1062: ...lent to the bottom left BL multiline text attachment point Specify text height or Match Object Scale Factor 0 5000 Specify a text height or enter an option Match Object Scales the text objects that you originally selected to match the size of a selected text object Select a text object with the desired height Select a text object to match Scale Factor Scales the selected text objects based on a re...

Page 1063: ...ted number of scenes Delete Deletes the selected scene from the drawing Modify Displays the Modify Scene Dialog Box New Displays the New Scene Dialog Box Scenes Lists all the scenes in the current drawing NONE is the default and includes the current view in the active viewport and all lights in the drawing If there are no lights in the drawing and NONE is selected a default over the shoulder dista...

Page 1064: ... you remove all lights from a scene a default over the shoulder distant light is assumed Removing a light from a scene does not delete it from the drawing Scene Name Specifies the name of the new scene Views Lists model space views in the drawing The current view is highlighted Selecting another view makes it the new view of the scene You can have only one view in a scene Modify Scene Dialog Box V...

Page 1065: ...me Changes the name of the scene Views Lists model space views in the drawing The view in the current scene is highlighted Selecting another view makes it the new view of the scene You can have only one view in a scene SCRIPT Executes a sequence of commands from a script file Tools menu Run Script Command line script or script for transparent use The Select Script File dialog box a Standard File S...

Page 1066: ... page 1042 on Section plane by Object Z Axis View XY onpage1044 YZ onpage1044 ZX onpage1044 3points Specify a point or enter an option First Point 3 Points Uses three points to define the sectioning plane After you specify the first point the following prompts are displayed Specify second point on plane Specify a point 2 Specify third point on plane Specify a point 3 1 3 2 Object Aligns the sectio...

Page 1067: ...y a point on the section plane Specify a point 1 Specify a point on the Z axis normal of the plane Specify a point 2 side view 1 2 1 2 cutting plane normal View Aligns the sectioning plane with the current viewport s viewing plane Specifying a point defines the location of the sectioning plane Specify a point on the current view plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER 1 Modify Scene Dialog Bo...

Page 1068: ...s the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS Specifying a point defines the location of the sectioning plane Specify a point on the YZ plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER 1 ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS Specifying a point defines the location of the sectioning plane Specify a point on the ZX plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER ...

Page 1069: ...Box is displayed You can add security settings that are applied when you save the drawing Security Options Dialog Box Command line securityoptions Specifies security settings to be used when your drawing is saved Password Tab Security Options Dialog Box Adds a password to a drawing when the drawing is saved Security Options Dialog Box 1045 ...

Page 1070: ... model or other important information Get Time Stamp From Provides a list of time servers you can use to time stamp your digital signature Password or Phrase to Open This Drawing Adds changes or removes a password the next time the drawing is saved If you add or change the password the Confirm Password Dialog Box is displayed If you lose the password it is not recoverable Before you add a password...

Page 1071: ...he drawing is saved Confirm Password Dialog Box Command line securityoptions Confirms the password entered in the Security Options Dialog Box that is added or changed the next time the drawing is saved WARNING If you lose the password it is not recoverable Before you add a password you should create a backup that is not protected with a password Advanced Options Dialog Box Command line securityopt...

Page 1072: ... many commands including the SELECT command itself You can select objects individually with the pointing device by drawing a selection window around them by entering coordinates or by using one of the selection methods listed below These methods can be used to select objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects prompt To view all options enter on the command line Expects a p...

Page 1073: ...ers from right to left creates a crossing selection Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection First corner Specify a point 1 Other corner Specify a point 2 crossing selection 2 1 Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points If the rectangle s points are specified from right to left Box is equivalent to Crossing Otherwise Box is equivalen...

Page 1074: ... Undo Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point fence selection WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable First polygon point Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or ...

Page 1075: ...ndo the last point CPolygon selection Group Selects all objects within a specified group Enter group name Enter a name list Add Switches to the Add method selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods Auto and Add are the default methods selected object to add Remove Switches to the Remove method objects can be removed from the current selection se...

Page 1076: ...the object Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method Auto and Add are the default methods Single Switches to the Single method selects the first object or set of objects designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections SETIDROPHANDLER Specifies the default type of i drop content for the current Autodesk applicat...

Page 1077: ...representative i drop content image and drag it from a web page into your current drawing and then click Block Displays the source URL the log file name and the file name for the i drop content that is currently being inserted in the drawing and allows you to specify the associated data files to be transferred and the location for the files SETUV Maps materials onto objects Render toolbar View men...

Page 1078: ...pping coordinates even when the Fit to Object option is selected in the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box in RMAT To delete mapping coordinates assigned to an object use the AutoLISP version of the Render mapping option as shown in the following example Command c setuv D ssget Select objects Select the objects whose mapping you want to delete Acquire From Temporarily closes the Mapping d...

Page 1079: ...op in the Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box Copy To Temporarily closes the Mapping dialog box so that you can select any number of objects When you finish making the selection the Mapping dialog box is displayed When you click OK the current mapping coordinate settings are applied to the objects you selected Preview Displays a bitmap image of the selected material and its mapping coordinat...

Page 1080: ...wn around the parallel projection of the object s bounding box its extents Offsets and Rotations Changes the X and Y offsets of the map You can change the rotation by using the scroll bar or entering a new value Parallel Plane Specifies one of the three perpendicular reference planes of the world coordinate system WCS or a plane you specify by clicking Pick Points If you select Picked Plane and th...

Page 1081: ...nts the lower left lower right and upper left corners of the plane After you specify these points the Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog box is redisplayed Preview Displays a bitmap image of the selected material and its mapping coordinate The Preview area displays a gray image if a material is not attached Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box View menu Render Mapping Command line setuv Defines...

Page 1082: ...is Specifies one of the three perpendicular axes of the WCS or an axis you specify by choosing Pick Points If you select Picked Axis and then choose OK without choosing Pick Points the Z axis of the WCS is used by default NOTE If you use Pick Points and the points you select correspond to one of the WCS axes the next time you display the Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box the option indicat...

Page 1083: ... choose OK without choosing Pick Points the Z axis of the WCS is used by default NOTE If you use Pick Points but the points you select correspond to one of the WCS axes this axis is saved as the WCS axis The next time you display the Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box the option indicates the WCS Z Y or X axis or plane instead of Picked Axis Picked Plane Pick Points Temporarily closes the Adj...

Page 1084: ... line is placed toward minimum Z or minimum Y when the Z axis is parallel to the spherical coordinate system axis When you specify the points for the sphere its dimensions aren t based on the extents Preview Displays a bitmap image of the selected material and its mapping coordinate The Preview area displays a gray image if a material is not attached Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box View menu Ren...

Page 1085: ... line setuv Adjusts the placement of materials on the objects In the upper left part of the dialog box is a diagram that changes as you change the bitmap placement values The diagram shows a projection rectangle in red By default the projection rectangle represents the extents of an object or selection set of objects however if you ve specified points to define the mapping geometry the projection ...

Page 1086: ...p is selected the bitmap is rendered only where you place it as indicated by the diagram so if the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle the bitmap does not appear in a rendering The bitmap scale is the number of times the bitmap fits onto the object in the U or V direction Adjust the bitmap scaling by using the two scroll bars to the left and above the diagram enclosed by the ...

Page 1087: ...iginal color To get a soft matte or feathered effect at the edge of a decal you first need to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself against the key color and then set the material main diffuse and ambient colors to match the bitmap key color Default The default tiling is the tiling set for the material as a whole either Tile or Crop Tile When this option is selected the default the bitmap ...

Page 1088: ... option 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries Raster and OLE objects linetypes and lineweights are visible Even if the value for the COMPASS system variable is set to 1 it does not appear in the 2D Wireframe view 3D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon You can set the COMPASS s...

Page 1089: ...name or enter Shape Name Loads the shape Specify insertion point Specify height current Specify a height or press ENTER Specify rotation angle 0 Specify an angle or press ENTER If a shape belongs to an external reference xref attached to the current drawing the shape file is identified as externally dependent Externally dependent shapes cannot be used in the current drawing unless they are reloade...

Page 1090: ...et List control and several buttons The buttons vary depending on the selected tab Sheet List Tab on page 1067 View List Tab on page 1070 Resource Drawings Tab on page 1072 Sheet List Control The Sheet List control displays the the name of the current sheet set or if no sheet sets are open the Open option The Sheet List control provides the following options for all tabs Names of Open Sheet Sets L...

Page 1091: ...alphabetical order under Shortcut Menu Options below Sheet Selections Displays a menu where you can save manage and restore sheet selections by name This makes it easy to specify a group of sheets for a publish transmit or archive operation The description for each option is listed in alphabetical order under Shortcut Menu Options below Details at bottom of window Displays basic information about ...

Page 1092: ... off for the selected sheet set subset or sheet Insert Sheet List Table Displays the Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box Insert Sheet List Table is available only on the sheet set shortcut menu Manage Page Setups Displays the Page Setup Manager New Sheet Displays the New Sheet Dialog Box New Subset Displays the Subset Properties Dialog Box where you can create a new sheet subset for organizing the ...

Page 1093: ...ed sheets or the sheet set to a specified DWF file Automatically uses settings specified in the PUBLISH command Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default plotter or printer Publish Using Page Setup Override Automatically publishes the selected sheets using the selected page setup override rather than the page setup specified in each drawing The page setup overri...

Page 1094: ...ask and nothing is displayed in the program NOTE In a network environment make sure that all drawing files in the current sheet set that are opened by other users are closed before performing this operation Save Sheet Selection Displays the New Sheet Selection Dialog Box Sheet Set Publish Options Displays the Publish Options Dialog Box This is the same as the Publish Options dialog but is specific...

Page 1095: ...ed on shortcut menus for the View List tab For easier access they are listed in alphabetical order The options displayed in each shortcut menu depend on context if you right click the sheet set a different shortcut menu will display than if you right click a view category or a view Display Displays the selected view in the sheet in which it was created Opens the drawing file containing the sheet i...

Page 1096: ... drawing files are associated with the current sheet set NOTE After creating a named model space view you must save the drawing to add the view to the Resource Drawings tab This tab has the following buttons Refresh Button Updates the list of drawing files listed in the tree view The Refresh button updates all information stored in the sheet set data DST file checks all folders in every resource l...

Page 1097: ...awing DWG file Place on Sheet Initiates a series of automated steps that creates and places a view of the selected model onto the current layout of the current drawing These steps are You are prompted to place the view on the layout Right click to change the scale of the view before placement The selected model is attached as an xref in the current drawing A layout viewport is created on the curre...

Page 1098: ...than use the default drawing template file for creating new sheets Sheet Creation Template for Subset Specifies the drawing template DWT file and layout name that is used to create new drawing files for this subset The Browse button displays the Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box The syntax for this property is layoutname folderpath filename dwt Store New Sheet DWG Files In Specifies the f...

Page 1099: ...ting new sheets The Browse button displays the Select Drawing Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes Select a Layout to Create New Sheets Lists and specifies the name of the layout in the drawing template file to be used for new sheets New Sheet Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager Sheet List tab Command line sheetset Creates a new sheet in the current sheet set by creating a new drawing DWG file...

Page 1100: ... number when you first create a sheet By default the drawing name and layout name of the new sheet will be the sheet number together with sheet title You can remove the sheet number from the file name when you create the new sheet but the sheet number will still be in the layout name Sheet Template Displays the default sheet template file used for creating the new drawing file The default template...

Page 1101: ...isplays the folder path for the drawing file Next Loads the next sheet into this dialog box This provides a convenient method for renumbering or retitling a series of sheets Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected sheet Prefix Sheet Number to File Name When checked changes the drawing file name to a new name formed by adding the sheet number to the beginning of the sheet title Previous L...

Page 1102: ...dialog box This provides a convenient method for renumbering or retitling a series of views Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected view Previous Loads the previous view into this dialog box This provides a convenient method for renumbering or retitling a series of views View Title Specifies the view title of the selected view Import Layouts as Sheets Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Mana...

Page 1103: ...port Checked Imports a layout from the list only if it displays a check mark List of Layouts in Selected Drawing Lists all available layouts in the specified drawing file Click a check box to select a layout Prefix Sheet Titles with File Name When checked automatically adds the drawing file name to the beginning of the sheet title Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager She...

Page 1104: ...ut is not a sheet in the current sheet set Table Style Settings Displays options for the table style Add Adds a sheet number column to the sheet list table Column Settings Area Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table Each line in the list represents a column The top to bottom order of the list represents how the columns will be displayed in the table left to right Move Do...

Page 1105: ...wse button displays the Table Style Dialog Box Table Style Sample Area Displays a sample of the currently selected table style Title Text Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table Table Data Settings Displays options for the table data Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager Sheet List tab Command line sheetset Displays information that is specific to the selecte...

Page 1106: ...s the Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager Sheet List tab Command line sheetset Lists the custom properties associated with the current sheet set 1082 Chapter 20 ...

Page 1107: ...nt sheet set or with each sheet Custom properties can be used to store information such as a contract number the name of the designer and the release date Default Value Specifies a value for the custom property Name Specifies the name of a new custom property Owner Specifies whether the custom property belongs to the sheet set or to a sheet Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Se...

Page 1108: ...ich you can add a folder location to the list Delete Removes the selected folder from the list Sheet Properties Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager Sheet List tab Command line sheetset Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet such as the sheet title sheet number and whether it will be included in publishing operations Also displays custom properties if any You can enter a ne...

Page 1109: ...t was found If the paths are different you can modify the path and file name in Expected Layout This operation reassociates the sheet with the sheet set New Sheet Selection Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager Sheet List tab Command line sheetset Saves a named selection of sheets for future operations After you select several sheets and then save the selection you can restore the sheet selectio...

Page 1110: ...et List tab Command line sheetset Renames or deletes saved sheet selections Delete Deletes the selected sheet selection Only the sheet selection is deleted The sheets themselves are unaffected Rename Renames the selected sheet selection Sheet Selections Specifies the sheet selection that you want to rename or delete 1086 Chapter 20 ...

Page 1111: ...ys the List of Blocks Dialog Box Category Name Specifies the name of a new view category Select the Callout Blocks to be Used in this Category Provides a method for listing the callout blocks appropriate to the current view category List of Blocks Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager View List tab Command line sheetset Lists adds or deletes callout blocks for use in the current sheet set View C...

Page 1112: ... Displays the list of blocks available for use with the current sheet set Preview area Displays a preview image when a single block is selected Select Block Dialog Box Tools Menu Sheet Set Manager View List tab Command line sheetset Adds a new label block or callout blocks for use in the current sheet set 1088 Chapter 20 ...

Page 1113: ...h of a drawing template DWT file to be used as the source of a block definition The Browse button displays Select Drawing a standard file selection dialog box Preview Displays a preview image when a single block is selected Select the Drawing File as a Block Uses the entire specified drawing file or drawing template file as the block definition SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager Tools menu ...

Page 1114: ...n chkdsk reset the serial I O ports or run external programs that require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored on a floppy disk Load Terminate and Stay Resident programs into memory before starting this program SHOWMAT Lists the material type and attachment method for a selected object Command line showmat Select object Use an object selection method to select a single object Depending on ...

Page 1115: ...e signed file has been modified since it was signed Name Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being viewed Digital Signature Status Displays a Valid Signature icon if a digital signature is valid and an Invalid Signature icon if the digital signature is not valid File Status Displays the status of the signed file View Base Signature Displays the Digital Signature C...

Page 1116: ...ital signature attached Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box Command line sigvalidate Displays information about a digital signature You can determine if a digital signature is valid and if the signed file has been modified since it was signed Name Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being viewed Digital Signature Status Displays the status of the digital signatu...

Page 1117: ...ation about a digital signature based on the item you select in the Other Fields list Comment Displays any comments about the digital signature that is attached to the current file Signature Date and Time Displays the date and time that the digital signature was attached to the current file The date and time are based on the time service used when the signature was attached Time Service Used Displ...

Page 1118: ...e line objects Sketch Pen Pick Button Exit ENTER button 3 Quit button 4 Record button 2 Erase button 5 Connect button 6 Period button 1 Enter an option or press a pointer button Pen Pick Button Raises and lowers the sketching pen The pen must be raised before you can select menu items with the pointing device Exit ENTER button 3 Records and reports the number of temporary lines sketched and ends t...

Page 1119: ...ith a plane Solids toolbar Draw menu Solids Slice Command line slice Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Regions in the current selection set are ignored Specify first point on slicing plane by Object Z Axis View XY YZ ZX 3 Points 3points Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER Object Aligns the cutting plane with a circle ellipse circular or ellipt...

Page 1120: ... 1 Specify a point on the Z axis normal of the plane Specify a point 2 2 1 2 1 cutting plane sliced object Z axis cutting plane side view normal You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify The sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or keep Both sides Specify a point 1 or enter b Th...

Page 1121: ...ith the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane Specify a point on the XY plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER 1 sliced object XY cutting plane You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify The sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids Specify a point on t...

Page 1122: ...point 1 or enter b The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3 Points ZX Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane Specify a point on the ZX plane 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER Specify a point on the des...

Page 1123: ... on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3 Points 3 Points Defines the cutting plane using three points Specify second point on plane Specify a point 2 Specify third point on plane Specify a point 3 1 3 2 sliced object 3 point cutting plane You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify The...

Page 1124: ...wo pieces creates two solids from the pieces on either side of the plane SLICE never creates more than two new composite solids for each selected solid SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals Status bar Snap Command line snap or snap for transparent use Specify Snap Spacing or On Off Aspect Rotate Style Type current Specify a distance enter an option or press ENTER Snap Spacing Activ...

Page 1125: ...otate Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid The rotation angle is measured relative to the current UCS You can specify a rotation angle between 90 and 90 degrees A positive angle rotates the grid counterclockwise about its base point A negative angle rotates the grid clockwise Specify base point current Specify a point or press ENTER Specify rotation angle current Specify an angle or press...

Page 1126: ...pacing current Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify vertical spacing current Specify a distance or press ENTER Isometric Sets an isometric grid in which the grid points are initially at 30 degree and 150 degree angles Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different Aspect values Specify vertical spacing current Specify a distance or press ENTER left isoplane top isoplane right isoplan...

Page 1127: ...ar to the viewing direction Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions of solids behind the cutting plane For sectional views cross hatching is created using the current values of the HPNAME HPSCALE and HPANG system variables Any existing profiles and sections in the selected viewport are deleted and new ones are generated All layers except those required to display the profil...

Page 1128: ... Specify third point Specify a point 3 diagonally opposite the second Specify fourth point or exit Specify a point 4 or press ENTER 1 2 4 3 Pressing ENTER at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle Specifying a point 5 creates a quadrilateral area The last two points form the first edge of the next filled area The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated Specifying successive th...

Page 1129: ...it eXit Enter an option or press ENTER Extrude Extrudes selected planar faces of a 3D solid object to a specified height or along a path You can select multiple faces at one time Select faces or Undo Remove Select one or more faces or enter an option Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces or enter an option Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the se...

Page 1130: ...mpt is displayed Face selection has been completely undone face selected face removed from selection set 1 Add Adds faces to the selection set Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces 1 or select an option selection set face added to selection set 1 Undo Cancels selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection set and redisplays the prompt Remove Removes previously s...

Page 1131: ...em to the selection set After you select faces or choose an option the following prompt is displayed Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces 1 enter an option or press ENTER selection set all faces added to selection set 1 Specify height of extrusion or Path Specify a distance or enter p face selected face extruded Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box 1107 ...

Page 1132: ...g the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in and a negative angle tapers the face out The default angle 0 extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value If you specify a large taper angle or height you can cause the face to taper to a point before it reaches the extrusion height Path Sets a path for the extrusion p...

Page 1133: ...the point otherwise the spline path is moved to the center of the profile and the profiles are rotated about its center If the path contains segments that are not tangent the object is extruded along each segment and then the joint along the plane is mitered bisecting the angle formed by the segments If the path is closed the profile lies on the miter plane This allows the start and end sections o...

Page 1134: ...out a specified axis Select faces or Undo Remove Select one or more faces or enter an option The descriptions of the Undo Remove Add and All options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude After you select faces or enter an option the following prompt is displayed Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces enter an option or press ENTER Specify an axis point...

Page 1135: ...n existing object You can select the following objects Line Aligns the axis with the selected line Circle Aligns with the 3D axis of the circle perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle Arc Aligns with the 3D axis of the arc perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc Ellipse Aligns with the 3D axis of the ellipse perp...

Page 1136: ... the viewing direction of the current viewport that passes through the selected point Specify the origin of the rotation 0 0 0 Specify a point Specify a rotation angle or Reference Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle Specify the reference sta...

Page 1137: ...decreases the size or volume of the solid Select faces or Undo Remove Select one or more faces or enter an option 1 The descriptions of the Undo Remove Add and All options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude After you select faces or enter an option the following prompt is displayed Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces enter an option or press ENTE...

Page 1138: ...he taper angle Specify an angle between 90 and 90 degrees face selected base point and second point selected face tapered 10 deg 1 2 3 Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in and a negative angle tapers the face out The default angle 0 extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value Delete Deletes or rem...

Page 1139: ...e or more faces The descriptions of the Undo Remove Add and All options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude After you select faces or enter an option the following prompt is displayed Select faces or Undo Remove ALL Select one or more faces 1 enter an option or press ENTER Specify a base point or displacement Specify a base point 2 Specify a second point of displaceme...

Page 1140: ...nter a Solids Editing Option prompt Edge Edits 3D solid objects by changing the color of or copying individual edges Enter an edge editing option Copy coLor Undo eXit eXit Enter an option or press ENTER Copy Copies 3D edges All 3D solid edges are copied as a line arc circle ellipse or spline Select edges or Undo Remove Select one or more edges or enter an option After you select edges or enter an ...

Page 1141: ...displayed Edge selection has been completely undone Add Adds edges to the selection set Select edges or Undo Remove Select one or more edges or enter an option Undo Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set The previous prompt is displayed Remove Removes previously selected edges The previous prompt is displayed Color Changes the color of edges Select edges or Und...

Page 1142: ...aces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be successful Imprinting is limited to the following objects arcs circles lines 2D and 3D polylines ellipses splines regions bodies and 3D solids Select a 3D solid Select an object 1 Select an object to imprint Select an object 2 Delete the source object N Enter y or press ENTER Select an object to imprint Select an object or press ENTER solid ...

Page 1143: ...ptions under Extrude After you select faces or enter an option the following prompt is displayed Remove faces or Undo Add ALL Select a face 1 enter an option or press ENTER Enter the shell offset distance Specify a distance face selected shell offset 0 5 shell offset 0 5 1 Specifying a positive value creates a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid specifying a negative value creates a shell t...

Page 1144: ...id Select an object This object is a valid ShapeManager solid Undo Undoes the editing action Exit Exits the face editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt Undo Undoes the editing action Exit Exits the SOLIDEDIT command SOLPROF Creates profile images of three dimensional solids in paper space Solids toolbar 1120 Chapter 20 ...

Page 1145: ...on layer PV 4B and the block containing the hidden lines if requested is inserted on layer PH 4B If these layers do not exist the command creates them If the layers do exist the blocks are added to the information already on the layers NOTE To determine the handle of a viewport select the viewport while in paper space and use the LIST command Choose a layout tab to move from model space to paper s...

Page 1146: ...rofile lines with 3D objects Yes Creates the profile lines with 2D objects The 3D profile is projected onto a plane normal to the viewing direction and passing through the origin of the UCS SOLPROF cleans up the 2D profile by eliminating lines that are parallel to the viewing direction and by converting arcs and circles that are viewed on edge into lines The next prompt determines whether tangenti...

Page 1147: ...Ortho Auxiliary Section on page 1128 Enter an option or press ENTER to exit the command SOLVIEW calculates the projection as it guides you through the process of creating orthographic auxiliary and sectional views View specific information is saved with each viewport you create This information is used by SOLDRAW which does the final generation of the drawing view SOLVIEW uses the paper space and ...

Page 1148: ...d when you run SOLDRAW Do not place permanent drawing information on these layers SOLVIEW places the viewport objects on the VPORTS layer SOLVIEW creates this layer if it does not already exist SOLVIEW must be run in a layout tab If the Model tab is current the last active layout tab is made current UCS Creates a profile view relative to a user coordinate system If no viewports exist in your drawi...

Page 1149: ...per space The default value is 1 1 Specify view center Specify a point and press ENTER when done The center is based on the current model space extents You can try several points until you are satisfied with the view s location At the next prompt specify the opposite corners of the viewport Specify the first corner of viewport Specify a point Specify the other corner of viewport Specify a point En...

Page 1150: ...rd characters accepted by the UCS command are valid Enter UCS names to list Enter a name or press ENTER to list all UCSs After the list is displayed press any key to return to the first prompt Current Uses the XY plane of the current UCS to create a profile view Enter view scale 1 0 Enter a number or press ENTER Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view Entering a scale ...

Page 1151: ...Specify side of viewport to project Select the edge of a viewport Specify view center Specify a point and press ENTER At the next prompt specify the opposite corners of the viewport Specify first corner of viewport Specify opposite corner of viewport Enter view name Enter a name for the view Auxiliary Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view An auxiliary view is one that is projected onto a...

Page 1152: ...w from Specify a point A rubber band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the center of the new viewport You can try several points until you are satisfied with the view s location Specify view center Specify a point and press ENTER At the next prompt specify the opposite corners of the viewport Specify first corner of viewport Specify opposite corner of viewport Enter view na...

Page 1153: ...rst point of cutting plane Specify second point of cutting plane Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting plane Specify side to view from Specify a point Enter the scale of the new view Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space The default value is a 1 1 scale which is equivalent to zoom 1 0xp Enter view scale curren...

Page 1154: ...In a paper space layout the prompt is displayed as follows Select a viewport Pick a layout viewport object Specify model space distance 1 000 Enter a length in model space to convert to the equivalent length in paper space SPACETRANS converts lengths typically text heights from either model space or paper space to its equivalent length in the other space It is intended to be invoked transparently ...

Page 1155: ...DER and ATTDEF The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed only if an unknown word is found in the selected text Spell checking in attributes is limited to attribute values only The spelling in text objects within block references and nested block references is checked but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block reference has been selected Add Adds the current ...

Page 1156: ...ed replacement words from the current dictionary Select a replacement in the list or enter a replacement word in the box Change Dictionaries Dialog Box Tools menu Spelling Command line spell or spell for transparent use Changes to another dictionary During the spelling check SPELL matches the words in the drawing to the words in the current main dictionary Any spelling exceptions that you identify...

Page 1157: ... the current custom dictionary The maximum length is 63 characters Browse Displays the Select Custom Dictionary dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes in which you can select a custom dictionary file to use The selected dictionary file is used until another file is selected Delete Deletes the word you enter in the box or select from the custom dictionary Custom Dictionary Words Displays...

Page 1158: ...ts central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system UCS Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY plane Specify Radius of sphere or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the radius of the sphere Diameter Defines the diameter of the sphere Specify diameter Specify a distance center radius diameter SPLINE Fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a...

Page 1159: ...ption or press ENTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Next Point Continuing to enter points adds additional spline curve segments until you press ENTER Enter undo to remove the last point specified Once you press ENTER you are prompted to specify the start tangent for the spline curve Close Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as co incident with the first and making it tangent to the joint Specify tan...

Page 1160: ... or press ENTER If you set the tolerance to 0 the spline curve passes through the fit points Entering a tolerance greater than 0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points within the specified tolerance SPLINE returns to the previous prompt positive tolerance zero tolerance Start Tangent Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the spline curve Specify start tangent Specif...

Page 1161: ...nt splines and depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable deletes the polylines Select objects to convert to splines Select objects Select 2D or 3D spline fit polylines and press ENTER when you finish SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline fit polyline Modify II toolbar Modify menu Object Spline Shortcut menu Select a spline to edit right click in the drawing area and choose Spline Edit Co...

Page 1162: ... option Add Close Delete Move Purge Tangents toLerance eXit eXit Enter an option or press ENTER NOTE If the selected spline is closed the Close option is replaced by the Open option Add Adds fit points to a spline Specify control point exit Specify a control point or press ENTER Specify new point exit Specify a point or press ENTER Specify new point exit Specify a point or press ENTER When you sel...

Page 1163: ...ne tangent continuity Open Opens a closed spline If the spline s start point and endpoint were the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points the Open option returns the spline to its original state The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity smoothness If the spline was open its start point and endpoint were not the same b...

Page 1164: ...point or press ENTER Move Moves fit points to a new location Specify new location or Next Previous Select Point eXit N Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you specify The previous prompt is repeated new point result Next Moves selection to the next point Previous Moves selection to the previous point 1140 Chapter 20 ...

Page 1165: ...ngent or System default Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER If the spline is closed the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or System Default The System Default option calculates the default tangents at the ends You can specify a point or use the Tangent or Perpendicular object snap mode to make the spline tangential or perpendicular to existing objects Tolerance Refits the spline to the exi...

Page 1166: ...o its original open state and removes tangent continuity Move Vertex Relocates a spline s control vertices and purges the fit points Specify new location or Next Previous Select Point eXit N Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you specify After you specify a new location for the selected point SPLINEDIT recalculates and displays ...

Page 1167: ...ints on the spline Enter new order current Enter an integer or press ENTER Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control The maximum value for order is 26 Weight Changes the weight at various spline control points A larger weight value pulls the spline closer to the control point Enter new weight curren...

Page 1168: ... point from the set of control points Specify fit point exit Specify a point or press ENTER Exit Returns to the main Refine prompt Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt Reverse Reverses the spline s direction This option is intended primarily for third party applications Undo Cancels the last editing action STANDARDS Manages the association of standards files with drawings CAD Standards toolba...

Page 1169: ...les that are associated with the current drawing Standards Files Associated with the Current Drawing Lists all standards DWS files that are associated with the current drawing To add a standards file click Add Standards File To remove a standards file click Remove Standards File If conflicts arise between multiple standards in this list for example if two standards specify layers of the same name ...

Page 1170: ...g Properties dialog box click the Summary tab Plug ins Tab Lists and describes the standards plug ins that are installed on the current system A standards plug in is installed for each of the named objects for which standards can be defined layers dimension styles linetypes and text styles In the future it is expected that third party applications will be able to install additional plug ins Plug i...

Page 1171: ...lations that occur after an audit This option is set for each system and applies to all drawings checked on a system Check Standards Settings Sets options for fixing violations and ignoring flagged problems Disable Standards Notifications Turns off notifications for standards violations and for missing standards files Display Alert upon Standards Violation Turns on notification for standards viola...

Page 1172: ...tion If no recommended replacement is found when a standards file DWS is selected in the CAD Standards Settings dialog box the default selection in the Replace With list is the first replacement item from the selected standards file If this setting is set to None and no recommended replacement is found no items will be selected in the Replace With list Show Ignored Problems Switches between displa...

Page 1173: ... up rendering buffers Display Time Displays time for displaying the rendering Initialization Time Displays time for initializing rendering buffers callbacks lights and materials Rendering Time Displays the time used to generate the last rendering Rendering Type Lists the last rendering type used Save Statistics to File Saves the information in the Statistics dialog box to an ASCII file Enter a fil...

Page 1174: ...s and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing This includes graphical objects such as arcs and polylines and nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes and block definitions When used at the DIM prompt STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables In addition STATUS displ...

Page 1175: ...the XY coordinate of the display s lower left corner The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper right corner Fill Grid Ortho Qtext Snap Tablet Shows whether these modes are on or off Free Dwg Disk Space Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for this program s temporary files Free Physical Memory Lists the amount of installed memory free on your system Free Swap ...

Page 1176: ...oordinate of the lower left corner of the extents The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper right corner The notation Over to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that the drawing extends outside the grid limits Object Snap Modes Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP Snap Resolution Is Displays the snap spacing in the X and Y directions stored in the SNAPUNIT s...

Page 1177: ...octant of the WCS STRETCH Moves or stretches objects Modify toolbar Modify menu Stretch Command line stretch Select objects to stretch by crossing window or crossing polygon Select objects Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method and press ENTER Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched 1 ...

Page 1178: ...splacement prompt the first point is treated as an X Y Z displacement STYLE Creates modifies or sets named text styles Text toolbar Format menu Text Style Command line style or style for transparent use The Text Style Dialog Box is displayed If you enter style at the Command prompt STYLE displays STYLE Command Line Text Style Dialog Box Format menu Text Style Command line style or style for transp...

Page 1179: ... text style Select a name from the list to make it current and then choose Delete Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled shape SHX fonts in the Fonts folder When you select a name from the list the program reads the file for the specified font The file s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text...

Page 1180: ...current settings You can accept the default or enter a name and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name Oblique Angle Sets the obliquing angle of the text Entering a value between 85 and 85 italicizes the text Preview Button Updates the sample text in the character preview image according to any changes you ve made in the dialog box NOTE The preview image does not refle...

Page 1181: ...rientation or font file of an existing text style all text objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated Effects Modifies characteristics of the font such as its height width factor and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down backwards or vertically aligned NOTE TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen O...

Page 1182: ...iles and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file Pressing ENTER displays the following prompt full font names are displayed only if the current font is a TrueType font Existing style Full font name current Specify full font name or font file name TTF or SHX Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file name If you do not enter a file name extension this program searches for an SHX file...

Page 1183: ...on List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing Enter text style s to list Enter the name of a style or press ENTER At the Enter Text Style s to List prompt entering the name of a style displays the name font file height width factor obliquing angle and generation of the style and exits the command Entering an asterisk or pressing ENTER displays the height width factor obliquing...

Page 1184: ...nsion stb A color dependent plot style table creates 255 plot styles based on color the file name has the extension ctb You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new drawings or for pre AutoCAD 2000 drawings when they are saved in a later format Plot Style Table Editor File menu Plot Style Manager Command line stylesmanager Modifies the plot styles in a plot style table If the...

Page 1185: ...location path name and table type You can modify the description and you can apply scaling to non ISO linetypes and fill patterns Apply Global Scale Factor to Non ISO Linetypes Scales all the non ISO linetypes and fill patterns in the plot styles of objects controlled by this plot style table Delete R14 Color Mapping Table Deletes color mapping tables that are used when you open pre AutoCAD 2000 d...

Page 1186: ...e you are editing number of plot styles path and version number of the Plot Style Table Editor Plot Style Table File Name Displays the name of the plot style table file you are editing Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non ISO linetypes and fill patterns Table View and Form View Tabs Plot Style Table Editor Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings Plot style...

Page 1187: ...r for an object The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color If you assign a plot style color the color overrides the object s color at plot time You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color Dialog Box and select one of the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors a true color or a color from a color book The color you specify is displayed in the plot style color list as Custo...

Page 1188: ...ou use the object s color or assign a plot style color Fill Style Provides the following fill styles Solid Checkerboard Crosshatch Diamonds Horizontal Bars Slant Left Slant Right Square Dots and Vertical Bar The default setting for Fill Style is Use Object Fill Style If you assign a fill style the fill style overrides the object s fill style at plot time Line End Style Provides the following line ...

Page 1189: ...or to white Selecting 100 displays the color at its full intensity In order for screening to work the Enable Dithering option must be selected Use Assigned Pen Number Pen Plotters Only Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this plot style Available pens range from 1 to 32 If plot style color is set to Use Object Color or you are editing a plot style in a color dependent plot style ...

Page 1190: ...a color dependent plot style table has 255 plot styles mapped to color You also cannot add a plot style to a named plot style table that has a translation table Delete Style Deletes the selected style from the plot style table Objects assigned this plot style retain the plot style assignment but plot as Normal because the plot style is no longer defined in the plot style table You cannot delete a ...

Page 1191: ... the decimal point Lineweight values must be zero or a positive number If you create a lineweight with a zero width the line is plotted as thin as the plotter can create it The maximum possible lineweight value is 100 millimeters approximately four inches Sort Lineweights Sorts the list of lineweights by value If you change lineweight values choose Sort Lineweights to resort the list Units for Lis...

Page 1192: ...lid or region is created solid after SUBTRACT solid to subtract solid to be subtracted from region to be subtracted from region to subtract region after SUBTRACT You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane However you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes The program then produces separate subtracted regions on ea...

Page 1193: ...page 1169 Arrange Icons on page 1169 Enter an option Cascade Overlaps windows leaving title bars visible Tile Horizontal Arranges windows in horizontal nonoverlapping tiles Tile Vertical Arranges windows in vertical nonoverlapping tiles Arrange Icons Arranges the window icons Edit Lineweights Dialog Box 1169 ...

Page 1194: ...1170 ...

Page 1195: ...le The Insert Table Dialog Box is displayed If you enter table at the Command prompt TABLE displays TABLE Command Line Insert Table Dialog Box Draw menu Table Command line table Inserts an empty table in the drawing Table Style Settings Set the apearance of the table Insert Table Dialog Box 1171 ...

Page 1196: ... row height is one line Row Height Specifies the height of the rows in lines The height of a line is based on the text height and the cell margin which are both set in the table style When the Specify Window option is selected and you specify the number of rows the Auto option is selected and the row height is controlled by the height of the table Rows Icon Indicates rows Specify Insertion Point S...

Page 1197: ... Current table style Standard Cell width 2 5000 Cell height 1 line s Enter Number of Columns or Auto on page 1174 5 Number of Columns Specifies the number of columns Enter number of rows or Auto 1 Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows Specify insertion point or Style Width Height Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper left corner of the table You can use the pointing device or e...

Page 1198: ...ight depend on the size of the window you specify Specify first corner or Height First Corner Specifies the location of the upper left corner of the table If the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up the insertion point is the lower left corner of the table Specify second corner Height Specifies a height for the table rows Enter minimum cell height 1 line Specify f...

Page 1199: ...mand line tabledit Pick a table cell Click inside a table cell and enter text or use the Text Formatting toolbar or the Options shortcut menu to make changes TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format Shortcut menu With a table selected right click and click Export on the shortcut menu Command line tableexport A Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Table data is e...

Page 1200: ...yle Displays the name of the table style that is applied to tables you create The default table style is STANDARD Styles Displays a list of table styles The current style is highlighted List Controls the contents of the Styles list All Styles Displays all table styles Styles in Use Displays only the table styles that are referenced by tables in the current drawing Preview Of Displays a preview ima...

Page 1201: ... in the drawing cannot be deleted Create New Table Style Dialog Box Format menu Table Style Command line tablestyle Specifies a name for the new table style and specifies the existing table style on which the new table style will be based Continue Displays the New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes in which you define the new table style New Style Name Names the new table style Start With Specifi...

Page 1202: ...ons on each tab set the appearance of the data cells the column heads or the table title Cell Properties Set the appearance of the data cells the column heads and the table title depending on which tab is active Data tab Column Heads tab or Title tab Alignment Sets justification and alignment for the text in the table cell Text is middle top or bottom aligned with respect to the top and bottom bor...

Page 1203: ...ify by clicking a border button You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color Dialog Box Grid Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border button If you use a heavy lineweight you may have to increase the cell margins Horizontal Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the left and right cell borders Include Header Title ...

Page 1204: ...om of the table When you click Insert Rows and click Below the new row is inserted above the current row Text Color Specifies the color of the text You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color Dialog Box Text Height Sets the text height The default text height for data and column head cells is 0 1800 The default text height for the table title is 0 25 Text Style Lists all the text style...

Page 1205: ... the digitizer with a paper drawing or photograph creating the tablet transformation which is the mapping of points from the tablet to the coordinate drawing system Calibration is digitizing points on the drawing and mapping them to their real coordinates Calibration can be performed in model space or paper space The Cal option turns on Tablet mode in the space in which the tablet is calibrated Wh...

Page 1206: ... there have been no failures of projection transformation the program prompts you to choose a transformation type Enter transformation type Orthogonal Affine Projective Repeat table Repeat Enter an option or press ENTER Only transformation types for which the outcome was Success Exact or Canceled are included in this prompt A projective transformation can be specified even if it was canceled The p...

Page 1207: ...e which rates the transformation types Transformation Table Reports the number of calibration points and provides information about each transformation type Outcome of Fit Reports the outcome of fit for each of the transformation types If the outcome of fit is not Success or Exact for any of the transformation types the program reports failure of the entire calibration process and ends the command...

Page 1208: ...near units Second Largest Residual At Point Reports the point at which the mapping is second least accurate The residual is the distance between where the point was mapped during transformation and where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect The distance is given in the current linear units Cfg Designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or designates a small portion of a large tablet as a s...

Page 1209: ... as the fixed screen pointing area The following prompt is displayed Do you want to specify the Floating Screen Pointing area Yes No N Enter y or n or press ENTER If you responded y to the previous prompt respond to the following prompt Do you want the Floating Screen Area to be the same size as the Fixed Screen Pointing Area Yes No Y Enter y or n or press ENTER If you responded n to the previous ...

Page 1210: ...ed on the polyline or line determines the direction of the extrusion The original path curve is drawn with wide lines to help you visualize how the direction vector dictates the construction of a tabulated surface path curve direction vector selection point extrusion downward TABSURF constructs a 2 by n polygon mesh where n is determined by the SURFTAB1 system variable The M direction of the mesh ...

Page 1211: ...th the previous line of text The point that you specified at the prompt is also stored as the insertion point of the text The In Place Text Editor for single line text consists of a bounding box that is the height of the text and expands as you type Right click to select Text Shortcut Menu on page 1193on the shortcut menu Each line of text is a separate object To end a line and begin another press...

Page 1212: ...pecify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 2 Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height The longer the text string the shorter the characters 1 2 Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height Available for horizontally oriented te...

Page 1213: ...art point toward the specified point If you specify a point to the left of the center point the text is drawn upside down 1 Middle Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you specify Middle aligned text does not rest on the baseline Specify middle point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height current Specify rotation angle of text current Enter t...

Page 1214: ...Specify top center point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height current Specify rotation angle of text current Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text 1 TR Top Right Right justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify top right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height current Specify rotation angle of t...

Page 1215: ...he midpoint of the height of uppercase letters The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text including descenders 1 MR Middle Right Right justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify middle right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height current Specify rotation angle of text current Enter text in the In Place Text Edit...

Page 1216: ...seline Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify bottom right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height current Specify rotation angle of text current Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text 1 Style Specifies the text style which determines the appearance of the text characters Text you create uses the current text style Enter style name or current Enter a text...

Page 1217: ... field is displayed in the text Opaque Background When checked makes the background of the editor opaque By default the editor is transparent Select All Selects all the text in the single line text object Special Unicode Characters When entering text you can create special characters including the degree symbol plus minus tolerance symbol and the diameter symbol by entering the following Unicode c...

Page 1218: ...trol information in the text string Use a pair of percent signs to introduce each control sequence You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD text fonts and Adobe PostScript fonts nnn Draws character number nnn Draws a single percent sign c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol ý d Draws degrees symbol o Toggles overscoring on and off p Draws plus minus tolerance symbol 1194 Chapter 2...

Page 1219: ... the ALT key and enter 0128 on the numeric keypad TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable Entering text at the Command prompt displays the same prompts as the TEXT command Unlike the TEXT command TEXT honors the setting of the TEXTEVAL system variable When the TEXTEVAL system variable is set to 2 AutoLISP expressions are evaluated when the TEXT command ends AutoLISP expressions that are entered usin...

Page 1220: ...ront of all other objects in the drawing Dimensions Brings all dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing Text Brings all text in front of all other objects in the drawing TIFOUT Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format Command line tifout The Create Raster File dialog box a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes is displayed Enter the file name in the dialog box Select obje...

Page 1221: ...t millisecond using a 24 hour clock Created Displays date and time the current drawing was created Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing This date and time is initially the drawing creation time The time is revised whenever the drawing file is saved Total Editing Time Displays time spent editing the current drawing This timer is updated by the program ...

Page 1222: ...ht click and click Insert Block on the shortcut menu Command line tinsert The Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box is displayed Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box Shortcut menu With a cell in a table selected right click and click Insert Block on the shortcut menu Command line tinsert Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell Cell Alignment Specifies alignment for the blo...

Page 1223: ...imension menu Tolerance Command line tolerance The Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box is displayed Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box Dimension menu Tolerance Command line tolerance Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame After you select geometric characteristic symbols the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed Enter tolerance location Specify a ...

Page 1224: ... front of the tolerance value Click the box to insert the diameter symbol First Box Creates the datum reference value Enter a value in the box Second Box Creates the tolerance value Enter a value in the box Second Box Displays the Material Condition Dialog Box in which you select a modifying symbol These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference Select the symbol you want to use The dialog b...

Page 1225: ... theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone for a feature Datum 2 Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference Datum 3 Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference Height Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature co...

Page 1226: ...cylinder or other geometry can serve as a datum Enter the letter in the box Symbol Dialog Box Dimension menu Tolerance Command line tolerance Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location orientation form profile and runout geometric characteristic symbol diameter symbol tolerance value material condition symbol datum reference letter Select the symbol you want to use The dialog box c...

Page 1227: ...coaxiality Location Symmetry Orientation Parallelism Orientation Perpendicularity Orientation Angularity Form Cylindricity Form Flatness Form Circularity or roundness Form Straightness Profile Profile of a surface Profile Profile of a line Runout Circular runout Runout Total runout Symbol Dialog Box 1203 ...

Page 1228: ... and customizes toolbars View menu Toolbars Shortcut menu Right click any toolbar and choose Customize Command line toolbar The Customize User Interface Dialog Box see CUI is displayed If you enter toolbar at the Command prompt TOOLBAR displays TOOLBAR Command Line TOOLBAR Command Line If you enter toolbar at the Command prompt TOOLBAR displays prompts on the command line Enter Toolbar Name or All...

Page 1229: ...tical 0 0 Specify a position or press ENTER The Enter New Position prompt sets the position of the toolbar in columns and rows relative to a toolbar dock The first value is horizontal The second value is vertical Right Docks the specified toolbar at the right side of the screen Enter new position horizontal vertical 0 0 Specify a position or press ENTER The Enter New Position prompt sets the posit...

Page 1230: ...ntal The second value is vertical Float Changes the toolbar from docked to floating Enter new position screen coordinates 0 0 Specify a position or press ENTER Enter number of rows for toolbar 1 Enter a value The Enter New Position prompt specifies the location of the floating toolbar in screen coordinate values The Enter Number of Rows for Toolbar prompt specifies the number of rows in the floati...

Page 1231: ... Docking Controls whether the tool palette docks when you drag it over a docking area at the side of the drawing Clear this option to undock a docked tool palette Auto hide Controls display of the tool palette When this option is selected only the tool palette title bar is displayed when the cursor moves outside the tool palette When this option is cleared the full tool palette is displayed when t...

Page 1232: ... current tab Properties Displays the Tool Properties Dialog Box where you can change the properties of the selected tool Rename Renames the selected tool Rename Tool Palette Renames the current tool palette Size Changes the cursor to a four direction arrow Drag the right edge or the bottom edge of the tool palette to change its size Transparency Displays the Transparency Dialog Box on page 808 Vie...

Page 1233: ... tool name below List View Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right Apply To Controls whether the view options are applied to the current tool palette or to all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window Tool Properties Dialog Box Shortcut menu Right click a tool on a tool palette and click Properties Controls the properties associated with the selected tool Image Displays the icon of...

Page 1234: ...individual parts of the block are inserted instead of the block ISO Pen Width Specifies the ISO pen width of an ISO hatch pattern Layer Specifies the layer override for the selected tool Linetype Specifies the linetype override for the selected tool Lineweight Specifies the lineweight override for the selected tool Name Specifies the name of the block Pattern Name Specifies the pattern name of hat...

Page 1235: ...erties associated with the selected tool General Add Actions Dialog Box Adds actions to a parameter or parameter set in the Block Authoring Palettes in the Block Editor on page 139 Action Object List Lists the actions associated with the selected parameter or parameter set Action Object to Add Specifies the action to add to the parameter or parameter set Add Adds the action specified in the Action...

Page 1236: ...r of torus 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER Specify Radius of torus or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d 1 Radius Defines the radius of the torus the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube A negative radius creates a solid shaped like an American football Specify radius of tube or Diameter Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the radius of the tube Diame...

Page 1237: ... diameter TRACE Creates solid lines Command line trace Specify trace width current Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify start point Specify a point 1 Specify next point Specify a point 2 Specify next point Specify a point 3 or press ENTER to end the command The endpoints of a trace are on the center line and are always cut square TRACE automatically calculates the correct bevels for connectio...

Page 1238: ...ge Transparency Command line transparency Select image s Enter transparency mode ON OFF current Enter an option or press ENTER Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible NOTE The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether dockable windows can be made transparent TRAYSETTINGS Controls the di...

Page 1239: ...line treestat or treestat for transparent use The program indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space The result is called a spatial index The spatial index is tree structured and has branching nodes to which objects are attached The index has two major branches The paper space branch is called a quad tree and treats objects as two dimensional The model space branch is called...

Page 1240: ...the objects that define the cutting edges to which you want to trim an object or press ENTER to select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS NOTE To select cutting edges that include blocks you can use only the single selection Crossing Fence and Select All options S...

Page 1241: ...election fence Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence or enter u Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence enter u or press ENTER Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points Specify first corner Specify a point Specify opposite corner Specify a point at a diagonal from the first p...

Page 1242: ...in 3D space UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space projection of objects onto current UCS intersecting with cutting edge View Specifies projection along the current view direction The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view left viewport right viewport 1218 Chapter...

Page 1243: ...Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space NOTE When trimming hatches do not set Edge to Extend If you do gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches even when the gap tolerance is set to a correct value No extend Erase Deletes selected objects This option provides a convenient method to erase unneeded objects without...

Page 1244: ...Undo Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM 1220 Chapter 21 ...

Page 1245: ...ons external to the current drawing such as plotting or writing to a file cannot be undone If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command their effects are undone along with the effects of the main command You can also press CTRL Z to undo The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1 UCS Manages user coordinate systems UCS toolbar Tools menu New UCS Command line ucs Enter an ...

Page 1246: ...positive portion of Z axis current Specify a point Specify a new origin and a point that lies on the new positive Z axis The Z axis option tilts the XY plane 3 Point Specifies the new UCS origin and the direction of its positive X and Y axes The Z axis follows by applying the right hand rule For information about the right hand rule see Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D in the User s Gui...

Page 1247: ... new UCS is parallel to the XY plane in effect when the object was drawn However the X and Y axes can be rotated differently The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table Define a UCS by selecting an object Method of determining UCS Object The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin The X axis passes through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point Arc The center of th...

Page 1248: ...s by application of the right hand rule 3D face The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS origin and the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the object about its Shape text block reference attribute definition extrusion direction The object you select to establish a new UCS has a rotation angle of zero in the new UCS Face Aligns the UCS to the selected face of a solid object To se...

Page 1249: ...irection of rotation around the axis For information about the right hand rule see Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D in the User s Guide after before You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X Y or Z axis rotation about Z axis 90 rotation about Y axis 90 rotation about X axis 90 world coordinate system Move Redefines a UCS by shifting the origin...

Page 1250: ...ot add a UCS to the Previous list Orthographic Specifies one of the six orthographic UCSs provided These UCS settings are typically used when viewing and editing 3D models Enter an option Top Bottom Front BAck Left Right current Enter an option or press ENTER back right left front top origin bottom By default the orthographic UCS settings orient the current UCS relative to the world coordinate sys...

Page 1251: ...ed at the top of the Previous list If you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this viewport the UCS setting changes to Front and then back to World See the UCSVP system variable Restore Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS Restoring a saved UCS does not reestablish the viewing direction in effect when the UCS was saved Enter name of UCS to restore or Enter a name or ent...

Page 1252: ...ick viewport to apply current UCS or All current Specify a viewport by clicking inside it enter a or press ENTER Viewport Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and ends the UCS command All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports List UCSs Lists names of user coordinate systems and provides the origin and X Y and Z axes for each saved UCS relative to the current UCS If the curre...

Page 1253: ...e current UCS The letter W appears in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the world coordinate system With the 3D UCS icon a square is displayed in the XY plane at the origin when the UCS is the same as the world coordinate system A box is formed at the base of the icon if you are viewing the UCS from above the positive Z direction The box is missing if you are viewing the ...

Page 1254: ...Enter an option or press ENTER All No origin Origin 0 0 0 0 0 0 On Displays the UCS icon Off Turns off display of the UCS icon All Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports Otherwise UCSICON affects only the current viewport Enter an option ON OFF Noorigin ORigin current Enter an option to apply to all active viewports or press ENTER 1230 Chapter 22 ...

Page 1255: ...d at the viewport edges the icon is displayed at the lower left corner of the viewport Properties Displays the UCS Icon Dialog Box in which you can control the style visibility and location of the UCS icon UCS Icon Dialog Box View menu Display UCS Icon Command line ucsicon Controls the display properties of the UCS icon UCS Icon Style Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its a...

Page 1256: ...ons are 1 2 or 3 pixels Model Space Icon Color Controls the color of the UCS icon in model space viewports Click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of window elements by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors true colors and color book colors Preview Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space UCS Icon S...

Page 1257: ...ys and modifies defined and unnamed user coordinate systems restores named and orthographic UCSs and specifies UCS icon and UCS settings for viewports Named UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box on page 1233 Orthographic UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box on page 1234 Settings Tab UCS Dialog Box on page 1236 Named UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS UCS Dialog Box 1233 ...

Page 1258: ...nate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly To add a UCS name to this list use the Save option of the UCS command To rename or delete a customized UCS right click the UCS name in the list and use the shortcut menu Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system You can also restore a selected coordinate system by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking the n...

Page 1259: ...ordinate system and the parallel plane passing through the origin of the UCS base setting stored in the UCSBASE system variable Name Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable The parallel plane...

Page 1260: ...r than World the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system Reset Shortcut Menu Only Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system The origin can be changed from its default 0 0 0 position using the Move option of the UCS command To reset the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system r...

Page 1261: ...ate system is not visible in the viewport the UCS icon is displayed at the lower left corner of the viewport Apply to All Active Viewports Applies the UCS icon settings to all active viewports in the current drawing UCS Settings Specifies UCS behavior when the UCS setting is updated Save UCS with Viewport Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport This option sets the UCSVP system varia...

Page 1262: ... closes the dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify a new depth location in the drawing To reset the origin of the selected orthographic UCSs to the default location 0 0 0 right click and click Reset UCS Details Dialog Box Tools menu Named UCS Command line ucsman Displays information about the origin and axes of the selected UCS By default the origin and the values for the X ...

Page 1263: ...un You also cannot undefine external commands and aliases defined in the acad pgp file If an AutoLISP or ObjectARX application has redefined a command with the same name as a built in AutoCAD command the application defined command is active You can restore an undefined command with REDEFINE You can always access a built in AutoCAD command by preceding the command name with a period ObjectARX appl...

Page 1264: ... regenerate the drawing or export the drawing in a different format Number Undoes the specified number of preceding operations The effect is the same as entering u multiple times Auto Groups the actions of a single command making them reversible by a single U command When the Auto option is on starting a command groups all actions until you exit that command You can undo the group of actions as if...

Page 1265: ...zoom and pan commands are combined as a single operation for undo and redo operations Combine zoom and pan operations Yes No Yes Enter y or n or press ENTER Begin End Groups a sequence of actions into a set After you enter the Begin option all subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option Entering undo begin while a group is already active ends the current set and begins ...

Page 1266: ...r Modify menu Solids Editing Union Command line union Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects solids after UNION solids before UNION The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of arbitrary planes The selection sets are divided into subsets that are joined separately Solids are grouped in the first subset The first...

Page 1267: ...nate and angle display formats and precision Format menu Units Command line units or units for transparent use The Drawing Units Dialog Box on page 1243 is displayed If you enter units at the Command prompt UNITS displays UNITS Command Line on page 1247 prompts on the command line Drawing Units Dialog Box Format menu Units Command line units or units for transparent use Defines the unit and angle ...

Page 1268: ...played for linear measurements Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display The following conventions are used for the various angle measures decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers grads appear with a lowercase g suffix and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix The degrees minutes seconds format uses d for degrees for minutes and for seconds for example 123d45 56 7 Surveyor s u...

Page 1269: ...ment for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the spec...

Page 1270: ...inates Angle Specifies a value for the zero angle when Other is selected You can specify the angle by entering a value East Specifies the compass direction east the default North Specifies the compass direction north Other Specifies a direction different from the points of the compass Pick an Angle Button Defines the zero angle in the graphics area based on the angle of an imaginary line that conn...

Page 1271: ...e smallest fraction is displayed if you specify the architectural or fractional format Enter denominator of smallest fraction to display 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 current Enter a value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 or press ENTER The next prompt is for angle formats and precision Systems of angle measure Examples 1 Decimal degrees 45 0000 2 Degrees minutes seconds 45d0 0 3 Grads 50 0000g 4 Radians...

Page 1272: ...d right click and click Update Field Command line updatefield Select objects Use an object selection method or enter all to select all fields in the drawing Fields in selected objects are updated UPDATETHUMBSNOW Manually updates thumbnail previews for sheets sheet views and model space views in the Sheet Set Manager Command line updatethumbsnow Thumbnail previews in the Sheet Set Manager are updat...

Page 1273: ... project referenced by the selected project will also be loaded if available You cannot use this dialog box to load embedded VBA projects Embedded projects are loaded when you open the drawing containing the project and they are unloaded when you close the drawing If you select Open Visual Basic Editor the Visual Basic Editor is opened after the selected project is loaded For information about the...

Page 1274: ...events the AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box from being displayed again You can later enable macro virus protection using the VBA Options Dialog Box available from the VBARUN command Disable Macros Loads the drawing or project file with the macros disabled Use Disable Macros if you do not expect the drawing or project file to contain useful macros or if you aren t certain about the reliabi...

Page 1275: ...the active drawing The list contains all of the drawings that are open in the current work session Embed Embeds the selected project in the specified drawing A drawing can contain only one embedded project You cannot embed a project in a drawing that already contains an embedded project Embedded Project Specifies the name of the embedded project for the drawing If the drawing does not contain an e...

Page 1276: ...e current work session Macros Displays the Macros Dialog Box in which you can run edit or delete a VBA macro New Creates a new project with the default name Global n where n is a session based number incremented with each new project Save As Saves a global project This option is available only when an unsaved global project is selected Unload Unloads the selected global project Visual Basic Editor...

Page 1277: ... VBARUN Command Line Macros Dialog Box Tools menu Macro Macros Command line vbarun Runs edits or deletes a VBA macro You can also create new macros set the VBA options and display the VBA Manager Create Creates a macro with the name specified in Macro Name and then displays the Visual Basic Editor and the empty procedure for the new macro Macros Dialog Box 1253 ...

Page 1278: ...o a different part of the dialog box Edit Displays the Visual Basic Editor and the selected macro Macro List Lists all macros found in the drawing or project selected in Macros In You can double click a macro name in this list to run the macro Macro Name Specifies the name of the macro you want to run edit delete or create Select a name from the list of available macros or enter a name Macros In S...

Page 1279: ...x Tools menu Macro Macros Command line vbarun Prompts you to select a project or drawing in which to create the new macro Select a project or drawing from the list and choose OK The macro is created in the selected project or drawing and the Visual Basic Editor is opened VBA Options Dialog Box Tools menu Macro Macros Command line vbarun Sets VBA specific options for the current work session Select...

Page 1280: ...edding Automatically creates an embedded VBA project for all drawings when you open the drawing Enable Macro Virus Protection Enables the virus protection mechanism for VBA macros The virus protection mechanism displays a built in warning message whenever you open a drawing that might contain macro viruses VBARUN Command Line If you enter vbarun at the Command prompt VBARUN displays prompts on the...

Page 1281: ...leted VBASTMT Executes a VBA statement on the AutoCAD command line Command line vbastmt Expression Enter the VBA statement to execute A Visual Basic statement is a complete instruction that can contain keywords operators variables constants and expressions A statement generally occupies a single line although you can use a colon to include more than one statement on a line VBA statements are execu...

Page 1282: ...on page 1258 Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab View Dialog Box on page 1260 Named Views Tab View Dialog Box Creates sets renames modifies and deletes named views Current View Displays the name of the current view When the View dialog box is first displayed it lists the current view as CURRENT View Names Lists the named views in the current drawing and the information that is stored with each na...

Page 1283: ...o restore a named view by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking its name and clicking Set Current on the shortcut menu New Displays the New View Dialog Box Update Layers Updates the layer information saved with the selected named view to match the layer visibility in the current model space or layout viewport Edit Boundaries Displays the selected named view centered and zoomed ...

Page 1284: ...ic views Current View Displays the name of the current view The default value is CURRENT View Names Lists the orthographic and isometric views A pointer indicates the current orthographic or isometric view The views are relative to the UCS listed in the Relative To list Set Current Restores the selected orthographic view You can also restore a selected view by double clicking its name in the list ...

Page 1285: ...hographic UCSs A warning message is displayed when you change the value of the UCSBASE system variable Restore Orthographic UCS with View Restores the associated UCS when you make an orthographic view current This option sets the UCSORTHO system variable New View Dialog Box View menu Named Views Command line view Creates a view View Name Specifies the view name View names can have up to 255 charac...

Page 1286: ...ng area by specifying two opposite corners Define View Window Button Temporarily closes the dialog boxes so that you can use the pointing device to define the opposite corners of the new view window Settings Provides options for saving settings with the named view Save UCS with View Saves a UCS with the new named view UCSVIEW system variable Store Current Layer Settings with View Saves the current...

Page 1287: ...ther each clipping plane is turned on or off Direction Displays view direction as a normal vector coordinate Name Displays the name of the current named view The default value is CURRENT Perspective Displays lens length and whether perspective is turned on or off Relative To Sets the base coordinate system that defines the orientation of the named view Target Displays view target location as a coo...

Page 1288: ...Specifies a category such as Elevations or Sections for the named view Named views are displayed by category on the View List tab in the Sheet Set Manager Enter view name to Categorize or Enter a view name or enter to list all views in the drawing Enter category name or for none or current Enter a view category enter to specify no category or enter to list all view categories in the drawing Layer ...

Page 1289: ...ter a name The center point and magnification of the saved view are also restored If you restore a model space view while working in paper space you are prompted to select a viewport in which to restore that view Restoring model space view Select Viewport for view Select a viewport Select the viewport by clicking its border The viewport you select must be on and active The program switches to mode...

Page 1290: ...Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view However plotting the view plots only the objects inside the window not the entire viewport display VIEWPLOTDETAILS Displays information about completed plot and publish jobs File menu View Plot and Publish Details Comman...

Page 1291: ...ails area and click View Errors Only or View All to change this setting All Displays information about all completed plot and publish jobs and sheets within those jobs Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were plotted or published Copy to Clipboard Copies all highlighted text in the Plot and Publish Details dialog box to the Clipboard This text can then be pasted into a text file or othe...

Page 1292: ...ides options for cancelling the sheet that is currently being plotted cancelling the entire plot or publish job viewing the Plot and Publish Details Dialog Box and viewing the most recently created Design Web Format DWF file Right click any of the plot and publish icons in the tray on the right side of the status bar These icons are described in the following table This animated icon indicates tha...

Page 1293: ...rance of circles arcs ellipses and splines using short vectors The greater the number of vectors the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc For example if you create a very small circle and then zoom in it might appear to be a polygon Using VIEWRES to increase the zoom percentage and regenerate the drawing updates and smooths the circle s appearance Decreasing the zoom percentage has the opp...

Page 1294: ...iewport border Shortcut menu Select the viewport to clip right click in the drawing area and choose Viewport Clip Command line vpclip Select viewport to clip Select clipping Clipping Object or Polygonal Delete Polygonal Clipping Object Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries include closed poly lines circles ellipses closed splines and region...

Page 1295: ...cted viewport Select a viewport The command line window displays the names of any layers that are frozen in the selected viewport Freeze Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports Objects on frozen layers are not displayed regenerated or plotted Enter layer name s to freeze Enter one or more layer names Enter an option All Select Current Current Enter an option or press ENTER All Ap...

Page 1296: ... name s to reset Enter one or more layer names Enter an option All Select Current Current Enter an option or press ENTER All Applies the changes in all viewports Select Applies the changes in selected viewports Select objects Select one or more viewports and press ENTER Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only Newfrz New Freeze Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports En...

Page 1297: ...pace for editing VPMIN Restores the current layout viewport Status bar Shortcut menu Right click in a maximized viewport and click Restore Viewport Command line vpmin The viewport is restored The center point and magnification are returned to the settings that were in effect before the viewport was maximized VPOINT Sets the viewing direction for a three dimensional visualization of the drawing Vie...

Page 1298: ...iewing direction as seen by viewer X Y Z 0 0 0 X Y Rotate Specifies a new viewing direction using two angles Enter angle in XY plane from X axis current Specify an angle The first angle is specified with respect to the X axis in the XY plane Enter angle from XY plane current Specify an angle The second angle is specified up or down from the XY plane viewing direction angle from XY plane angle from...

Page 1299: ...ing direction move your pointing device to a location on the globe and click VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space Layouts toolbar View menu Viewports Command line vports The Viewports Dialog Box is displayed If you enter vports at the Command prompt VPORTS displays VPORTS Command Line Viewports Dialog Box View menu Viewports Command line vports Creates new viewport confi...

Page 1300: ...o not enter a name the viewport configuration you create is applied but not saved If a viewport configuration is not saved it cannot be used in a layout Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations including CURRENT which is the current configuration Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewp...

Page 1301: ...t view in all of the viewports When you select 3D a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list You can choose a named view or if you have selected 3D setup you can select from the list of standard views Use the Preview area to see the choices Named Viewports Ta...

Page 1302: ...yout viewports Standard Viewports Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring 1278 Chapter 23 ...

Page 1303: ...not save and name a layout viewport configuration VPORTS Command Line The prompts available on the command line depend on whether you are configuring VPORTS Command Line Model Space Viewports on the Model tab or VPORTS Command Line Layout Viewports on a layout tab VPORTS Command Line Model Space Viewports If you enter vports at the Command prompt from the Model tab VPORTS displays prompts on the c...

Page 1304: ...bines two adjacent viewports into one larger viewport The resulting viewport inherits the view of the dominant viewport Select dominant viewport current Press ENTER or select a viewport Select viewport to join Select a viewport dominant viewport viewport to join viewport after Join Single Returns the drawing to a single viewport view using the view from the current viewport current viewport viewpo...

Page 1305: ...ER The Horizontal and Vertical options split the area into thirds The Above Below Left and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size VPORTS Command Line Layout Viewports If you enter vports at the Command prompt from a layout tab VPORTS displays prompts on the command line Specify corner of viewport or On Off Fit Shad...

Page 1306: ...ayer locking Object Specifies a closed polyline ellipse spline region or circle to convert into a viewport The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices It can be self intersecting and it can contain arcs as well as line segments Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport defined by specifying points For a description of this option see the New Boundary option u...

Page 1307: ...nter an option or press ENTER Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds The other options create one large viewport in half the available area and two smaller ones in the other half Above Below Left and Right specify where the larger viewport is placed 3 Right 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size 4 VSLIDE Displays an image slide file in the current viewport VPO...

Page 1308: ...es of the shaded image To avoid this situation use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when creating the slides VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition Command line vtoptions The View Transitions Dialog Box on page 1284 is displayed View Transitions Dialog Box Command line vtoptions Sets the options for smooth view transitions Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom Ma...

Page 1309: ...et the minimum speed for a smooth view transition in frames per second When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed an instant transition is used to preserve performance View Transitions Dialog Box 1285 ...

Page 1310: ...1286 ...

Page 1311: ...OCK Command Line If FILEDIA is set to 0 the standard file selection dialog box is suppressed Write Block Dialog Box Command line wblock Saves objects or converts a block to a file The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected a single block is selected or objects other than blocks are selected Source Specifies blocks and objects saves them ...

Page 1312: ...path where the block or objects will be saved Insert Units Specifies the unit value to be used for automatic scaling when the new file is dragged from DesignCenter or inserted as a block in a drawing that uses different units Select Unitless if you do not want to automatically scale the drawing when you insert it See INSUNITS Objects Specifies a base point for the block The default value is 0 0 0 ...

Page 1313: ...Destination Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted WBLOCK Command Line If FILEDIA is set to 1 entering wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file If FILEDIA is set to 0 entering wblock at the Command prompt displays a prompt on the command ...

Page 1314: ...are prompted for an insertion base point for the block file and then prompts you to select the objects to write to the block file Specify insertion base point Specify a point 1 Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects 1 objects selected for a block After the file is created the selected objects are deleted from the drawing You can use OOPS to ...

Page 1315: ... in Z values is used for the height Specify height 2 height Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current user coordinate system UCS Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative axis Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length Specify length Entering a positive value draws the length along the positive X axis of the current UCS Entering a ...

Page 1316: ...d Z axes of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws them along the negative axes Center Creates the wedge by a specified center point Specify center of wedge 0 0 0 Specify a point 1 or press ENTER Specify opposite corner or Cube Length Specify a point 2 or enter an option 1 Corner Specifies the corner of the wedge Specify height Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive...

Page 1317: ...Length Creates a wedge with specified length width and height values The length corresponds to the X axis the width to the Y axis and the height to the Z axis Specify length Specify width Specify height width length height Entering a positive value draws the length width and height along the positive X Y and Z axes of the current UCS Entering a negative value draws them along the negative axes WHO...

Page 1318: ...k file A DWL file is automatically created when a file is opened and then deleted when the file is closed WIPEOUT Covers existing objects with a blank area Draw menu Wipeout Command line wipeout Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color This area is bounded by the wipeout frame You can turn on the wipeout frame for editing and turn it off for plotting...

Page 1319: ...splayed You can also open this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS After opening the selected WMF file the following prompt is displayed Specify Insertion Point or Scale X Y Z Rotate PScale PX PY PZ PRotate Specify a point or enter an option Insertion Point Places a copy of the metafile with its base point at the specified insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ...

Page 1320: ... Y scale factors for the WMF file Specify Y scale factor or use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter Z scale factor use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle 0 The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file Scale Sets the scale factor for the X Y and Z axes The scale for the Z axis is the absolut...

Page 1321: ... enter an option or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets the X and Y scale factors Enter Y scale factor use X scale factor Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Corner Defines the X and Y scales at the same time using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X and Y scale factors The insertion point is the first corne...

Page 1322: ...d into position Specify preview X scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value specify a point enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate PY Sets the temporary scale factor for the Y axis to contr...

Page 1323: ...ecify opposite corner or Corner XYZ 1 Enter a value specify a point enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN Command line wmfopts The WMF In Options Dialog Box is displayed WMF In Options Dialog Box Command line wmfopts Controls whether metafiles maint...

Page 1324: ...aster objects are attached to the drawing and if the image application ism arx is loaded the maximum resolution of the resulting WMF file is 2K by 2K The image application is loaded the first time you run IMAGE IMAGEADJUST IMAGEATTACH IMAGECLIP IMAGEFRAME or IMAGEQUALITY WORKSPACE Creates modifies and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current Command line workspace Enter Workspace option setC...

Page 1325: ... current workspace Enter name of workspace to make current current Enter a name or to list available workspaces Settings Opens the Workspace Settings Dialog Box on page 1301 which controls the display menu order and Save settings of a workspace WSSETTINGS Sets options for workspaces Command line wssettings The Workspace Settings Dialog Box is displayed Workspace Settings Dialog Box Command line ws...

Page 1326: ...a separator line is added between each workspace name Move Down Moves workspace names down in the display order Move Up Moves workspace names up in the display order My Workspace Displays a list of workspaces from which you can choose a workspace to assign to the My Workspace toolbar button WSSAVE Saves a workspace Command line wssave If you enter wssave at the Command prompt WSSAVE displays promp...

Page 1327: ...list of existing workspaces These workspaces can be overwritten if the CUI file in which they are included is writable Read only files such as CUI files that are shared across a network called enterprise CUI files are displayed with a Read Only file name extension Save Workspace Dialog Box 1303 ...

Page 1328: ...1304 ...

Page 1329: ...played after a file is selected External Reference Dialog Box Insert menu External Reference Command line xattach Attaches a drawing as an external reference xref If you attach a drawing that itself contains an attached xref the attached xref appears in the current drawing Like blocks attached xrefs can be nested If another person is currently editing the xref the drawing attached is based on the ...

Page 1330: ...in the Options dialog box Start in folder specified in the Microsoft Windows application shortcut Saved Path Displays the saved path if any that is used to locate the xref This path can be an absolute fully specified path a relative partially specified path or no path Reference Type Specifies whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay See Attach External References and Nest and Overlay Extern...

Page 1331: ...ctor options unavailable The descriptions of the options displayed on the command line match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point in INSERT Specify On Screen Displays prompts on the command line and makes the Angle option unavailable You are prompted for a rotation angle as described in INSERT Uniform Scale Ensures that the Y and Z scale factors are equal to the X sc...

Page 1332: ...the current drawing The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in the BASE system variable in the referenced file Z Scale Factor Specifies the Z scale factor for the xref instance Scale Specifies the scale factors for the selected xref Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the xref instance Block Unit Displays information about the block units XBIND ...

Page 1333: ...es and text styles to your drawing Add Moves the named object definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list Definitions to Bind Lists the xref dependent named object definitions to bind to the host drawing Remove Moves the xref dependent named object definition selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref dependent definition table Xrefs Lists the xrefs curr...

Page 1334: ...s replaced with three new characters a number usually 0 between two dollar signs If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS XBIND also binds the referenced linetype If you apply XBIND to a block any block dimension style layer linetype or text style that s referenced by objects in the block is also bound If the block contains an xref XBIND binds that xref and all its depend...

Page 1335: ...y distance from boundary The previous prompt is displayed Remove Removes both the front and back clipping planes Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary use the Off option Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth The ERASE command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries Generate Polyline Automatically draws a p...

Page 1336: ...traight line segments and cannot intersect itself The boundary created using this method is parallel to the user coordinate system UCS plane on which the polyline lies Polygonal Defines a polygonal boundary by using the points you specify for the vertices of a polygon The clipping boundary is applied in the current UCS regardless of the current view Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary by us...

Page 1337: ...ates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point Specify through point Specify the point 1 through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command The xline is created parallel to the X axis 1 Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point Specify through point Specify the point 1 through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command...

Page 1338: ...ce line Select a line object Select a line polyline ray or xline Enter angle of xline 0 Specify through point Specify the point through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command An xline is created through the specified point using the specified angle Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second li...

Page 1339: ...ant the xline to pass and press ENTER to exit the command XOPEN Opens a selected external reference xref in a new window Command line xopen Select Xref Select an object in the external reference After an object is selected the xref to which it belongs opens in a separate window If the xref contains nested xrefs the deepest level xref of the selected object is opened The new window is displayed aft...

Page 1340: ...LAYER Enter a color name or number from 1 through 255 enter t enter co enter bylayer or byblock or press ENTER Entering bylayer causes the component objects to inherit the color of the exploded object s layer Entering byblock causes the component objects to inherit the color of the exploded object Enter t for a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values...

Page 1341: ... the component objects to inherit the linetype of the exploded object Inherit from Parent Block Sets the color linetype lineweight and layer of the component objects to that of the exploded object if the component objects color linetype and lineweight are BYBLOCK and the objects are drawn on layer 0 Explode Breaks a compound object into its component objects exactly as the EXPLODE command does Glo...

Page 1342: ...u enter xref at the Command prompt XREF displays XREF Command Line Xref Manager Insert menu Xref Manager Shortcut menu Select an xref right click in the drawing area and choose Xref Manager Command line xref Attaches overlays lists binds detaches reloads unloads renames and modifies paths to external references xrefs in the current or host drawing 1318 Chapter 25 ...

Page 1343: ...ate Displays the last date the associated drawing was modified This date is not displayed if the xref is unloaded not found or unresolved Reference Name Lists the names of the xrefs as stored in the definition table for the drawing Save Path Saves the path as it appears in Xref Found At to the currently selected xref Saved Path Shows the saved path of the associated xref this is not necessarily wh...

Page 1344: ... dialog box if an external reference is selected or displays the Select Reference File dialog box if no external reference is selected See XATTACH Detach Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing erasing all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the definition table Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current drawing can be detached nest...

Page 1345: ...initions If you bind an xref into the current drawing the xref and all its dependent named objects become a part of the current drawing Use XBIND to add individual xref dependent named objects such as blocks text styles dimension styles layers and linetypes to the local definition table The two methods of binding xrefs to the current drawing are Bind and Insert Bind alters the definition table nam...

Page 1346: ...of the locally defined named object For example if you have an xref named FLOOR1 containing a layer named WALL after binding with the Insert option the xref dependent layer FLOOR1 WALL becomes the locally defined layer WALL XREF Command Line If you enter xref at the Command prompt XREF displays prompts on the command line Enter an option List Xrefs Bind Detach Path Unload Reload Overlay Attach Att...

Page 1347: ...ef name s to edit path The xref and its old path are listed and you are prompted for the new path xref name name Old path path Enter new path Enter new path and drawing name If you enter an invalid path or the drawing cannot be found at the location you enter you are prompted for the new path name Unload Unloads the selected xrefs Enter xref name s to unload A marker is left in place of the xref s...

Page 1348: ...ke blocks attached xrefs can be nested If another person is currently editing the xref file the most recently saved version is attached If the xref you specify is not already attached or overlaid a new xref is created using the name of the referenced file You are prompted for an insertion point scale and rotation angle as described for the INSERT command When reading objects from the xref into the...

Page 1349: ... Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport In a plan view All zooms to the grid limits or current extents whichever is greater In a 3D view ZOOM All is equivalent to ZOOM Extents The display shows all objects even if the drawing extends outside the grid limits before ZOOM All after ZOOM All In the illustration LIMITS is greater than the extents of the drawing Because it always re...

Page 1350: ... pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the image inside the view box view box new view The panning view box is displayed first Drag it to the location you want and click The zooming view box is then displayed Resize it and press ENTER to zoom or click to return to the panning view box Press ENTER to fill the current viewport with the area currently enclosed by the view box Extents Zooms to displ...

Page 1351: ...a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view For example entering 5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen ZOOM 5x Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units For example entering 5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units You can create a layout with each viewport displaying obj...

Page 1352: ...tent Press ESC or ENTER to exit or right click to display the shortcut menu The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus and minus signs See Zoom Shortcut Menu on page 1329 for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time The current drawing area is used to determine the zooming factor ZOOM uses half of the window height to move to a zoom factor of 100 Holding d...

Page 1353: ...e drawing and then press the pick button again and continue to zoom the display from that location To exit zooming at the new position press ENTER or ESC Zoom Shortcut Menu When the ZOOM command is active you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or 3DORBIT using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu To access the Zoom shortcut menu right click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active 3D Orbit Switches t...

Page 1354: ...Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window 1330 Chapter 26 ...

Page 1355: ...d for searching 56 finding files 753 at sign 531 to reference the last point 531 caret 695 707 stacked text indicator 695 707 vertical bar 1310 1322 in dependent symbols 1310 1322 tilde 657 734 759 833 957 1158 to display a standard file selection dialog box 657 734 759 833 957 1158 2D UCS icon 1229 1231 broken pencil icon replacement 1229 2D viewport configuration setup 1277 1279 2P circle specif...

Page 1356: ...File Import Options dialog box 40 3D Studio files 40 importing 40 3D UCS icon 1229 1232 3D viewing direction setting 313 3D viewport configuration setup 1277 1279 3DARRAY command 18 3DCLIP command 20 about 20 3DCONFIG command 23 27 601 about 23 acceleration 27 adaptive degradation 23 dynamic tessellation 24 geometry 26 render options 25 using Lights option to display lights in drawing 601 3DCORBIT...

Page 1357: ...169 selection sets for 120 Actions tab Block Editor Authoring Palettes 145 adaptive adjustment linetype setting 1163 adaptive degradation 23 24 802 bounding box 24 display options 23 802 flat shaded 23 FPS speed 24 wireframe 24 adaptive sampling 1020 render options 1020 ADCCLOSE command 48 937 ADCENTER command 48 54 DesignCenter 48 Search dialog box 54 ADCNAVIGATE command 57 ADCSTATE system variab...

Page 1358: ...04 Affine transformation type 1182 AFLAGS system variable 92 95 alerts 146 781 1147 beep on error 781 icons for dynamic block definitions 146 standards violations 1147 aliases 243 displaying 243 ALIGN command 57 aligned dimensions 317 344 linear 317 344 aligning 47 94 360 380 562 628 630 666 696 705 708 719 1005 1007 1042 1095 1096 1111 1112 1178 1188 attribute tags 94 axis of rotation 1005 1111 c...

Page 1359: ...8 1210 1243 1246 1248 1314 adding to parameter value sets 920 for arc segments 858 for arcs 65 66 68 base angle direction controls 1246 for camera positioning 408 409 for construction lines 1314 converting measurement units 952 current precision for 1245 displaying in QuickCalc calculator 950 for elliptical arcs 439 for extrusion 461 changing with LENGTHEN 598 for dimension text 319 323 330 332 33...

Page 1360: ...on object snap 810 applications 61 64 adding to the history list 62 adding to the Startup Suite 64 loading unloading 61 APPLOAD command 61 63 about 61 applications file types supported by 62 Load Unload Applications dialog box 61 Startup Suite dialog box 63 ARC command 64 arc segments adding to 2D polylines 858 arc fit polylines 844 arcball 3D Orbit view 33 arccosines in QuickCalc calculator 952 a...

Page 1361: ...box 80 about 80 displaying 80 arrays multiple copies 80 83 86 87 creating 80 offsetting copies 82 polar 83 87 rectangular 81 86 rotated 87 arrowheads 354 361 597 943 dimension properties of 354 including with leader lines 354 597 943 placement of 361 ARX command 89 ARX files loading 62 ASCII text files See text files ASE commands See DBCONNECT command ASE links converting to format of AutoCAD 2000...

Page 1362: ... Edit Attributes dialog box 98 editing attribute values 97 99 independent of a block 97 99 for a specific block 97 attenuation of light 604 609 610 point light 604 specifying 610 spotlight 609 ATTEXT command 104 106 about 104 Attribute Extraction dialog box 105 command line prompts 106 ATTMODE system variable 96 ATTREDEF command 107 ATTREQ system variable Attribute Definition dialog box 91 92 Attr...

Page 1363: ...TS system variable AUPREC system variable 393 author of drawings displaying specifying 420 421 Auto Axis 997 for material bitmap mapping 997 Auto object selection method 1052 Auto Viewport Options menu in Aerial View window 404 Auto hide setting Tool Palettes window 1207 Auto list 700 AutoCAD 47 1011 1014 1025 file formats used by 1025 rendering type 1011 1014 serial number and license information...

Page 1364: ...ith 1274 azimuth 607 613 displayed in the Sun Angle Calculator 613 for distant light 607 axis of cylindrical coordinate system 1057 B B spline curves 847 850 fitting to control points 847 850 back faces of 3D objects 26 802 3D graphics view 26 802 back faces of 3D solids 1015 1016 1019 rendering 1015 1016 1019 Back option in undoing 1241 back moving objects to 517 background colors 688 background ...

Page 1365: ... blocks 152 153 1288 1290 setting 127 specifying for dynamic block actions 116 119 124 125 base points for object rotation 1004 base 10 exponents in QuickCalc calculator 952 baseline dimensions 325 351 937 creating 325 a series of 937 dimension line spacing 351 baselines of text 709 BASSOCIATE command 128 batch audit reports 1469 1472 1473 adding notes to 1472 creating 1469 exporting 1473 batch pl...

Page 1366: ...ng 728 944 blank spaces before fractions 707 BLIPMODE command 150 BLIPMODE system variable BLK files 428 927 attribute extraction templates 428 DWF files and 927 Block Attribute Manager 129 133 Block Authoring palettes 766 1211 adding actions with 1211 support files path to 766 block authoring palettes 251 copying between block authoring palette groups 251 customizing 251 exporting importing 251 B...

Page 1367: ...1245 1287 1310 1315 Block Attribute Manager 129 133 Block Authoring Palettes window 135 136 Block Editor See Block Editor changing position of 214 colors 102 110 133 215 219 225 226 228 230 350 351 357 358 427 481 521 571 575 584 593 594 603 605 607 610 647 685 695 703 766 768 787 789 796 798 801 855 901 904 917 980 992 994 998 1000 1001 1022 1115 1117 1150 1161 1163 1164 1180 1232 1316 text 695 c...

Page 1368: ...itions 929 selecting objects for inclusion 154 specifying the insertion point 152 155 synchronizing instances 130 tools on tool palettes 1209 in translated layers 594 updating 107 307 345 432 550 799 805 876 878 1070 attributes 107 definitions of 550 BLOOKUPTABLE command 156 158 about 156 Add Parameter Properties dialog box 158 Property Lookup Table dialog box 157 blue components of colors 226 BMA...

Page 1369: ...bringing objects to front 517 draw order of hatches or fills 517 broken pencil icon 1229 Browse for Folder dialog box displaying 767 Browse the Web dialog box 748 displaying 748 browser Web launching 181 BROWSER command 181 browsing 748 762 767 for folders or files 762 767 the Internet 748 BSAVE command 182 BSAVEAS command 182 about 182 Save Block As dialog box 182 BTMARKDISPLAY system variable bu...

Page 1370: ...erting points between UCS and WCS 198 converting units of measurement 194 feet and inches formatting 190 filtering components of points or vectors 199 intersection point obtaining 201 last specified point obtaining 197 normal vectors calculating 205 numeric expression operators 189 numeric functions supported by 194 point by cursor obtaining 197 point calculations 195 points used with 191 rotating...

Page 1371: ...ll margins 1181 CELTSCALE system variable 618 CELTYPE system variable 620 1151 CELWEIGHT system variable 1151 center marks 326 355 creating 326 dimension properties of 355 Center object snap 395 810 center points 65 83 88 164 221 231 234 255 440 859 910 1292 1325 arc segments 859 arcs 65 base of cones 231 base of elliptical cones 234 boxes 164 center definition of polygons 910 circles 221 ellipses...

Page 1372: ...cs 66 68 CHPROP command 219 CHX standards check files 1473 CIRCLE command 221 CIRCLERAD system variable circles 213 221 320 326 329 342 382 384 441 460 469 654 768 970 984 1006 1095 1111 1269 1282 aligning 47 94 360 380 562 628 630 666 696 705 708 719 1005 1007 1042 1095 1096 1111 1112 1178 1188 axis of rotation with 1006 1111 cutting plane with 1095 center marks centerlines 326 changing the radiu...

Page 1373: ...er 257 DesignCenter 48 937 drawings 224 log file 624 Properties palette 920 splines 1135 1139 1141 CMDACTIVE system variable CMDDIA system variable CMDECHO system variable CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX system variable CMDNAMES system variable CMLJUST system variable CMLSCALE system variable CMLSTYLE system variable code pages character sets 701 collapsing QuickCalc calculator display 951 color book colors 21...

Page 1374: ...fault settings 798 depth of 904 980 for plotting 904 for rendered images 980 for dimension lines 350 for dimension text 357 display options for the main window 768 drafting tooltips 789 for edges 1117 for exploded objects 1316 for extension lines 351 for fog 481 for materials 992 994 adjusting 992 994 for granite material 998 HLS color system See hue lightness saturation HLS color system for inter...

Page 1375: ... on 4 history text copying to the Clipboard 240 responding to prompts on 3 using wild card characters on 4 Command Line Window Font dialog box 769 798 about 798 displaying 769 Command Line window See command window Command shortcut menu 804 enabling disabling 804 command window 230 797 display options 797 displaying when hidden 230 hiding 230 COMMANDLINE command 230 COMMANDLINEHIDE command 230 com...

Page 1376: ...047 about 1047 confirming passwords 1047 constant attributes 92 96 131 constraining cursor movement 808 construction lines xlines 469 1312 creating 1312 filleting 469 containers displayed in DesignCenter content area 49 content for drawings DesignCenter 49 52 54 content area 49 searching for 54 view options for 52 See also ADCENTER command content area DesignCenter 49 Content tab Search dialog box...

Page 1377: ...selected objects 1055 object properties 647 objects 238 to the Clipboard 239 252 as mirror images 663 664 with a specified base point 239 plot and publish job information 1267 rendered images 977 size of text objects 1038 tool palettes between tool palette groups 252 tools to Clipboard 1207 user interface customizations 241 COPYLINK command 240 corner joint between multilines 675 corner points 12 ...

Page 1378: ... 240 241 247 about 240 Customize User Interface dialog box 241 Find and Replace dialog box 247 CUI files 241 250 1302 enterprise CUI files 1302 exporting 250 importing 250 loading 250 transferring 241 unloading 250 CUIEXPORT command 250 CUIIMPORT command 250 CUILOAD command 250 CUIUNLOAD command 250 cur function CAL command 197 current dictionary for spelling checker 1132 current layers 568 573 cu...

Page 1379: ...ting 252 676 elements from multilines 676 multilines 676 objects to the Clipboard 252 cutting planes 1095 1096 1099 aligning 1095 1096 defining 1096 1099 CVPORT system variable cvunit function CAL command 194 Cyclic Redundancy Checking CRC validation option 774 cycling 137 grips in dynamic block definitions 137 CYLINDER command 252 cylinders solid 252 cylindrical coordinates in image mapping 1057 ...

Page 1380: ...ulator 613 time servers 1046 1468 valid periods for digital IDs 1093 datum for baseline dimensions 938 setting 938 datum for geometric tolerances 1201 1202 identifier symbols 1202 datum for ordinate dimensions See also ordinate dimensions setting 938 DBCCLOSE command 257 DBCONNECT command 257 258 264 275 284 287 291 293 294 296 297 300 302 307 about 257 Column Values dialog box 284 Configure a Dat...

Page 1381: ...MODES command See DSETTINGS command DDSELECT command See OPTIONS command DDUCS command See UCSMAN command DDUCSP command See UCSMAN command DDUNITS command See UNITS command DDVIEW command See VIEW command DDVPOINT command 313 decimal degrees 191 733 1244 angle measure conventions 1244 entering angles in 191 733 decimal places of accuracy for DXF file output 1029 decimal separator for numbers in f...

Page 1382: ...1259 1265 nonstandard objects 218 objects 23 38 47 77 80 83 84 106 107 159 179 218 219 239 252 309 441 457 460 464 467 486 488 491 523 561 562 594 598 623 643 663 664 689 715 737 756 802 835 836 908 933 935 945 947 965 967 971 1004 1005 1033 1048 1051 1064 1147 1153 1196 1217 1223 1269 1270 1282 1289 1290 1300 1321 1331 1333 1469 from groups 488 491 objects after block conversion 153 profiles 794 ...

Page 1383: ...displaying names of 876 search path for 763 diagnostic tools AUDIT command 108 diagonal fractions 705 706 multiline text and 705 706 dialog boxes 3 745 782 See also names of specific dialog boxes standard file selection options 745 suppressing 3 warning message option 782 diameter 9 12 15 17 222 232 254 441 697 711 1134 1193 1213 for circles 222 for cones 9 10 232 for cylinders 254 for dishes 11 f...

Page 1384: ...mand 323 DIMASO system variable DIMASSOC system variable 785 DIMASZ system variable 355 DIMATFIT system variable 362 DIMAUNIT system variable 368 DIMAZIN system variable 368 DIMBASELINE command 325 DIMBLK system variable DIMBLK1 system variable 354 DIMBLK2 system variable 354 DIMCEN system variable 327 355 DIMCENTER command 326 DIMCLRD system variable 350 DIMCLRE system variable 351 DIMCLRT system...

Page 1385: ...ate units tolerance settings 375 angles of 324 for angular dimensions 322 arc length dimensions 323 background setting color 358 colors setting 357 for diameter dimensions 329 editing with DIMEDIT 330 formatting 357 frames around 358 generated measurements 331 336 jogged radius dimensions 333 for linear dimensions 336 movement options 364 moving 380 for ordinate dimensions 340 overall scale value ...

Page 1386: ... variable 352 DIMSE2 system variable 352 DIMSHO system variable 380 DIMSOXD system variable 362 364 DIMSTYLE command 345 346 348 349 376 377 about 345 command line prompts 377 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box 376 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 348 Dimension Style Manager 346 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 349 New Dimension Style dialog box 349 Override Dimension Style dialog box 349 D...

Page 1387: ...3 1249 1258 1263 1264 1267 1283 1294 1306 1318 1319 1322 1323 1473 attributes 96 426 batch audit reports 1473 BMP images 980 command window when hidden 230 date time statistics of a drawing 1197 dimension styles 347 377 drawing properties 416 417 DWF geometry 641 DWG geometry 641 edges 434 editable user interface items 247 fields 784 groups 487 hidden database table columns 269 272 hidden profile ...

Page 1388: ... dollar signs 965 1310 1322 prefixes on names 965 symbol in dependent symbols 1310 1322 domes 12 DONUT command 384 DONUTID system variable DONUTOD system variable donuts 384 460 984 1212 drawing 384 1212 extruding 460 revolving 984 DOS names of files 418 dots per inch dpi 817 867 881 double lines 499 for boundary hatch 499 double click editing 309 double clicking objects 309 double hatching 1210 d...

Page 1389: ... 429 drawing area in application window 483 1276 1278 1279 1281 layout viewports in 1278 1281 switching to the text window from 483 tiled viewports in 1276 1279 drawing database reindexing 968 969 drawing exchange binary DXB files importing 423 drawing extents 817 867 879 1152 1326 1328 displaying 1152 logical 1328 plotting to 817 867 879 zooming to 1326 1328 drawing index 1027 drawing interchange...

Page 1390: ...224 385 387 403 416 417 419 420 422 456 546 553 593 639 689 727 744 746 747 749 753 756 761 772 773 775 783 785 805 823 828 833 855 857 864 875 889 908 920 932 933 944 945 948 957 968 969 1025 1026 1028 1029 1045 1047 1068 1073 1077 1091 1144 1145 1215 1294 1305 1467 1469 attaching as xrefs 1305 checking 217 732 734 1120 1130 1469 for standards violations 217 1469 closing 224 closing all 224 creat...

Page 1391: ...9 761 772 774 776 805 824 869 871 875 876 908 925 926 933 945 962 978 1025 1030 1070 1085 1149 1166 1196 1227 1252 1262 1265 1266 1287 1300 1302 to DXF format 775 as earlier file formats 1026 as HTML pages 933 options with 761 performance issues 1025 with QSAVE 945 with SAVE 1025 with SAVEAS 1025 versions of 1029 scale default for inserting in drawings 785 security 1045 in sheet sets 1077 spatial ...

Page 1392: ...ing files 385 386 589 592 641 920 924 932 1073 1076 adding sheets from 924 backup files 386 creating new sheets 1075 displaying geometry of originating drawing file 641 importing page setups from 920 locations of 1074 names of 1076 opening from Sheet Set Manager 1073 recovering after system failures 385 regenerating from DSD files 932 DWG icon 818 DWG option of SAVEAS 1027 DWG Options tab Saveas O...

Page 1393: ...ters 117 125 dynamic blocks 982 resetting 982 dynamic display of user interface customizations 244 Dynamic Input tab Drafting Settings dialog box 398 Dynamic option 600 1326 of LENGTHEN 600 of ZOOM 1326 dynamic tessellation 24 dynamic updating of the Aerial View window 404 DYNDIGRIP system variable DYNDIVIS system variable 402 DYNMODE system variable DYNPICOORDS system variable DYNPIFORMAT system ...

Page 1394: ...91 594 648 758 775 807 829 831 833 834 855 918 927 935 965 967 972 990 1121 1124 1146 1150 1259 1260 1262 1264 1271 1272 1317 1472 properties 571 594 states 586 588 linked object key fields 296 multilines 667 named views 1259 objects 23 38 47 77 80 83 84 106 107 159 179 218 219 239 252 309 441 457 460 464 467 486 488 491 523 561 562 594 598 623 643 663 664 689 715 737 756 802 835 836 908 933 935 9...

Page 1395: ...ostScript files See PostScript EPS files encryption 1046 1047 providers 1046 1047 security options 1046 end caps for multilines 688 1164 styles 1164 End option in undoing 1241 end tangent for spline curves 1137 1141 Endpoint object snap 395 810 954 endpoints 213 340 615 858 911 954 1164 arc segments 858 edges 911 functions in QuickCalc calculator 954 lines 213 321 340 469 561 615 705 839 900 970 1...

Page 1396: ...0 executing 1 259 1257 commands 1 queries 259 VBA statements 1257 Existing File or Web Page tab Insert Hyperlink dialog box 524 exiting 315 956 Dimensioning mode 315 the program 956 expanding QuickCalc calculator display 951 EXPERT system variable expiration of digital IDs 1046 EXPLMODE system variable EXPLODE command See also XPLODE command exploding 152 486 491 549 1210 1315 blocks 152 549 1210 ...

Page 1397: ...ines 317 322 325 328 335 338 349 352 353 362 for aligned linear dimensions 317 for angular dimensions 322 for baseline dimensions 325 for continued chain dimensions 328 extending above dimension lines 352 origins of 335 338 for linear dimensions 335 338 properties 349 353 text placement options and 362 Extension object snap 810 Extension object snap mode 397 Extents option ZOOM command 1326 extent...

Page 1398: ...7 839 840 846 851 867 933 938 962 963 965 967 1036 1105 1116 1118 1137 1138 1162 1178 1254 1259 options 775 exporting attribute information for 432 grouping objects by xref hierarchy 30 insertion point 1307 listing 1309 loading 1317 loading partially open drawings and 759 828 831 834 nested 964 966 1305 1321 opening in new windows 1314 project files and 763 reloading 1320 1323 removing from lists ...

Page 1399: ... object selection method 1050 field angles spotlights 610 FIELD command 463 467 about 463 Field dialog box 463 Field Format dialog box 467 Field dialog box 422 463 Field Format dialog box 467 Field Update Settings dialog box 784 805 about 805 displaying 784 FIELDDISPLAY system variable 784 FIELDEVAL system variable 784 fields 296 300 463 465 467 468 additional formatting options 467 conversion fac...

Page 1400: ...LOAD and 656 NEW and 727 734 OPEN and 744 759 PARTIALOPEN and 833 PNGOUT and 908 PSETUPIN and 920 PUBLISH and 932 RECOVER and 957 SAVEAS and 1025 1029 SCRIPT and 1041 TIFOUT and 1196 VBALOAD and 1249 VSLIDE and 1284 WBLOCK and 1289 XREF and 1324 files accessing 745 backup files 386 browsing for 762 deleting 748 SHELL and 1090 digital signatures 1091 1092 1467 displaying ownership of opened drawing...

Page 1401: ...g box 474 Filter dialog box 434 filter nfl default filters file 474 filtering 570 574 576 749 753 files by type name or location 749 753 filters 473 474 476 567 570 573 576 592 945 1331 applying 476 creating editing 473 for layer translation 592 group filters for layers 570 inverting layer filters 567 574 layer filter examples 575 576 layer properties and 574 lists of layer filters 573 naming laye...

Page 1402: ...49 176 adding to dynamic block definitions 144 149 176 Flip Set parameter set 149 floating screen pointing area on digitizing tablets 1185 floating toolbars 1206 floppy disks SHELL command and 1090 flow control in plotting 906 setting 906 fog 481 482 choosing a color system for 481 defining distance and percentages of 482 turning on or off 481 FOG command 480 Fog Depth Cue dialog box 480 folder se...

Page 1403: ...aces list in standard file selection dialog boxes 746 FTP sites 746 755 accessing 746 adding 746 755 logging on 755 full paths for external references 1306 FULLOPEN system variable FULLPLOTPATH system variable functions in QuickCalc calculator 954 fuzz distance 839 between endpoints 839 G gap tolerances 505 513 general properties of objects 917 General tab 417 894 Drawing Properties dialog box 417...

Page 1404: ...52 displaying 1152 plotting 818 868 879 setting 615 grid snap type 391 1103 grid spacing 484 1151 GRIDMODE system variable 390 GRIDUNIT system variable 391 1151 GRIPBLOCK system variable GRIPCOLOR system variable GRIPDYNCOLOR system variable GRIPHOT system variable GRIPHOVER system variable 791 GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable 792 grips 136 137 150 157 166 175 402 790 793 adding parameters with grips ...

Page 1405: ...7 recreating 496 redefining boundary sets 505 removing islands from 495 508 retaining as objects 505 509 viewing 496 HATCH command about 493 command line prompts 507 Hatch and Gradient dialog box 493 Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box 506 See also BHATCH command Hatch Edit dialog box 309 515 about 515 double clicking hatch objects and 309 Hatch tab 515 Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box 506 about 506 ...

Page 1406: ...oom magnification 1325 height second color setting for backgrounds 112 Help 90 519 accessing 519 Info palette 90 closing 90 opening 90 HELP command 519 Help file 764 search path for 764 Help menu 1 accessing user or developer documentation from 1 hemisphere specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator 613 hidden files 419 hidden layers 568 583 Hidden Line Settings dialog box 521 786 hidden lines in 3D o...

Page 1407: ...linear dimensions 337 resolution of rendered images 980 tiling of windows 1169 hotspot angle of spotlights 610 HPANG system variable 1103 HPASSOC system variable HPBOUND system variable HPDOUBLE system variable HPDRAWORDER system variable 513 HPGAPTOL system variable 505 HPINHERIT system variable HPNAME system variable 499 504 511 517 1103 HPOBJWARNING system variable HPORIGIN system variable HPOR...

Page 1408: ...mage bitmap file background for scenes 110 Image Adjust dialog box 537 image application WMFOUT and 1300 IMAGE command 531 532 535 about 531 command line prompts 535 Image Manager 532 Image dialog box 540 image display See display image Image File Details dialog box 534 image files attaching new images 539 attaching detaching 533 535 536 defining offset and size of 981 display quality controls for...

Page 1409: ...into layouts 920 WMF files 1295 imprinting objects on 3D solids 1118 in place reference editing 962 963 967 adding removing objects during 967 saving back changes 962 selecting references for 963 in place reference editing fading intensity 771 In Place Text Editor 692 699 711 about 692 opaque background 699 Options menu 699 special characters and symbols 711 inches 190 818 and feet formatting for ...

Page 1410: ...0 935 939 962 963 965 967 972 982 1121 1209 1210 1245 1287 1310 1315 default scale for 785 content from DesignCenter 49 data from the Clipboard 835 drawings 546 external references 1322 fields 296 300 463 465 467 468 with Field dialog box 463 linked or embedded objects 553 shapes 1065 inserting blocks 546 1210 properties 1210 inserting tables 1171 Insertion Cycling Order dialog box 137 about 137 I...

Page 1411: ... specifying 609 of spotlight 609 inverting 567 574 filters 567 574 layer selection 574 invisible 31 97 104 attributes 97 104 edges of a 3D face 31 lines See hidden lines ISAVEBAK system variable 772 ISAVEPERCENT system variable 774 islands within boundaries 160 162 detection methods 160 162 islands within hatches and fills 494 495 503 507 509 511 detection style 503 509 511 picking points 494 507 ...

Page 1412: ...ls parameters 167 169 171 173 175 177 179 labels view label blocks 1071 landings See hook lines Landscape Edit dialog box 625 Landscape Library dialog box 626 Landscape Library Edit dialog box 627 Landscape New dialog box 629 landscape objects 624 630 aligning 628 630 defining libraries 626 deleting from libraries 626 editing 624 inserting into drawings 629 listing 627 630 previewing 625 629 lands...

Page 1413: ...807 829 831 833 834 855 918 927 935 965 967 972 990 1121 1124 1146 1150 1259 1260 1262 1264 1271 1272 1317 1472 for 3D faces created with PFACE 855 attaching materials by 990 for attribute text 102 133 427 changing 214 568 571 598 600 740 741 915 1236 properties of 568 571 copying 238 241 251 252 588 647 648 663 664 977 1038 1055 1115 1116 1207 1267 objects to with MATCHPROP 648 created by SOLVIEW...

Page 1414: ...YOUT command 588 layout elements customizing 771 Layout icon 813 layout tabs 689 769 783 864 879 890 891 displaying on drawing area 769 plotting and 864 879 890 891 suppressing regeneration when switching to 689 783 Layout tabs Color Options dialog box 797 layout viewports 1033 1034 1037 1123 1278 1281 creating with SOLVIEW 1123 creating with VPORTS 1278 1281 scales for 1033 1034 1037 LAYOUTREGENC...

Page 1415: ...ne and Arrow tab 942 leader text 562 justifying 562 leaders attaching 943 creating with QLEADER 938 See also leader annotations See also leader lines leading See line spacing left aligned text 696 708 left justifying text 1190 1191 legacy drawings clearing dimension linear factors 345 LENGTHEN command 598 lengths of objects 598 600 859 863 953 1029 1130 1292 2D polyline segments 859 863 changing 2...

Page 1416: ...69 aligned 317 alternate units settings 369 associativity 344 creating 80 151 325 327 329 339 543 555 557 590 664 691 844 845 857 937 938 945 970 984 1042 1104 1120 1208 1242 1243 1275 1474 with DIMBASELINE 325 with DIMCONTINUE 327 format and precision settings 366 prefixes suffixes for text 367 rounding rules for 367 scale options 367 zero suppression 368 Linear Move Pair parameter set 147 Linear...

Page 1417: ...eight Settings dialog box displaying 786 lineweights 133 216 220 350 352 427 581 594 632 635 648 786 821 823 869 871 880 918 1151 1165 1167 1179 1317 adjusting display scale for 634 for attribute text 133 427 copying with MATCHPROP 648 of dimension lines 350 displaying 51 96 150 184 186 187 230 243 247 261 262 269 272 309 347 377 403 416 417 419 420 426 434 487 529 544 568 571 593 601 633 635 641 ...

Page 1418: ...rtcut menu 572 listing 71 137 139 150 170 172 174 176 182 185 243 244 386 430 444 465 499 507 568 743 747 794 796 813 819 824 868 877 923 925 1066 1072 1073 1080 1087 1145 1176 1309 available PC3 files or printers 819 block definitions 139 150 182 block properties 430 blocks with attributes 430 callout blocks 1087 drawing sheets 923 925 DWS standards files 1145 editable commands 243 files for reco...

Page 1419: ...g 94 569 571 575 586 966 967 991 1282 attribute color to the main color 991 attribute tag position 94 layers 569 571 575 586 967 objects not in working sets 966 viewports 1282 locking viewports 715 LOCKUI system variable log files 594 624 766 774 779 887 888 1023 closing 624 continuously repeating scripts and 1023 layer translation 594 plot and publish log files 766 779 plot stamps 887 888 search ...

Page 1420: ...55 VBA 1253 Macros dialog box 1253 magnet AutoSnap lock 788 magnification value for zooming See also zoom scale factor main customization file acad cui 764 path for 764 main dictionary for spelling checker 764 1133 maintain aspect ratio settings See aspect ratio managing drawing content See ADCENTER command managing drawing content See DesignCenter map style for material bitmaps 997 map for Sun An...

Page 1421: ...files from 639 opening DWF files with markups 759 restoring initial views 641 reviewing 638 status 638 status of Question 640 mass properties 643 646 953 calculating for 2D and 3D objects 643 converting measurements 953 for coplanar regions 643 644 for noncoplanar regions 643 parameters that control calculation units 646 for solids 645 writing to a text file 643 MASSPROP command 643 MATCHCELL comm...

Page 1422: ...able 728 measurement scale See scale MEASUREMENT system variable media sources and destinations in PC3 files 877 media types for plotting 900 memory RAM 899 1151 amount available displaying 1151 plotting and 899 MENU command 655 Menu Customization dialog box 655 menu groups menu bars 655 customizing display of 655 MENUCTL system variable MENUECHO system variable MENULOAD command 655 656 about 655 ...

Page 1423: ...el space 30 433 691 796 819 829 831 869 881 1029 1039 1040 1073 1130 1215 1275 adding scenes to 1039 1040 attaching views as xrefs 1073 changing window element color in 796 converting length values from paper space 1029 1130 creating 80 151 325 327 329 339 543 555 557 590 664 691 844 845 857 937 938 945 970 984 1042 1104 1120 1208 1242 1243 1275 1474 slide files in 691 tiled viewport configuration...

Page 1424: ...ine mesh objects 852 of 3D polylines 849 objects 23 38 47 77 80 83 84 106 107 159 179 218 219 239 252 309 441 457 460 464 467 486 488 491 523 561 562 594 598 623 643 663 664 689 715 737 756 802 835 836 908 933 935 945 947 965 967 971 1004 1005 1033 1048 1051 1064 1147 1153 1196 1217 1223 1269 1270 1282 1289 1290 1300 1321 1331 1333 1469 about a 3D axis 1005 about a base point 1004 with STRETCH 115...

Page 1425: ...254 1259 stacked text 704 finding replacing 701 703 by matching case 703 by matching whole word 703 Find and Replace dialog box 701 Replace dialog box 703 formatting 132 291 426 693 with toolbar 693 fractions in 704 706 height 92 101 214 232 233 253 255 358 374 461 625 631 694 707 1065 1108 1156 1159 1173 1174 1180 1188 1201 1291 1325 setting 707 importing 699 in arc length dimensions 323 in jogge...

Page 1426: ...lel lines See multilines multiple undo actions 690 MVIEW command 713 MVSETUP command 718 719 723 about 718 setting preferences for 723 using 4 719 972 on a layout tab 719 on the Model tab 719 My Documents folder 747 My Documents icon Places list in standard file selection dialog boxes 747 My Network Places folder 748 My Workspace 1301 MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX system variable myspool bat file 765 N Name a...

Page 1427: ...terials 651 label templates 303 layer states 587 layers 567 570 571 575 583 594 link templates 304 materials 991 multilines 684 page setups 815 parameters 167 169 171 173 175 177 179 plot style tables 1162 plot styles 1165 profiles 808 queries 305 sheet set custom properties 1083 sheets in sheet sets 1076 spotlights 608 subsets of sheet sets 1074 table styles 1177 text styles 1158 tiled viewport c...

Page 1428: ...arble Material dialog box 999 New Page Setup dialog box 813 815 about 815 displaying 813 New Point Light dialog box 603 New Query dialog box 260 304 New Scene dialog box 1040 New Sheet dialog box 1068 1075 about 1075 displaying 1068 New Sheet Selection dialog box 1070 1085 about 1085 displaying 1070 New Spotlight dialog box 608 New Standard Material dialog box 991 New Table Style dialog box 1178 N...

Page 1429: ...nablers 783 options 783 object fields 465 467 decimal separator 467 precision 465 Object Grouping dialog box 485 object linking and embedding See OLE Object method for defining a UCS 1223 object properties 214 464 915 1210 1317 changing 214 568 571 598 600 740 741 915 1236 with CHANGE command 214 with Properties palette 915 object selection 793 805 806 945 excluding objects from preview 806 option...

Page 1430: ...8 1242 1243 1275 1474 multiple copies of 80 displacing using MOVE 689 double clicking to display Properties palette or a special editor 309 extending 457 460 1217 rather than trimming 1217 trimming rather than 457 extruding 460 fields 466 decimal separator 467 precision 465 values in formula updated 465 graphical 23 523 802 836 3D display options 23 802 attaching hyperlinks to 523 pasting from the...

Page 1431: ... bitmaps 995 1062 multiline style elements 687 plotting areas 780 823 873 projection cylinders 1058 projection planes 1056 projection spheres 1059 rendered images in viewports 1032 offsetting rectangular arrays 82 OLE DB Microsoft 284 configuring data sources with 284 OLE objects 553 739 741 743 777 836 903 about 739 changing 214 568 571 598 600 740 741 915 1236 the icon for 741 the source applica...

Page 1432: ...747 756 recovered files 387 from sheet sets 1068 from standard file selection dialog boxes 749 rendered images 977 splines 1139 1142 text window 1196 Visual Basic Editor 1249 OPENSHEETSET command 760 operating system commands accessing from AutoCAD 1090 operators 277 279 283 298 475 947 for link selections 298 for queries 277 279 283 for reusable filters 475 for selection set filters 947 options 3...

Page 1433: ...67 Files tab 762 Open and Save tab 771 Plot and Publish tab 776 Profiles tab 793 Selection tab 789 System tab 780 User Preferences tab 783 Options dialog box for i drop See i drop Options dialog box Options menu In Place Text Editor 699 Order Group dialog box 489 ordinate dimensions 325 327 339 937 creating 80 151 325 327 329 339 543 555 557 590 664 691 844 845 857 937 938 945 970 984 1042 1104 11...

Page 1434: ...control code for 1194 P Page Setup dialog box 770 777 813 814 816 899 about 816 display options 770 displaying 813 814 filtering paper size lists 899 limiting the devices listed 777 page setup list 813 layouts with asterisks 813 Page Setup Manager 811 816 about 811 Page Setup dialog box 816 page setup override files 825 page setup overrides 1069 automatically published with selected sheets in shee...

Page 1435: ... 822 873 879 1036 width height specifying with MVSETUP 719 paper source 898 paper space 499 691 724 818 819 829 831 867 869 881 882 923 1029 1130 1215 1278 1281 1327 applying layouts 923 converting length values from model space 1029 1130 creating layout viewport configurations in 1278 1281 creating slide files in 691 geometry loading into partially open drawings 829 831 hiding objects for plottin...

Page 1436: ...3 partially open drawings loading geometry into with OPEN 756 PARTIALOAD command 828 Partial Load dialog box 828 PARTIALOPEN command 833 Password tab Security Options dialog box 1045 passwords 74 76 450 453 756 775 927 931 1045 1047 adding to drawings 1045 for archive packages 74 76 confirming 931 1047 for DWF files 927 931 encryption options 1047 FTP sites 756 lost or forgotten 1047 options 775 f...

Page 1437: ...838 settings from 905 PC3 plotter configuration files 765 777 778 819 822 824 868 873 876 878 893 897 902 905 930 attaching detaching PMP files to from 902 905 changes to 824 876 930 default output devices 778 default paper sizes 873 device settings 897 displaying device driver names for 876 listing 819 868 moving 777 one time plot changes 876 Plotter Configuration Editor and 893 search paths for ...

Page 1438: ...dering type 612 1011 1015 Pi function in QuickCalc calculator 954 pick button mouse 1329 zooming with 1329 PICKADD system variable 917 1050 about PICKAUTO system variable 791 about implied windowing and 791 pickbox cursor 790 resizing 790 PICKBOX system variable PICKDRAG system variable PICKFIRST system variable 975 PICKSTYLE system variable pixels 818 specifying number of to plotted units 818 pla...

Page 1439: ...s 780 823 873 OLE object options 777 options for 764 776 874 in page setups 814 825 page setups 866 plot area specifications 822 873 plot stamps 869 plot style option 820 870 874 plotting paper space last 819 869 previewing 824 874 quality 777 resolution 870 retaining 778 scale specifications 823 874 screening 1165 shaded and rendered viewports 823 874 880 style table specifications 817 867 upside...

Page 1440: ... converting 59 153 231 235 237 294 570 740 801 889 953 1029 1130 1137 1282 1289 between CTBs and STBs 236 237 converting to named plot styles 889 copying names with MATCHPROP 648 deleting 69 130 153 185 187 218 308 443 447 486 488 491 527 528 566 570 573 579 587 589 592 602 620 626 650 651 653 676 685 720 724 725 747 749 756 794 924 967 1035 1037 1039 1054 1087 1090 1103 1114 1122 1133 1140 1145 1...

Page 1441: ...4 763 776 793 824 872 876 930 1184 changes to configuration 930 PC3 files 824 with Plotter Manager 776 maximum printable areas 898 monochrome 1163 named in page setups 868 924 names of 877 in page setups 814 822 825 paper size 778 properties of 820 transmittal packages and 451 updating PC3 files for 876 plotting 572 576 585 715 776 778 779 805 818 866 868 870 872 874 876 879 880 882 883 897 899 90...

Page 1442: ...ons 143 145 147 167 Chain Action property 168 point size for OLE objects 743 Point Style dialog box 312 pointing devices 783 options 783 points 64 152 155 161 169 179 191 195 197 201 207 221 321 382 412 507 543 595 615 653 665 666 679 909 939 943 1009 1042 1057 1059 1061 1096 1104 1110 1128 1135 1181 1187 1222 1270 1282 1313 1331 1332 for 3D projection 1061 aligning the axis of rotation with 1009 ...

Page 1443: ...m 1059 Polar Move Pair parameter set 148 Polar Move parameter set 147 polar parameters 143 147 170 171 adding to dynamic block definitions 143 147 170 Chain Action property 171 polar stretch actions 118 120 127 146 adding to block definitions 118 127 146 selection sets for 120 Polar Stretch Pair parameter set 148 Polar Stretch parameter set 148 polar tracking 392 393 786 789 angle settings 392 393...

Page 1444: ... 469 generating with XCLIP 1311 joining 561 677 839 846 1164 JOIN command 561 linetypes 133 216 220 427 522 593 594 618 622 631 648 687 847 918 935 972 1146 1151 1161 1162 1164 1317 generating 847 measuring 654 opening 839 properties of 648 649 copying with MATCHPROP 648 rectangular drawing 958 revolving 984 specifying width of 840 844 spline fit polylines 845 wipeout frames and 1295 See also 3D p...

Page 1445: ...iew images 52 963 DesignCenter items 52 external references 963 preview images of drawings 747 749 775 799 displaying 747 749 saving drawings with 775 thumbnails 799 preview images of drawings displaying 729 preview images of sheets sheet views and model space views 799 1248 thumbnails 799 updating 1248 preview rotation angles 663 1299 for inserting multiple instances of blocks 663 for inserting W...

Page 1446: ...d 714 printers 820 868 872 configuration 872 names 868 properties of 820 printing dimension style properties 376 rendered images 978 See also plotting problems with drawings 1469 problems with nonstandard objects 217 1469 PRODUCT system variable profile blocks and lines 1121 profiles 794 795 1103 deleting 794 renaming 795 profiles solids 1103 1120 1122 choosing 2D or 3D projection 1122 creating 11...

Page 1447: ...20 about 914 915 Add Angle Value dialog box 920 Add Distance Value dialog box 920 Properties palette 916 Properties dialog box See Drawing Properties dialog box Properties palette 168 170 172 174 176 179 309 916 917 920 about 916 auto hide option 916 closing 920 creating selection sets with filters 917 displaying object types 917 displaying parameters in 168 170 172 174 176 179 moving and resizing...

Page 1448: ...und options 779 current drawing selections 812 displaying details about drawings 926 drawing names 924 importing page setups 825 job progress 931 loading lists of drawings 925 managing in Publish dialog box 922 Model layout 924 number of copies 925 options for 776 page setups 812 825 923 924 removing drawings from lists 924 renaming drawings 924 reordering list 924 925 saving lists 925 transmittin...

Page 1449: ... 290 exporting 288 importing 290 question mark 56 753 wild card character 56 753 question mark wild card character 972 Question status for markups 640 Quick Help Info palette 90 closing 90 opening 90 Quick object snap 810 Quick Query tab Query Editor 275 Quick Select dialog box 917 946 Quick Setup wizard starting drawings 731 Quick Text mode turning on off 948 QuickCalc calculator 949 951 956 abou...

Page 1450: ... database tables 782 Readme file 1 real time 405 826 1328 panning in 826 zooming in 405 1328 rearranging 135 185 block attributes 135 visibility states 185 reassociating dimensions 343 Received Line Signal Detector handshaking 907 recently used files 747 accessing 747 recently used files setting the number of 774 recommended fixes for flagged objects 1147 Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog b...

Page 1451: ...Settings tab 965 referenced layers 591 references 962 967 1305 in place editing 967 nested 964 966 1305 saving back or discarding changes to 962 966 selecting for editing 963 selecting nested objects 965 reflection color of materials 993 998 1000 1002 adjusting 993 granite 998 marble 1000 wood 1002 refraction adjusting 993 refreshing extracted block attribute information 432 refreshing the display...

Page 1452: ...620 reloading 533 535 1320 image files 533 535 xrefs 1320 REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable 748 Remove object selection method 1051 removing 26 63 64 130 151 218 342 422 441 486 488 491 495 508 527 528 543 573 592 656 701 756 767 839 924 935 938 961 967 1051 1070 1081 1083 1105 1117 1121 1141 1145 1260 1309 1323 1471 applications 61 64 from history list 63 from Startup Suite 64 back faces 26 block a...

Page 1453: ...1 image files 533 536 layer states 587 layers 570 layouts 589 linetypes 619 multilines 683 named objects 971 plot styles 972 profiles 795 808 sheet set view categories 1072 sheet sets 1070 sheets 924 1070 1077 text styles 972 1156 viewport configurations 972 views 972 1259 views in sheet sets 1078 See also naming RENDER command 973 977 979 about 973 Render dialog box 973 Render window 977 Windows ...

Page 1454: ...bjects 218 1148 text 56 94 100 131 132 213 214 305 310 356 362 364 388 426 463 465 476 478 479 522 562 595 649 664 696 697 699 701 703 705 707 709 743 797 948 1037 1130 1173 1175 1178 1180 1187 1188 1194 1196 1209 finding and replacing 701 703 in DBCONNECT 305 REPLAY command 980 981 about 980 Image Specifications dialog box 981 REPORTERROR system variable reports 72 446 454 926 1268 1473 batch aud...

Page 1455: ...961 reviewing markups 638 revision clouds markups 983 revision numbers 421 REVOLVE command 984 revolving See rotating revolving See rotating revolving REVSURF command 986 RFILEOPT command See RENDER command RGB color system color book equivalents 229 distant light colors 607 See also red green blue RGB color system for selected colors 225 specifying 228 RGB color system spotlight colors 610 ridge ...

Page 1456: ...1147 1153 1196 1217 1223 1269 1270 1282 1289 1290 1300 1321 1331 1333 1469 in 3D Orbit view 38 in polar arrays 84 path curves or profiles about a selected axis 986 a point about an axis 200 target point about a camera 409 a UCS about an axis 1225 viewing direction 1274 views in viewports 720 rotation angle 8 87 93 101 112 214 542 548 552 553 660 710 1005 1056 1058 1059 1065 1101 1110 1189 1210 122...

Page 1457: ...5 S safety precaution options 775 sampledesigncenter folder 53 SAT ASCII ACIS files 47 exporting to 47 importing 47 saturation of colors 227 specifying 227 Save Block As dialog box 182 SAVE command 1025 Save Image dialog box 1030 Save List As dialog box 925 Save Workspace dialog box 1302 SAVEAS command 1025 1027 1029 about 1025 command line prompts 1029 Saveas Options dialog box 1027 Template Desc...

Page 1458: ...ing Automatic Save 772 files after system failures 386 landscape library files 627 layer states properties 580 586 layer translation mappings 592 layout changes to plot settings 871 layouts 589 lists of drawing sheets 925 materials library files 650 objects 23 38 47 77 80 83 84 106 107 159 179 218 219 239 252 309 441 457 460 464 467 486 488 491 523 561 562 594 598 623 643 663 664 689 715 737 756 8...

Page 1459: ...786 managing 786 SCALELISTEDIT command 1033 1037 about 1033 Add Scale dialog box 1035 command line prompts 1037 Edit Scale dialog box 1036 Edit Scale List dialog box 1034 SCALETEXT command 1037 scaling 153 1033 1037 1038 blocks 153 objects 1033 text 1037 scanning 929 drawings for block definitions 929 SCENE command 1039 1040 about 1039 Modify Scene dialog box 1040 New Scene dialog box 1040 Scenes ...

Page 1460: ...ioning 1042 planes 1042 sections viewports generating 1103 security of files 927 1045 1047 digital signatures 1047 encrypting drawings 1046 1047 password protection 927 1045 1047 Security Options dialog box 1045 1047 about 1045 Digital Signature tab 1047 Password tab 1045 SECURITYOPTIONS command 1045 1047 about 1045 Advanced Options dialog box 1047 Confirm Password dialog box 1047 Security Options...

Page 1461: ...56 701 756 767 839 924 935 938 961 967 1051 1070 1081 1083 1105 1117 1121 1141 1145 1260 1309 1323 1471 faces from 1105 removing objects from 1168 Selection tab Options dialog box 789 SELECTIONAREA system variable 806 SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system variable 806 SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable self extracting executable files 75 450 archive packages 75 transmittal files 450 semi infinite lines rays 9...

Page 1462: ...ce 1012 specifying type and options 611 for spotlight 610 SHAPE command 624 1065 loading files for use by 624 shape files 230 624 1065 compiling 230 inserting 1065 listing 1065 loading 624 1065 shapes 935 purging from the drawing database 935 sharpness 999 1000 of granite material 999 of marble material 1000 sheet list Create Transmittal dialog box 443 Sheet List control 1066 Sheet List tab Sheet ...

Page 1463: ...r subsets 1070 renaming categories 1072 renaming sheets and sets 1070 1077 renumbering 1070 selecting sheets for sets 1085 sheet list tables 1068 1080 sheet numbers 1076 sheet titles 1076 transmitting 454 1070 1073 updating and resaving 1070 view categories 1087 sheet thumbnail images 1248 updating 1248 sheet view thumbnail images 1248 updating 1248 sheet views 466 799 fields 466 preview images 79...

Page 1464: ...793 trimming rather than extending objects 457 shortcut functions 206 shortcut keys 240 242 244 customizing 240 242 244 shortcut keys in tooltips display options 770 shortcut menus 2 21 35 240 242 260 261 263 269 272 529 784 785 803 804 827 913 1067 1071 1073 1268 1329 3DORBIT 35 Adjust Clipping Planes 21 availability of 2 Cell Data View window in dbConnect 270 Column Data View window in dbConnect...

Page 1465: ...1209 UCS icon 1232 SKETCH command 1094 SKETCHINC system variable SKPOLY system variable 1094 SLA Stereolithography Apparatus compatible file format 1153 slanted text 698 SLB slide library files 1284 1474 SLD slide files 691 1284 1474 SLICE command 1095 1096 1099 about 1095 aligning cutting planes 1095 1096 defining cutting planes 1096 1099 slicing 3D solids 1095 with a plane 1095 slide files 691 1...

Page 1466: ...5 557 590 664 691 844 845 857 937 938 945 970 984 1042 1104 1120 1208 1242 1243 1275 1474 with INTERFERE 555 profile images of 1120 with REVOLVE 984 with SOLID 1104 with UNION 1242 cylinders 252 filling 468 mass properties displayed for 645 profile images creating 1120 separating 1118 slicing with a plane 1095 spheres 1134 storing in ASCII or binary files 1152 subtracting area or volume from 1167 ...

Page 1467: ... 842 849 858 866 924 1048 1106 1138 1143 1145 1160 1166 control points to 1143 fit points to 1138 aligning 47 94 360 380 562 628 630 666 696 705 708 719 1005 1007 1042 1095 1096 1111 1112 1178 1188 axis of rotation with 1112 cutting plane with 1095 changing weight at control points 1143 closing 1135 1139 1142 converting 59 153 231 235 237 294 570 740 801 889 953 1029 1130 1137 1282 1289 2D or 3D p...

Page 1468: ...n transformation table 1184 standard file selection dialog boxes 745 opening 745 standard numeric functions supported by the CAL command 194 Standard snap grid 1102 standards 217 591 1146 1469 1472 Batch Standards Checker 1469 checking drawings for violations 217 1469 for named objects plug ins 1146 plug ins 1472 translating layers to different standards 591 standards check files 1473 chx file ext...

Page 1469: ...ers 878 sheets 924 status bar tray 1148 1214 icon and notification settings 1214 notifications 1148 STATUS command 1150 STB plot style table files 236 237 764 801 1160 Add a Plot Style Table wizard 1160 converting CTBs to 236 237 default plot style tables 801 options for new drawings 801 search path settings for 764 stereolithography apparatus file compatibility 1153 STL files 1153 STLOUT command ...

Page 1470: ...extension line display 352 hidden lines 416 519 521 hidden profile lines 1121 zeros 368 371 374 375 for alternate dimension units 371 for alternate tolerance units 375 for angular dimensions 368 for dimension tolerances 374 for linear dimensions 368 surface of revolution meshes creating 986 surface patches EDGESURF command and 435 surface tessellation 24 SURFTAB1 system variable 436 851 988 1186 S...

Page 1471: ...ing text 1175 extracted block attributes in 431 inserting 1171 1173 margins in cells 1181 read only database tables 782 refreshing block attribute information 432 sheet list tables 1081 styles 432 table styles 1176 1178 turning off table selection previewing 807 TABLESTYLE command 1176 1178 about 1176 Create New Table Style dialog box 1177 Modify Table Style dialog box 1178 New Table Style dialog ...

Page 1472: ...search path for 766 temporary points 1332 TEMPOVERRIDES system variable TEMPPREFIX system variable 766 termination strings 903 tessellation 24 dynamic 24 tessellation lines 24 defined 24 tetrahedrons 14 text 56 94 100 131 132 213 214 305 310 356 362 364 388 426 463 465 476 478 479 522 562 595 649 664 696 697 699 701 703 705 707 709 743 797 948 1037 1130 1173 1175 1178 1180 1187 1188 1194 1196 1209...

Page 1473: ...1192 text styles standards files for 1146 1472 Text tab New Dimension Style dialog box 356 text window 309 483 624 1196 displaying 51 96 150 184 186 187 230 243 247 261 262 269 272 309 347 377 403 416 417 419 420 426 434 487 529 544 568 571 593 601 633 635 641 642 688 784 785 814 817 822 834 855 873 980 1121 1122 1126 1148 1150 1151 1159 1196 1197 1204 1205 1209 1228 1230 1233 1249 1258 1263 1264 ...

Page 1474: ...displaying list of 1046 1468 displaying service used 1093 time stamps on digital signatures 1046 1468 time sensitive right clicking 803 time date 55 613 1046 1197 1468 drawing statistics displaying 1197 searching for content by 55 specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator 613 time servers 1046 1468 timestamps for digital signatures 1046 time date plot or publish jobs 1268 timeouts during plotting 906...

Page 1475: ...or 141 button images 243 Customize toolbar 243 customizing 240 242 251 buttons and toolbars 240 242 displaying hiding 243 1204 1206 docking 1205 floating 1206 QuickCalc calculator 949 Text Formatting 693 TOOLPALETTES command 1206 1209 1211 about 1206 Add Actions dialog box 1211 Tool Properties dialog box 1209 View Options dialog box 1209 TOOLPALETTESCLOSE command 1212 Tooltip Appearance dialog box...

Page 1476: ...Editor 699 transparent images 1214 TRANSPARENCY command 1214 Transparency dialog box 808 1208 about 808 displaying 1208 transparent commands 2 1221 undoing effects of 1221 Tray Settings dialog box 1215 TRAYICONS system variable TRAYNOTIFY system variable TRAYSETTINGS command 1214 1215 about 1214 Tray Settings dialog box 1215 TRAYTIMEOUT system variable tree view 244 247 251 260 466 525 527 533 642...

Page 1477: ...m variable TSPACETYPE system variable TSTACKALIGN system variable TSTACKSIZE system variable TTR tangent tangent radius circle specification 223 turbulence of marble material 1000 turning the camera 46 tutorials for dynamic block definitions 142 twist angle specification DVIEW command 414 TXT files 73 450 454 in archive packages 73 in transmittal packages 450 transmittal report files 454 U U comma...

Page 1478: ...94 underscoring text control code for 1195 UNDO command Auto option 1240 commands and system variables unaffected by 1240 continuously repeating scripts and 1023 grouping sequences of operations Begin End options 1241 limiting or turning off Control option 1240 marking undo information Mark Back options 1241 reversing several commands 690 for a specified number of preceding operations 1240 See als...

Page 1479: ...ard 733 current format and precision 1244 1247 with the Quick Setup wizard 731 setting for plots 821 See also imperial units unloading 61 63 89 250 534 536 639 656 831 1252 1257 1320 1323 applications 61 64 with APPLOAD 61 63 image files 534 536 markup sets 639 ObjectARX applications 89 partial customization files 656 user interface customizations 250 VBA projects 1252 1257 xrefs 831 1320 1323 unl...

Page 1480: ...ser Defined Fields dialog box 884 user elapsed timer turning on off or resetting 1197 user interface 240 242 244 245 247 250 251 customizing 240 242 customizing tool palettes 251 displaying item properties 245 displaying or hiding items 247 exporting customizations to files 250 importing customizations from files 250 loading customizations from files 250 macros assigned to items 244 unloading cust...

Page 1481: ...mpts 1256 Macros dialog box 1253 Select Project dialog box 1255 VBA Options dialog box 1255 VBASTMT command 1257 VBAUNLOAD command 1257 vec and vec1 functions CAL command 195 207 vector expression operators 190 vector graphics plot options 904 vectors 191 195 199 205 954 calculating normal vectors 205 calculating with CAL 195 filtering components of 199 formatting for use with CAL 191 functions in...

Page 1482: ...ing for 3D visualization 1273 view transitions 1284 in running scripts 1284 setting for pan zoom 1284 View Transitions dialog box 1284 VIEWCTR system variable VIEWDIR system variable viewing drawings 47 54 108 139 217 224 385 387 403 416 417 419 420 422 456 546 553 593 639 689 727 744 746 747 749 753 756 761 772 773 775 783 785 805 823 828 833 855 857 864 875 889 908 920 932 933 944 945 948 957 96...

Page 1483: ... 1121 irregularly shaped polygonal 715 layout options for 721 named views 1259 1260 number of available 714 plotting settings 715 1282 properties of 648 649 copying with MATCHPROP 649 refreshing the display of 961 968 969 restoring configurations 716 setting layer visibility in 1271 setting MVSETUP preferences 723 shaded and rendered viewport options 823 874 880 shadeplot settings 715 1282 switchi...

Page 1484: ... creating 1126 orthographic restoring 1260 panning 38 parallel projection perspective 406 placing automatically on layouts 1073 plotting 867 renaming 972 1259 renaming in sheet sets 1078 renumbering in sheet sets 1078 restoring 378 574 579 580 586 587 641 716 743 960 1227 1239 1257 1259 1261 1264 1265 1280 1282 1327 previous 1259 1265 saving 1265 for scenes 1040 1041 sectional 1128 sheets 799 1071...

Page 1485: ... UCS icon 1229 w2u function CAL command 199 warning messages 778 782 822 873 926 1147 1268 displaying for publishing jobs 926 options 782 paper size problems 822 873 plotting reports 1268 print spoolers 778 standards violations 1147 WBLOCK command 1287 1289 command line prompts 1289 Write Block dialog box 1287 WCS world coordinate system 198 1056 1125 1228 converting points to UCS 198 creating a p...

Page 1486: ...listing 819 868 Wintab compatible digitizers 781 WIPEOUT command 1294 wipeout frames 1294 wireframes 24 715 770 821 871 881 1282 3D graphics adaptive degradation 24 displaying silhouettes as 770 plotting and 715 1282 shade plot settings 821 871 881 wizards 730 732 838 893 898 902 905 933 1160 Add Plot Style Table wizard 1160 Add a Plotter wizard 893 Advanced Setup wizard 732 Custom Paper Size wiza...

Page 1487: ...of blocks 659 662 UCS icon symbols 1232 X scale factor 551 552 1296 for inserted blocks 551 552 for WMF files 1296 X Y Z method for defining a UCS 1225 XATTACH command 1305 about 1305 External Reference dialog box 1305 XBIND command 1308 1310 about 1308 command line prompts 1310 Xbind dialog box 1309 Xbind dialog box 1309 XCLIP command 1310 1312 about 1310 defining clipping boundaries 1312 deletin...

Page 1488: ... for WMF files 1297 yellow alert icon 146 YZ plane aligning cutting planes with 1098 Z Z axis 659 662 1009 1096 1112 1222 1229 1239 3D UCS icon symbol 1229 aligning the axis of rotation with 1009 1112 defining 20 502 507 732 734 1096 1222 1225 1310 cutting planes with 1096 UCS with 1222 displaying UCS values 1239 scale factors for inserting multiple instances of blocks 659 662 Z Axis method for de...

Page 1489: ...text with FIND 479 to display 1326 1327 drawing extents 1326 previous view 1327 generated portion of the drawing with a view box 1326 on a view 46 ZX plane aligning cutting planes with 1098 ...

Page 1490: ......

Reviews:

No comments